Toshiba Strata Dk8 Installation And Maintenance Manual & 16

Strata DK 8-16 Instalation Strata DK_8-16_Instalation www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-Strata-Dk8-Installation-And-Maintenance-Manual-127602 toshiba-strata-dk8-installation-and-maintenance-manual-127602 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 321

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Digital Key Telephone Systems

DK8 & DK16
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Telecommunication Systems Division
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon,
may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information retrieval
systems—with the exception of the System Record forms, without written
permission of the publisher of this material.

SERIAL NO.

DK8 & DK16

DK8-MA-IN/MT-R1
4025021

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
Chapter One
Chapter Two
Chapter Three
Chapter Four
Chapter Five
Chapter Six
Chapter Seven
Chapter Eight

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Introduction
Site Requirements
System Configuration
DK8 KSU and PCB Installation
DK16 KSU and PCB Installation
Station Apparatus Installation
Peripheral Installation
Wiring Diagrams

Section 100-816-201
Section 100-816-202
Section 100-816-203
Section 100-816-204
Section 100-816-205
Section 100-816-206
Section 100-816-207
Section 100-816-208

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-016-201
NOVEMBER 1992

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER ONE
INTRODUCTION

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
3.50
4
4.10

SUBJECT
PURPOSE ..............................................................................................................
ORGANIZATION ....................................................................................................
REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................
General Description ............................................................................................
Programming ......................................................................................................
User Guides ........................................................................................................
Fault Finding Procedures ...................................................................................
Remote Maintenance and Administration...........................................................
SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS ............................................................................
Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions, and Warnings ....................................

1-i

PAGE
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-5

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993
telephones, standard telephones, direct station
selection consoles, add-on modules and data interface units.

1 PURPOSE
1.00 The purpose of this section is to provide
detailed step-by-step instructions for installing the
STRATA DK8 and STRATA DK16 systems.

3.40 Fault Finding Procedures: Hardware troubleshooting and diagnostic information presented
in flowchart form.

1.01 This chapter provides an overview of the
entire installation section, and includes a list of
reference documentation that supports the installed system; a list of system mnemonics is also
provided.

3.50 Remote Maintenance and Administration:
Programming and maintenance procedures specially adapted for remote maintenance and administration terminal use. Detailed, step-by-step instructions are provided, complete with the terminal
responses.

2 ORGANIZATION
2.00 This manual is organized in modular chapters for easy removal and replacement of updated
materials. The chapters are as follows:
Chapter One
- Introduction
Chapter Two
Chapter Three

- Site Requirements
- System Configuration

Chapter Four

- STRATA DK8 KSU and PCB
Installation

Chapter Five

- STRATA DK16 KSU and PCB
Installation

4 SYSTEM MNEMONICS/TERMS
4.00 Mnemonics are used to identify the system’s
hardware, operation, and features. The following
alphabetical listing describes the mnemonics used
in this manual.
ADM: Add-on Module—A telephone upgrade that
provides 20 Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons with busy LED indication on STRATA DK16
and 10 DSS buttons plus 8 speed dial buttons
(one for every station), one night transfer and
one all call page button on STRATA DK8. Can
be installed on any or all 2000-series Digital
Telephones in the system. Attaches to the telephone and uses the same port assigned to the
telephone. ADM buttons are fixed and cannot
be changed in system programming.

Chapter Six
- Station Apparatus Installation
Chapter Seven - Peripherals Installation
Chapter Eight

- System Wiring and Main Distribution Frame Arrangements

3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION
3.00 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 digital key
systems are supported by the following complement of reference documentation:

BPS: Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It is used when describing
data interface unit and modem operation.

3.10 General Description: An overview of the
STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems and their features.

CO: Central Office—The facility which houses
switching equipment that provides telephone
service (CO lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the
immediate geographical area.

3.20 Programming: Detailed step-by-step instructions on how to enter data in the System
Record sheets, and how to program the system
from the completed System Record Sheets. LCD
responses are included to provide clear guidance
for the programmer.

CO Line: A term used to define the STRATA
hardware circuit that connects to the Central
Office network line pair. Each CO line is assigned a CO line number in system software.

3.30 User Guides: Detailed step-by-step guides
on how to operate digital telephones, electronic

1-1

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993
CODECs: Coder/Decoders—Semiconductors that
allow the system to process analog-to-digital
and digital-to-analog conversions.

There are two types of DSS consoles: the DDSS
console and the HDSS console. The chief difference between them is that the DDSS console
can be connected to designated digital telephone circuits, while the HDSS console can
only be connected to designated electronic telephone circuits.

DDCB: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A
peripheral hardware unit that can be connected
to designated digital telephone circuits/ports.
The DDCB has three interfaces, two of which
are dedicated to door phones (MDFB), and one
that can be connected to a MDFB or a door lock.

DTMF: Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button
dialing.

DISA: Direct Inward System Access—A feature
available for CO lines that allows an outside
party to access a STRATA system’s internal
stations or outgoing CO lines without going
through an operator or automated attendant. An
optional security code and/or account codes
may be set to prevent unauthorized access to
outgoing CO lines for through system calling.

DVSU: Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade—A subassembly that allows a digital telephone to receive Off-hook Call Announce.
EOCU: Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (STRATA
DK16 only)—An optional subassembly to the
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PCB (PEKU)
or Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
(PESU) that provides support for electronic telephones that must receive Off-hook Call Announce. Electronic telephones that must receive Off-hook Call Announce must also have
an HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU/
HVSI subassemblies.

DK: Digital Key.
DKSU8: Key Service Unit (STRATA DK8 only)—
The standard key service unit which includes
the system's motherboard, power supply, two
CO line circuits, four digital telephone circuits,
relay service, and interface for Music-on-hold
(MOH)/Background Music (BGM) and External
Page.

FCC: Federal Communication Commission—The
telecommunication industry’s federal regulatory
agency. All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or
approved.

DKSUB16: Base Key Service Unit (STRATA DK16
only)—The standard key service unit which includes the system's motherboard, power supply, four CO line circuits, eight digital telephone
circuits, relay service, and interface for Musicon-hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) and
External Page.

HESB: External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system and
telephones to provide a variety of functions.
HESC-65A: A cable that connects an HHEUequipped digital telephone or electronic telephone to an HESB for a Loud Ringing Bell .

DKSUE16: Expansion Key Service Unit (STRATA
DK16 only)—The optional key service unit which
has four universal slots that can support CO line,
station, and external option printed circuit boards
that are compatible with the larger STRATA DK
systems (DK24/DK56/DK96).

HHEU: Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Jack Interface
Upgrade—A small subassembly for use inside a
digital telephone or a 6500-series electronic
telephone that allows a speaker (HESB) and/or
a headset to be installed with the station.

DSS: Direct Station Selection Console (STRATA
DK16 only)—A console designed to facilitate
the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls.

HVSU2: Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade—A
subassembly that enables an electronic telephone to receive Off-hook Call Announce.

1-2

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993
IMDU: Remote Maintenance Modem Interface
Unit (STRATA DK16 only)—A subassembly
installed on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the optional DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit that
allows the system to be connected with a remote
maintenance/administration terminal.

LED: Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards, digital telephones,
and electronic telephones.
LSI: Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit
design technology. STRATA DK8 and STRATA
DK16 printed circuit boards use LSI circuit design.

KCDU: CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK16 only)—Optional printed circuit
board providing two loop start CO line circuits
and four digital telephone circuits that can be
installed in the Expansion Unit. The digital telephone circuits support the same devices as the
PDKU except for the DDSS console.

MDF: Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame
usually located in a phone closet.
MDFB: Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way
speaker box option. Each MDFB connects to a
DDCB. A DDCB can support as many as three
MDFBs.

KCOU: CO Line Interface Unit (STRATA DK16
only)—Factory-installed printed circuit board that
comes standard with the Base Key Service Unit
to provide four loop start CO line circuits. Available as a spare unit for field replacements.

OCA: Off-hook Call Announce.
PBX: Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises, which serves an individual
company, and is connected to a public telephone exchange through the CO.

KFCU: (STRATA DK16 only) Option feature cartridge that plugs into the Base Unit to provide
feature upgrades to DK16.

PCB: Printed Circuit Board.

KPSU16: (STRATA DK16 only) Power supply that
comes factory-installed in the Base Key Service
Unit. This power supply provides power to the
entire system, in its standard and expanded
configurations. Available as a spare unit for field
replacements.

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation—A widely used
form of digital telephone switching.
PCOU1: CO Line Interface Unit (STRATA DK16
only)—A printed circuit board that can be installed in the optional Expansion Key Service
Unit to provide the system with four loop start
CO lines circuits.

K4RCU: (STRATA DK16 only) Optional unit that
can be installed in the Base Key Service Unit to
provide a 4-circuit Dual-tone Multi-frequency
receiver for CO lines and standard telephones.
It also provides busy tone detection for Auto
Busy Redial.

PCOU2: (STRATA DK16 only) The PCOU2 is a
direct replacement for the PCOU1. Their fit/
form/function is identical; however, for manufacturing reasons, the PCOU1 was phased out
in favor of the PCOU2.

KSTU: Standard Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK16 only)—Optional printed circuit
board that can be installed in the Base Key
Service Unit to provide four standard telephone
circuits.

PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2: Integrated Data Interface
Unit—Replaces the normal digital telephone
base to enable the telephone to transmit and
receive data between a terminal/personal computer connected to the telephone and data
devices connected to other PDIU-DIs, or to
modems, printers, and computers connected to

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display—Display used for
messaging, identification, and status that appears on some digital and electronic telephones.

1-3

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993
support the same single-line devices as the KSTU
and the PSTU.

Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DSs).
The PDIU-DI is also used to provide personal
computer access to outside dial-up data services and/or bulletin boards.

PFT: Power Failure Transfer Interface—Dedicated
standard telephone interface located on the
motherboard in the DKSUB16 (STRATA DK16)
or DKSU8 (STRATA DK8) to provide emergency
service during a system power failure.

NOTE:
The PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DI2 are identical,
except that the PDIU-DI attaches to 1000series Digital Telephones, while the PDIUDI2 attaches to 2000-series Digital Telephones.

PIOU: Option Interface Unit (STRATA DK16 only)—
A printed circuit board that can be installed in the
optional Expansion Key Service Unit to provide
support and/or circuit interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades.

PDIU-DS : Stand-alone Data Interface Unit—Used
for modem pooling, printer sharing, and access
to a host/mainframe computer.

PIOUS: (STRATA DK16 only) The same as the
PIOU, except the PIOUS has one external paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four.

PDKU1: Digital Telephone Interface Unit (STRATA
DK16 only)—A printed board that can be installed in the optional Expansion Key Service
Unit to provide the system with eight digital
telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can support data interface
units (Stand-alone and Integrated), a digital
DSS console (DDSS), and a digital door phone/
lock control unit (DDCB).

NOTE:
The system cannot support the PIOU and
PIOUS simultaneously. Only one or the other
can be installed.
PORT: There are two types of ports: physical and
logical. A physical port is an actual station circuit
location; a logical port is the set of characteristics—features, station intercom number, etc.—
assigned to the physical port. Logical ports are
mobile. They can be moved from one physical
port to another.

PDKU2: Digital Telephone Interface Unit (STRATA
DK16 only)—Provides same function as the
PDKU1, except that the PDKU1 can only support data interface units on Circuits 1 ~ 7, while
the PDKU2 can support data interface units on
Circuits 1 ~ 8.

PBTC: A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect
customer-supplied batteries to the power supply in the DKSUB for emergency reserve power.

PEKU: Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK16 only)—An optional PCB that
provides the system with eight electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic
telephones, a Background Music source, an
electronic DSS console (HDSS), and an amplifier for two CO line conference calls.

PPTC: (STRATA DK16 only) A Toshiba-supplied
adapter that is used to connect the modular
SMDR and/or maintenance ports to the DB-25
connector of a printer, terminal, modem or call
accounting machine. The SMDR/Maintenance
(TTY) port is located on the optional QSMU PCB
(STRATA DK8), or PIOU or PIOUS PCB
(STRATA DK16).

PESU: Standard/Electronic Interface Unit (STRATA
DK16 only)—A printed circuit board with two
standard telephone circuits and four electronic
telephone circuits that can be installed in the
optional Expansion Key Service Unit. The electronic telephone circuits can support the same
devices as the PEKU, except for the HDSS
console. The standard telephone circuits can

PSTU1: Standard Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK16 only)—A printed circuit board
with a built-in ring generator that can be installed
in the optional Expansion Key Service Unit to

1-4

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-201
MARCH 1993
provide interface for eight standard telephones
or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail
devices, fax machine, Background Music source,
etc).

(STRATA DK8 only)—Optional printed circuit
board that can be installed in the KSU to provide
two standard telephone circuits.
RAM: Random Access Memory—Refers to the
type of system memory that holds individual
system configuration and feature programming.
RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily
revised in programming.

PSTU2: Standard Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK16 only)—Provides the same function as the PSTU with the addition of a switch to
select high or low ringing generator voltage.
QCDU: CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit
(STRATA DK8 only)—Optional printed circuit
board providing one loop start CO line circuit
and two digital telephone circuits that can be
installed in the KSU. A maximum of two QCDUs
may be installed in the DK8.

ROM: Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of
system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software
engineers.
4.10 Use of Notes, Important Notes, Cautions,
and Warnings

QCNU: Conference Unit (STRATA DK8 only)—
Standard factory-installed printed circuit board
provides two conference circuits that can be
installed in the KSU. The PCB allows two simultaneous conferences: four parties for the first,
and three parties for the second simultaneous
conference.

4.11 Notes call attention to specific items to elaborate, or to refer the reader to other information.
4.12 Important Notes are used when the information is considered to be very important.

QPSU: (STRATA DK8 only)—Power supply that
comes factory-installed in the KSU. This power
supply provides power to the entire system.
Available as a spare unit for field replacements.

4.13 Cautions call attention to the possibility of
equipment being damaged if the instructions are
not followed closely.
4.14 Warnings are used when the given tasks
involved could cause the possibility of personal
injury or death to the technician.

QRCU: Optional printed circuit board that can be
installed in the KSU to provide a 3-circuit Dualtone Multi-frequency receiver for DISA CO lines
and standard telephones. It also provides busy
tone detection for Auto Busy Redial.
QSMU: SMDR/TTY Interface Unit (STRATA DK8
only)—Optional printed circuit board which
provides either SMDR, or Remote Maintenance
Terminal (TTY) or external modem interface.
QSMU configuration is selectable in system
programming.
QSTU: Standard Telephone Interface Unit

1-5

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER TWO
SITE REQUIREMENTS

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
3
3.00
3.10
4
4.10
4.20

SUBJECT
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................
SITE CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................................................
Clearance and Location Requirements ..............................................................
Electrical/Environmental Requirements and Characteristics ...............................
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................
Third Wire Ground Test ......................................................................................
Alternate or Additional Ground ...........................................................................

PAGE
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-4

TABLE LIST
TABLE
2-A

TITLE
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS ..............

PAGE
2-3

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4

TITLE
DK8 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB MINIMUM CLEARANCE
REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................
BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS ..............
DK16 COMBINED BASE AND EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................
KSU GROUNDING DIAGRAM ...............................................................................

2-i

PAGE
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993
2.02 An option Reserve Power Battery and
Charger (HPFB) is available for use with the
STRATA DK8 to serve as a power failure backup.
For the STRATA DK16, a reserve power source
(two customer-supplied 12-volt batteries) may be
connected to the system to serve as a power
failure backup.

1 GENERAL
1.00 This chapter defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the STRATA DK8 and DK16.
Also included are grounding requirements.

2 INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS
2.00 The system requires an input power source
of 117VAC nominal (85VAC ~ 135VAC), 50/60 Hz,
15 amps. The AC outlet is recommended to be
dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third wire
ground (refer to Paragraph 4). This is to eliminate
interference from branch circuit motor noise or the
like, and to prevent accidental power-off.

3 SITE CONSIDERATIONS
3.00 Clearance and Location Requirements
3.01 The key service units must be wall mounted.
Figure 2-1 shows the minimum clearance requirements for the STRATA DK8 system, and includes
the recommended mounting location and clearance requirements for the optional HPFB. Figures
2-2 (Base Key Service Unit) and 2-3 (Base and
Expansion Key Service Unit together) show the
minimum clearance requirements for the standard

2.01 To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an ON/OFF wall switch not be
used on this dedicated AC circuit.

DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT
AND HPFB CLEARANCE

DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT CLEARANCE
FRONT VIEW

FRONT VIEW
2"

HPFB
2"

DK 8 KSU

10"

12.25"

DK 16
BASE KSU

16.4"

18"

TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW
3.5"

WALL

3 FEET

FIGURE 2-1
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND HPFB
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS

FIGURE 2-2
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
2-1

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993
3.03 If reserve power is to be installed for the
STRATA DK16, the batteries will require a wellventilated location close (within nine feet) to the
DKSUB16 (the optional Toshiba-supplied battery
cable is 9 feet in length). The STRATA DK8
reserve battery (HPFB) should be mounted directly above the DKSU8 as shown in Figure 2-1.

DK16 BASE AND EXPANSION
UNIT CLEARANCE
FRONT VIEW
20"

EXP

BASE

18"

3.10 Electrical/Environmental Requirements
and Characteristics
3.11 The electrical/environmental requirements
and characteristics for each system are provided
in Table 2-A.

2"
TOP VIEW
BASE

3.5"

WALL

4 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

3 FEET

EXP

4.00 The systems require a solid earth ground for
proper operation. Failure to provide ground may
lead to confusing trouble symptoms and, in extreme cases, system failure. The AC power cord
contains a conductor for the "third wire ground"
provided by the commercial power outlet. The
third-wire ground should be the only ground necessary for the DK8/DK16; this ground must originate at the buildings main power distribution panel
and have a solid connection to earth ground.
(Figure 2-4)

FIGURE 2-3
DK16 COMBINED BASE AND
EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT
MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS

and optioned STRATA DK16 system. Refer to
Chapter 4 for DK16 key service unit wall mounting
instructions.

4.10 Third Wire Ground Test
4.11 Test the "third wire ground" for continuity by
either measuring the resistance between the third
prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold
water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a
commercially available earth ground indicator. If
neither procedure is possible, perform the following earth ground test procedure:

3.02 The following conditions must be considered
when selecting a location for the key service unit(s):
The location MUST BE:
• Dry and clean
• Well ventilated
• Well illuminated
• Easily accessible

WARNING!
Hazardous voltages that may cause death
or injury are exposed during the following
test. Use great care when working with AC
power line voltage.

The location MUST NOT BE:
• Subject to extreme heat or cold
• Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants
• Subject to excessive vibration
• Next to television, radio, office automation, or
high frequency equipment

2-2

Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a
possible reading of up to 250 VAC.

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993

TABLE 2-A
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL/ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
GENERAL
Primary power
Input AC
AC frequency
Power

85 ~ 135VAC
50/60 Hz
DK8-46 watts maximum, DK16-75 watts maximum

Environmental specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature

32 ~ 104°F (0 ~ 40°C)
20 ~ 80% relative humidity without condensation
- 4 ~ 158°F (-20 ~ 70°C)

Power supply

DK16
DK8
–24VDC: (–26.3 ~ –27.8VDC) +24VDC: (+26.3 ~ +27.8VDC)
+5VDC: ( +4.5 ~ +5.5VDC) +5VDC: ( +4.5 ~ +5.5VDC)
–5VDC: ( –4.5 ~ –5.5VDC) Note: +5V converter
on KSU PCB

DC voltage output
specification

Battery charger characteristics

Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ± 0.5VDC

(DK16 only)

QSTU, KSTU, PSTU or PESU (circuits 1 & 2)

Square wave output with high/low option jumper:

Ring voltage

Low position, 130 ± 20VDC peak–to–peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak–to–peak (no-load)

Ringing capability

Two ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position

GROUND 1

Connect the meter probes between the two
main AC voltage terminals (white and black
wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained
should be between 100 ~ 120 VAC.

Move one of the meter probes to the third
terminal (green wire ground). Either the same
reading or a reading of zero volts should be
obtained.

If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on
the ground terminal and move the other probe
to the second voltage terminal.

THIRD WIRE GROUND
TO AC POWER CORD

THIRD WIRE
AC GROUND

DK8 OR DK16 KSU
POWER
SUPPLY

A
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM GROUND

CAUTION!
If a reading of zero volts is obtained on
both voltage terminals (white wire to green
wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is
not properly grounded. Omit steps 5 and
6, and proceed directly to step 7.

FIGURE 2-4
KSU GROUNDING DIAGRAM
2-3

INSTALLATION-SITE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 100-816-202
MARCH 1993
5)

If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and
a reading of 100 ~ 120 VAC on the other
terminal is obtained, remove both probes from
the outlet.

4.20 Alternate or Additional Ground
4.21 If the “third wire” AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or
other disturbance causes system malfunction, or if
local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct
ground may be warranted.

Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place
one probe on the ground terminal, and the
other probe on the terminal that produced a
reading of zero volts. The reading should be
less than 1 ohm.

4.22 Connect a separate earth ground from a cold
water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the FG
screw terminal on the DK8/DK16 power supply.
See Figure 4-5 of Section 100-816-204 (for
STRATA DK8) or Figure 5-8 of Section 100-816205 (for STRATA DK16).

CAUTION!
If the reading is more than one ohm, then
the outlet is not adequately grounded.
7)

If the above tests show the outlet is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the
system is connected.

2-4

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER THREE
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
4
4.10
4.20
5
5.10
5.20
5.40
5.50
6

SUBJECT
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................
SYSTEM CAPACITY ................................................................................................
Total System Capacity ..........................................................................................
The DK8 Key Service Unit ....................................................................................
The DK16 Base Key Service Unit.........................................................................
The DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit ................................................................
STATION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................
Telephone Circuit (Port) Types.............................................................................
Digital Telephone Circuit Connections .................................................................
Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections (STRATA DK16 Only) ........................
Standard Telephone Circuit Options ....................................................................
TELEPHONE UPGRADES ......................................................................................
Digital Telephone Upgrades .................................................................................
Electronic Telephone Upgrades ...........................................................................
CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES ...............................................................................
Strata DK8 - Example 1 (Small Retail Store)........................................................
Strata DK8 - Example 2 (Home Office) ................................................................
Strata DK16 - Example 1 (Bank) ..........................................................................
Strata DK16 - Example 2 (Office/Warehouse)......................................................
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ...........................................................................

PAGE
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10

TABLE LIST
TABLE
3-A
3-B
3-C
3-D
3-E
3-F
3-G
3-H

TITLE
DK8 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE ...............................................
DK16 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE (BASE AND
EXPANSION UNIT) ..................................................................................................
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS .............................................................
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS .................................................
DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PCBs ......................................................
INTERFACE OPTION ..............................................................................................
STRATA DK8 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW ...............................................
STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW .............................................

PAGE
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7

WORKSHEETS
NUMBER

TITLE

PAGE

1
2
3

DK8 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS ...................................................................
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs .....................................................................
DK8 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES ..................................................................

3-11
3-12
3-13

1
2
3
4

DK16 STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS .................................................................
DK16 KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs ...................................................................
DK16 PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES ................................................................
DK16 SYSTEM POWER CHECK ............................................................................

3-15
3-16
3-17
3-19

3-i

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

3-ii

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993
peripherals: Music-on-hold source, night bell, or
page amplifier mute control.

1 INTRODUCTION
1.00 This chapter offers guidelines and considerations on how to configure a STRATA DK8/DK16
system, which can support a wide variety of stations and peripherals.

2.20 The DK16 Base Key Service Unit
2.21 Station and CO Lines. The DK16 Base Key
Service Unit comes standard with eight digital
telephone circuits (ports) and four CO line circuits
(Table 3-D). An optional printed circuit board called
the KSTU can be added to the unit to provide four
standard telephone circuits (ports).

2 SYSTEM CAPACITY
2.00 Total System Capacity
2.01 The STRATA DK8/DK16 systems have a
modular design which allows them to support a
number of station and CO line configurations. The
main component of each system is the Key Service Unit. The DK8 KSU can have up to 10 stations
and four CO lines. The DK16 Base Key Service
Unit can have up to 12 stations and four CO lines.
An Expansion Key Service Unit can be added to
the DK16 to increase the station capacity to 20 and
the CO line capacity to eight. Station and CO line
configurations are shown in Table 3-A (for DK8)
and Table 3-B (for DK16).

2.22 Peripherals. The DK16 Base Key Service
Unit can support a number of peripherals, which
are not considered as stations and do not affect
the maximum station and CO line capacities. A
customer-supplied Music-on-hold source, customer-supplied separate background music
source, customer-supplied reserve power batteries, a customer-supplied emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences and an amplifier with speaker for paging
and night ringing can all be connected to the
Base Key Service Unit (Table 3-D). A relay
contact is also provided to control one of the
following peripherals: Music-on-hold source, night
bell, or Page Amplifier mute control.

2.10 The DK8 Key Service Unit
2.11 Station and CO Lines. The DK8 Key Service
Unit comes standard with four digital telephone
circuits (ports) and two CO line circuits (Table
3-C). An optional printed circuit board called the
QCDU can be added to the KSU to provide one CO
line circuit and two digital telephone circuits. A
maximum of two QCDUs may be added to provide
a total of four additional digital telephone circuits
and two additional CO line circuits. Another optional printed circuit board called the QSTU can be
added to the DK8 KSU to provide two standard
telephone circuits.

2.30 The DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit
2.31 Station and CO Lines. The optional DK16
Expansion Key Service Unit has four universal
slots which can support a maximum of four CO
lines and eight stations. Printed circuit boards
(PCBs) that support CO lines and can be installed
in the Expansion Unit are the PCOU and KCDU
(Table 3-E). PCBs that can support stations and be
installed in the Expansion Unit are the PDKU,
PEKU, PSTU, PESU, and KCDU.

2.12 Peripherals. The DK8 Key Service Unit can
support a number of peripherals, which are not
considered as stations and do not affect the maximum station and CO line capacities. A customersupplied Music-on-hold source, optional reserve
power battery and charger, a customer-supplied
emergency standard telephone for system power
failure occurrences and an amplifier with speaker
for paging and night ringing can all be connected
to the Key Service Unit (Table 3-C). A relay contact
is also provided to control one of the following

2.32 Peripherals. The Expansion Unit can support either a PIOU or PIOUS PCB, which both
provide, among other features, Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR), an interface for a local
programming terminal, and connectors for an internal modem (IMDU) for remote maintenance
and administration (Table 3-F). Any device that
connects to the PIOU or PIOUS should not be
considered a station and does not affect the
system's station capacity.

3-1

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-A
DK8 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE
EQUIPMENT
KSU

= Key Service Unit ·2 CO Lines/4 digital circuits)

= Central Office

QCDU = Optional PCB (1 CO line/2 digital circuits)

DKT

= Digital Telephone

QSTU = Optional PCB (2 standard circuits)

SLT

= Standard Telephone

CONFIGURATION CO
LINES BY STATION

COs

DKTs

2 by 4
2 by 6
3 by 6
3 by 8
4 by 8
4 by 10

2
2
3
3
4
4

4
4
6
6
8
8

SLTs
2
2
2

EQUIPMENT
KSU
KSU + QSTU
KSU + QCDU
KSU + QCDU + QSTU
KSU + QCDU + QCDU
KSU + QCDU + QCDU + QSTU

TABLE 3-B
DK16 CO LINE/STATION CONFIGURATION GUIDE (BASE AND EXPANSION UNIT)
EQUIPMENT
BU
KSTU
EU
PDKU
KCDU
PEKU
PESU

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Base Unit (4 CO lines/8 digital circuits)
Base Unit Option (4 standard circuits)
Expansion Unit
EU option (8 digital circuits)
EU option (2 CO lines/4 digital circuits)
EU option (8 electronic circuits)
EU option (2 standard/4 electronic circuits)

CONFIGURATION CO
LINES BY STATION
4 by 8
4 by 12
4 by 14
4 by 16
4 by 16
4 by 16
4 by 18
4 by 20
4 by 20
4 by 20
6 by 12
6 by 16
8 by 8
8 by 12
8 by 14
8 by 16
8 by 16
8 by 16
8 by 18
8 by 20
8 by 20
8 by 20
8 by 20

COs
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

DKTs
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
8
12
12
8
8
8
8
16
16
8
16
8
16
8

PSTU
PCOU
CO
DKT
EKT
SLT

EKTs

SLTs

4
2
8

8
4
8

6
4
4
12
4

4
8
4
8

3-2

4
2

6
4
4
4
12

=
=
=
=
=
=

EU option (8 standard circuits)
EU option (4 CO lines)
Central Office line
Digital telephone
Electronic telephone
Standard telephone

EQUIPMENT
BU
BU + KSTU
BU + EU + PESU
BU + EU + PSTU
BU + EU + PEKU
BU + EU + PDKU
BU + KSTU + PESU
BU + KSTU + EU + PEKU
BU + KSTU + EU + PDKU
BU + KSTU + EU + PSTU
BU + EU + KCDU
BU + KSTU + EU + KCDU
BU + EU + PCOU
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU
BU + EU + PCOU + PESU
BU + EU + PCOU + PEKU
BU + EU + PDKU + PCOU
BU + EU + KCDU + KCDU
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PESU
BU + KSTU + EU + KCDU + KCDU
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PEKU
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PDKU
BU + KSTU + EU + PCOU + PSTU

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-C
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS
Item

Supports

Digital Telephone Circuits (4)

• Digital Telephones (with

Connector Type

Standard

25-pair Amphenol

✓

✓
✓

or without PDIU–DI2 or
ADM)
• Stand-alone Data
Interface Units (PDIU-DS)
• Door Phone Lock/Control
Unit (DDCB)
CO Line Circuits (2)

• Loop Start CO Lines

RJ11 Modular

Power Failure Transfer Interface

• Standard Telephone

RJ11 Modular

(one)*
Battery Backup Interface

• Optional HPFB Battery

(one or two per system)
Music-On-Hold/BGM Interface

• Music-on-hold/BGM

Proprietary
Cable/Connector

Interface

RCA Jack

✓

RCA Jack

✓

Source*
600 Ohm page Interface

• Amplifier/Speaker

• Digital Telephones (with
CO line CKT (1)/
or without PDIU–DI2 or
Digital Telephone CKT (2) (QCDU)
ADM)
(max. 2 QCDU per system)
• Stand-alone Data
Interface Units (PDIU-DS)
• Loop Start CO Line

✓
RJ11 Modular

•
•
•
•
•

DTMF/ABR Tone Receiver
(3-Receiver CKT per QRCU )

• Automatic Busy Redial
• Standard telephone ports
• DISA

Internal

Control Relay

One of the following:
• Night Relay
• External Page Mute
• MOH Control Relay

25-pair Amphenol

• 2 Simultaneous

Internal

Standard Telephones*
Other Single-line Devices* 25-pair Amphenol
Fax Machine*
Voice Mail Devices
Alternate BGM source*

✓

6-pin Modular
(PPTC adaptor)

*Customer supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division.

3-3

✓

Conferences

SMDR/TTY Interface Unit (QSMU) • SMDR Printer*, or
• Maintenance Terminal* or
(Requires PPTC)
• Modem*

HPFB
with cable

25-pair Amphenol

Standard Telephone
Interface Unit (QSTU)
• 2 standard telephone circuits
• (1 max.) QSTU per system

Conference Circuit Interface Unit
(QCNU)

Optional

✓
✓

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-D
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT COMPONENTS
Item
Digital Telephone Circuits (8)

Supports

Connector Type

Standard

• Digital Telephones (with

25-pair Amphenol

✓

Optional

or without PDIU–DI2 or
ADM)
• Stand-alone Data

Interface Units (PDIU-DS)
• Door Phone Lock/Control

Unit (DDCB)
• Digital Direct Station

Selection Console (DDSS)
CO Line Circuits (4)

Loop Start CO Lines

RJ11 Modular

✓

Power Failure Transfer Interface

Standard Telephone (one)*

RJ11 Modular

✓

Battery Backup Interface with
built-in charger

Two 12-volt Batteries*

Proprietary
Connector/Cable

✓

Music-On-Hold/BGM Interface

Music-on-Hold/BGM source* RCA Jack

✓

600 Ohm page Interface

Amplifier/Speaker

RCA Jack

✓

Standard Telephone*
Interface Unit (4-Circuit)
(KSTU)

• Standard Telephones*

25-pair Amphenol

Cable and
Batteries

✓

• Other Single-line Devices*
• Alternate BGM Source*
• Fax machine*
• Voice mail devices

DTMF/ABR
Receiver (K4RCU)

• Automatic Busy Redial

Internal

✓

• Standard Telephone Ports
• Interprets DTMF Tones
• DISA

Feature Cartridge

• Future Feature Upgrades

Internal

Control Relay

Choice of one:

25-pair Amphenol

• MOH Source Control
• Night Bell Control
• BGM Mute Control

*Customer supplied equipment not offered by Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division.

3-4

✓
✓

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-E
DK16 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT PCBs
PCB

Circuits per PCB

Interfaces

Connector

• Digital telephones with or
without PDIU-DI2 or ADM
• DDSS console
• PDIU-DSs
• DDCB
• Electronic telephones
• HDSS console
• BGM source
• EOCU PCB for OCA

25-pair amphenol

2 standard telephone/
4 electronic telephone circuits
(standard/electronic
telephone ports)

• Standard telephones
• Voice mail ports
• Background music source
• Off-premises stations
• Other similar devices
Standard: same as PSTU
Electronic: same as PEKU
except PESU does not
support HDSS console

PCOU

4 CO line circuits
(lines)

• Central Office loop start
lines

RJ14C modular

KCDU

2 CO line circuits/
4 digital telephone circuits

• Central Office loop
start lines
• DKT circuits same as
PDKU, except no DDSS

RJ14C Modular
(CO Line circuits)
25-pair amphenol
(digital telephone circuits)

PIOU,
PIOUS

See Table 3-D

25-pair amphenol (PIOU)
Spring clip terminal (PIOUS)

PDKU

8 digital telephone
circuits

PEKU

8 electronic telephone
circuits

PSTU

8 standard telephone
circuits

PESU

25-pair amphenol

3.10 Telephone Circuit (Port) Types

3 STATION CONSIDERATIONS

3.11 There are three types of telephone circuits to
which stations can be connected: digital telephone
circuits, electronic telephone circuits, and standard telephone circuits. All three types of circuits
are available with the STRATA DK16. The STRATA
DK8 does not support electronic telephone circuits.

3.00 For configuration purposes, a station can be
considered as any device which is connected to a
dedicated telephone circuit. Although the words
"telephone" and "station" are often used synonymously and interchangeably in STRATA DK8/
DK16 documentation, devices other than telephones—such as Stand-alone Data Interface units
(PDIU-DSs)—should also be considered as stations when configuring a system, because they
require a dedicated telephone circuit. A station
apparatus overview is shown in Table 3-G (for
STRATA DK8) and Table 3-H (for STRATA DK16).

3.20 Digital Telephone Circuit Connections
3.21 The STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit provides
four digital telephone circuits. The QCDU PCB
provides two.

3-5

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-F
PIOU/PIOUS INTERFACE OPTION (DK16 ONLY)
Expansion Unit Interface Options

PIOU

PIOUS

Zone Page Interface (unamplified, 4 zones)

Night Transfer or Music-on-Hold Control Relay

Door Lock or External Amplifier Control Relay

Alarm Sensor

SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)

Maintenance Port for a Local ASCII Terminal or
External Modem (RS-232/6-wire modular connector)

Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU subassembly, no
external connector)

NOTE: X = the option is provided

TABLE 3-G
STRATA DK8 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW
Station
Digital Telephone
DKT with or without
ADM or PDIUDI

Type and Number of
Circuits Required

PCB or Interface

KSU
Capacity

KSU and Optional PCB
Combined Capacity

Digital, one for each
DKT

KSU
(Circuits 1 ~ 4)
QCDU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)

Stand-alone Data
Digital, one for each
Interface Unit (PDIU- PDIU-DS
DS)

KSU
(Circiuts 1 ~ 4)
QCDU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)

Digital Door
Phone/Lock Control
Unit (DDCB)

Digital, one for each
DDCB

KSU

Single-wire pair
devices:
• Standard
Telephone
• Voice Mail Device
• Facsimile Machine
• Modem
• Dictation
Equipment

QSTU (Circuits 1 ~ 2)
Standard, one for
each device (voice
mail devices may
require more than one
circuit)

—

Alternate
Background Music
Source*

Standard port for the
source

Port 02
Port 03

QSTU (Circuit 2)
Port 19

*May require interface transformer, see Section 100-816-207.
3-6

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

TABLE 3-H
STRATA DK16 STATION APPARATUS OVERVIEW
Station

Type and Number of
Circuits Required

PCB or Interface

Base and Expansion
Base Unit
Capacity Unit Combined Capacity

Digital Telephone
(DKT with or without
ADM or PDIU-DI)

Digital, one for each
DKT

Base Unit (Circuits 1~8)
PDKU2 (Circuits 1~8)
KCDU (Circuits 1~4)

Stand-alone Data
Interface Unit
(PDIU-DS)

Digital, one for each
PDIU-DS

Base Unit (Circuits 1~8)
PDKU2 (Circuits 1~8)
KCDU (Circuits 1~4)

Digital Direct Station
Selection Console
(DDSS)

Digital, one for each
DDSS

Base Unit (Circuit 8)
PDKU (Circuit 8)

Digital Door
Phone/Lock Control
Unit (DDCB)

Digital, one for each
DDCB

Base Unit (Circuit 5)
PDKU (Circuit 1)
or first
KCDU (Circuit 1)

PEKU (Circuits 1~8)
PESU (Circuit 5~8)

Electronic, two for the PEKU (Circuits 7 and 8)
HDSS

Conference Amplifier Electronic, two for the PEKU (Circuits 6 and 7)
amplifier
PESU (Circuits 6 and 7)

Single-wire-pair
Devices:
• Standard Telephone
• Voice Mail Device
• Facsimile Machine
• Modem
• Dictation Equipment

Standard, one for
KSTU (Circuits 1~4)
each device (voice
PSTU (Circuits 1~8)
mail devices may
PESU (Circuits 1~2)
require more than one
circuit)

Alternate
Background Music
Source

Standard or
KSTU (Circuit 4)
Electronic, one for the PEKU (Circuit 3)
source
PESU (Circuit 8)
PSTU (Circuit 4)

Electronic Telephone Electronic, one for
(EKT)
each EKT
Electronic Direct
Station Selection
Console (HDSS)

*May require interface transformer, see Section 100-816-207.

3-7

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
A maximum of two QCDU PCBs may be
installed in the STRATA DK8.

The KCDU cannot support a DDSS console.
• Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Box
(DDCB): Each DDCB requires one circuit.
DDCBs can only connect to Circuits 3 and 4
(Ports 02 and 03) in the STRATA DK8 Key
Service Unit or Circuit 5 (Port 04) in the STRATA
DK16 Base Key Service Unit, and Circuit 1 (Port
12) on either the PDKU or KCDU (STRATA
DK16).

3.22 The STRATA DK16 Base Key Service Unit
and the PDKU PCB each provide eight digital
telephone circuits. The KCDU PCB provides four.

NOTE:
A maximum of two KCDU PCBs may be
installed in the STRATA DK16. If a KCDU is
installed, no other type of station PCB can be
installed in the STRATA DK16.

3.30 Electronic Telephone Circuit Connections (STRATA DK16 Only)
3.31 There are no electronic telephone circuits in
the Base Key Service Unit, and none can be
added to it. However, either the PEKU PCB, which
has eight electronic telephone circuits, or the
PESU, which has four electronic telephone circuits, can be installed in the Expansion Key Service Unit. The following devices can be connected
to electronic telephone circuits.
• Electronic Telephones (6500-, 6000-, 3000-,
2000-series): An electronic telephone can be
connected to any electronic telephone circuit.
One electronic telephone circuit is required per
electronic telephone.
• Electronic Direct Station Selection Console
(HDSS): The system will support only one HDSS
console. The console must be connected to
both Circuits 7 and 8 on the PEKU. The PESU
will not support an HDSS Console.
• Alternate Background Music Source: The
system will support an alternate Background
Music source which can be heard over digital
and electronic telephone speakers and external
page speakers. This source can be connected
to either Circuit 3 on a PEKU, Circuit 8 on a
PESU, or Circuit 4 on a KSTU or PSTU PCB.
• Conference Amplifier: An amplifier for two CO
line conferencing can be connected to Circuits
6 and 7 (Ports 17 and 18) on a PEKU or PESU.

3.23 The following devices can be connected to
digital telephone circuits:
• Digital Telephones (2000- and 1000-series):
Each digital telephone requires one circuit, and
each digital telephone circuit can support a
digital telephone.
• Stand-alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DS):
Each PDIU-DS requires one circuit. Any digital
telephone circuit, except for Circuit 8 on a PDKU1
(STRATA DK16), can support a PDIU-DS (see
Note 1).

NOTES:
1. There are two versions of the PDKU:
PDKU1 and PDKU2. The versions are
identical, except that Circuits 1 ~ 8 on the
PDKU2 can each support PDIU-DSs/
PDIU-DI, while only Circuits 1 ~ 7 on a
PDKU1 can support PDIU-DSs or PDIUDIs. Also, PDIU1 does not support 2000series digital telephone continuous DTMF
tones.
2. The Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIUDI/PDIU-DI2) and the Add-on Module
(ADM) do not require a dedicated circuit.
They share a circuit with the telephone.
3. Only one option (PDIU-DI2 or ADM) can
be installed on a 2000-series digital telephone.

3.40 Standard Telephone Circuit Options
3.41 In addition to supporting standard telephones,
each of the standard telephone circuits can support any one of a number of single-wire-pair devices, including voice mail/Auto Attendant devices
and modems. The QSTU, which can be installed
in the STRATA DK8 Key Service Unit, has two

• Digital Direct Station Selection Console
(DDSS): (available with STRATA DK16 only)
Each DDSS Console requires one circuit. DDSS
Consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 in the
Base Key Service Unit and Circuit 8 on a PDKU.

3-8

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993
• Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or
HVSU/HVSI): An electronic telephone must be
upgraded with the HVSU2 subassembly or the
combined HVSU/HVSI subassemblies to receive Off-hook Call Announce.

standard telephone circuits. The KSTU, which can
be installed in the STRATA DK16 Base Key Service Unit, has four standard telephone circuits; the
PSTU, which can be installed in the DK16 Expansion Key Service Unit, has eight; and the PESU,
which can also be installed in the DK16 Expansion
Unit, has two (Circuits 1 and 2).

NOTE:
A PEKU or PESU PCB that supports electronic telephones that must receive Off-hook
Call Announce must be equipped with an
EOCU.

4 TELEPHONE UPGRADES
4.00 Digital and Electronic telephones can be
upgraded for a number of features; there are no
upgrades for standard telephones. Each of these
upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it
is connected to and is not considered a station.

• Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU):
An electronic telephone can be upgraded with
an HHEU to provide a dual interface for the Loud
Ringing Bell feature and a headset simultaneously.

4.10 Digital Telephone Upgrades
4.11 Digital telephones can be upgraded with the
following subassemblies:
• Integrated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI/PDIUDI2): A Digital telephone can be upgraded with
a PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 to provide the telephone
with data switching capabilities. 2000-series
Digital Telephones use the PDIU-DI2, and 1000series Digital Telephones use the PDIU-DI.
PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed on a telephone if
ADM is installed.
• Add-on Module (ADM): A 2000-series Digital
Telephone can be upgraded with an ADM to
provide 20 Direct Station Selection buttons on
STRATA DK16, or 10 DSS buttons, 8 speed dial
buttons, one night transfer button and one all
call page button on STRATA DK8. The 1000series Digital Telephone models cannot support
ADMs. ADM cannot be installed on a telephone
if PDIU-DI2 is installed.
• Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU): A
Digital telephone that must receive Off-hook
Call Announce must be upgraded with a DVSU.
• Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU):
A digital telephone can be upgraded with an
HHEU to provide a dual interface for the Loud
Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset. (Simultaneously with PDIU-DI2 or ADM).

5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES
5.00 The following provides an examples of how to
configure a STRATA DK8.
5.10 Strata DK8 - Example 1 (Smalll Retail
Store)
5.11 Customer Requirements. A store needs
two CO lines and four digital telephones.
5.12 Analysis. The store's system hardware requirements are as follows:
• Two CO line circuits for the CO lines.
• Four digital telephone circuits for the digital
telephones.
5.13 Conclusion. A standard Key Service Unit
would be adequate in this case. The unit's standard four digital telephone circuits and two CO line
circuits could easily accommodate the store's needs
and allow for future expansion.
5.20 Strata DK8 - Example 2 (Home/Office)
5.21 Customer Requirements. In addition to three
CO lines, a home/office needs five digital telephones (three of which will have PDIU-DIs), a
modem, a door phone, one facsimilie machine,
Music-on-hold and Telephone Set Background
Music.

4.20 Electronic Telephone Upgrades
4.21 On STRATA DK16, electronic telephones
can be upgraded with the following subassemblies:

5.22 Analysis. The customer's requirements could
be broken down as follows:

3-9

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993
• 3 CO line circuits for the three CO lines
• 7 digital telephone circuits
§ one for each of the five digital telephones;

5.50 Strata DK16 - Example 2 (Office/Warehouse)
5.51 Customer Requirements. In addition to five
CO lines, a small office-warehouse facility needs
11 digital telephones (three of which will have
PDIU-DIs), two PDIU-DSs, a modem, a facsimile
machine, conference capability, a door phone,
one standard telephone, Music-on-hold, and an
amplifier/speaker for paging.

the PDIU-DIs do not require dedicated circuits.
§ one for a digital door phone/lock control unit
to support a door phone
§ one for the PDIU-DS connected to the modem
• 2 standard telephone circuits
§ one for the modem
§ one for the facsimilie machine
• A music source for Music-on-hold and Background music can be connected to the Key
Service Unit MOH RCA jacks.

5.52 Analysis. The customer's requirements could
be broken down as follows:
• 14 digital telephone circuits
§ one for each of the 11 digital telephones; the
PDIU-DIs do not require dedicated circuits.
§ one for each of the two PDIU-DSs
§ one for a digital door phone/lock control unit
to support a door phone
• 3 standard telephone circuits
§ one for the modem
§ one for the facsimile machine
§ one for the standard telephone
• A music source for Music-on-hold and an amplifier/speaker for paging could both be connected
to the Key Service Unit RCA jacks.
• A K4RCU would be needed for the Dual-tone
Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones generated by the
devices connected to the standard telephone
circuits.
• A PCOU would be needed for the fifth CO line.

5.23 Conclusion. Several optional PCBs in addition to the Key Service unit would be needed for the
application. Two CO line circuits and four digital
telephone circuits would be provided by the KSU.
The third CO line circuit, as well as two digital
telephone circuits would be provided by an optional QCDU. A second QCDU would be necessary to provide the seventh digital telephone circuit. An optional QSTU would provide the two
standard telephone circuits. An optional QRCU
would be needed for the Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) tones generated by the devices (modem
and facsimilie machine) connected to the standard
telephone lines.
5.30 The following provides an examples of how to
configure a STRATA DK16.

5.53 Conclusion. An Expansion Key Service Unit
in addition to the Base Key Service Unit would be
needed for this application. The three standard
telephone circuits could be contained on the optional KSTU PCB in the Base Unit. However, a
PDKU installed in the Expansion Unit would be
required for six of the 14 digital telephone circuits.
The Expansion Unit would also be needed for the
PCOU. The optional K4RCU, along with the music
source and the page/amplifier, as noted earlier,
could be connected to the Base Unit.

5.40 Strata DK16 - Example 1 (Bank)
5.41 Customer Requirements. A bank needs two
CO lines and six digital telephones (three of which
must be equipped with a PDIU-DI). It also wants to
connect a printer to a PDIU-DS.
5.42 Analysis. The bank's system hardware requirements are as follows:
• Two CO line circuits for the two CO lines.
• Seven digital telephone circuits. Six for telephones and one for the PDIU-DS. (The
PDIU-DIs do not require a dedicated circuit.)

6 CONFIGURATION WORKSHEETS

5.43 Conclusion. A standard Base Key Service
Unit would be adequate in this case. The unit's
standard eight digital telephone circuits and four
CO line circuits could easily accommodate the
bank's needs.

6.00 Worksheets are provided in this chapter to
help configure the system.

3-10

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK8 WORKSHEET 1, STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS
1. DIGITAL PORTS (CIRCUITS)
Device

Quantity

DDCBs (2 max.)

_____

PDIU-DSs (8 max.)

_____

Digital Telephones (with or
without PDIU-DIs or ADMs)
(8 max.)

_____

Ports/Per

Ports Used

___________

__________

Total Digital Ports
(8 max.)

__________

Quantity

Ports Used

_____

__________

_____

__________

2. STANDARD PORTS (CIRCUITS)
Device

Ports/Per

Maximum of 2 items
total, including Standard
Telephones:
Standard Telephones
or
Other Devices:
–Voice Mail
–Auto Attendant
–BGM Source
–Fax
–Modem

Total Standard Ports
(2 maximum)
3. CO LINES
Number of CO lines required? _______
(Maximum of 4)

3-11

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK8 WORKSHEET 2, KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs
1. From Worksheet 1 enter the number of required ports (circuits) and lines.
Digital Ports:
_____ (8 max)
Standard Ports:
_____ (2 max)
CO Lines:
_____ (4 max)

NOTE: The maximum number of digital ports is 8, and standard ports is 2. The
maximum number of CO lines is four.
2. Cross off the printed circuit boards (PCBs)—in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and
ports— needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet.
KSU Interfaces (built-in)
2 CO lines, 4 digital ports
KSU Optional Unit Station and Line PCBs
QCDU (1 CO line and
2 digital ports):

_____

two max.

QSTU (2 standard ports):

_____

one max.

3. Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements.

3-12

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK8 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES
1. BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS
Battery Backup Interface: Yes or No _____
One or two HPFB batteries can be connected to a backup battery interface (Standard on DK8) to provide
backup battery backup if there is a power failure. (Connecting cable is included. 1-HPFB for .5 ~ 1 hour
backup; 2-HPFBs for 1.5 ~ 2 hours backup.)
QRCU: Yes or No _____
The QRCU is required to interpret Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones from standard telephones, Voice
Mail, Auto Attendant, and DISA CO circuits, or if the Auto Busy Redial (ABR) feature is required.
Music-on-hold/Background Music Source Interface: Yes or No _____
A music source can be connected to this interface (Standard on DK8) to provide Music-on-hold to CO lines
and stations on hold, and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers.
Power Failure Transfer Interface: Yes or No _____
A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power
failure. PFT interface is standard on DK8; one customer-supplied standard telephone is required.
600 ohm page Interface (Standard on DK8): Yes or No _____
This interface connects with customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers for paging (or Toshiba HESB) and
Background Music applications.
QSMU: Yes or No _____
A customer-supplied Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printer, or Remote Maintenance Terminal
(TTY) or modem.
PPTC: Yes or No _____
Modular adaptor required for interface to SMDR device or Maintenance Terminal or Modem.

2. TELEPHONE UPGRADES (All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports.)
Add-on Module (ADM): Total _____
2000-series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add-on Module to provide 10 Direct Station Selection
buttons, autodial buttons, all call page, and night transfer (if PDIU-DI2 is installed, ADM cannot be installed).
DVSU: Total _____
One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off-hook Call Announce.
HESC-65A: Total _____
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone
requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HHEU and HESB.
HHEU: Total _____
One HHEU must be installed in each digital telephone that supports a headset or connects to an HESB for
the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HESC-65A.
PDIU-DI2: Total_____ for 2000-series Digital Telephones;
(If ADM is installed, PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed).
PDIU-D1: Total_____ for 1000-series Digital Telephones
Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU-DI2 or a PDIU-DI to transmit and receive voice and data
calls.

3-13

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK8 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES (continued)
Miscellaneous Peripherals
HESB (Amplifier/Speaker): Total _____
1. One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell feature.
2. One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to the KSU's 600 ohm external
page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.)
3. One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to the KSU's 600 ohm
external page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.) Talkback
requires MDFB also.
DDCB/MDFB (Door Phone): Total DDCBs _____ Total MDFBs _____
The MDFB plugs into the DDCB to provide a door phone. Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs; a
maximum of two DDCBs and 6 MDFBs can be connected to the system. Each DDCB requires a digital
telephone circuit. The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page
talkback.

NOTE:
Worksheet 4, System Power Check, is not required for DK8. The DK8 power supply will support any DK8
maximum configuration.

3-14

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK16 WORKSHEET 1, STATION AND CO LINE TOTALS
1. DIGITAL PORTS (CIRCUITS)
Device

Quantity

DDSS Consoles (2 max.)
DDCBs (2 max.)
PDIU-DSs (16 max.)
Digital Telephones (with or
without PDIU-DIs or ADMs)
(16 max.

_____
_____
_____
_____

X
X
X
X

Ports/Per

Ports Used

=
=
=
=

__________
__________
__________
__________

Total Digital Ports
(16 max.)

__________

Ports Used

=
=
=
=

__________
__________
__________
__________

Total Electronic Ports
(8 max.)

__________

Quantity

Ports Used

_____

__________

_____
_____
_____
_____

X
X
X
X

1
1
1
1

=
=
=
=

__________
__________
__________
__________

_____

__________

1
1
1
1

2. ELECTRONIC PORTS (CIRCUITS)
Device

Quantity

HDSS Console (1 max.)
Alternate BGM Source (1 max.)
Conference Amplifier (1 max.)
Electronic Telephones
(8 max.)

_____
_____
_____
_____

X
X
X
X

Ports/Per
2
1
2
1

3. STANDARD PORTS (CIRCUITS)
Device

Ports/Per

Maximum of 12 items
total, including Standard
Telephones:
Standard Telephones
or
Other Devices:
–Voice Mail
–Auto Attendant
–Fax
–Modem
–Alternate Background
Music (BGM) Source

Total Standard Ports
(12 maximum)
4. CO LINES
Number of CO lines required? _______
(8 maximum)

3-15

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK16 WORKSHEET 2, KEY SERVICE UNIT AND PCBs
1. From Worksheet 1 enter the number of required ports (circuits) and lines.
Digital Ports:
_____
Electronic Ports:
_____
Standard Ports:
_____
CO Lines:
_____

NOTE: The maximum number of combined digital, electronic, and standard ports
is 20. The maximum number of CO lines is eight.
2. Cross off the printed circuit boards (PCBs)—in addition to the standard Base Key Service Unit lines and
ports— needed to support the ports and lines entered in Step 1 of this worksheet.
Base Unit Interfaces/PCBs
Base Unit (4 CO lines, 8 digital ports):
KSTU (4 standard ports):

built-in

_____

one max.

_____

two max.

_____

one max.

_____

one max.

_____

one max.

_____

one max.

_____

one max.

Expansion Unit Station and line PCBs
KCDU (2 CO lines and
4 digital ports):
- or PDKU (8 digital ports):
- or PEKU (8 electronic ports):
- or PSTU (8 standard ports):
- or PESU (2 standard ports and
(4 electronic ports):
PCOU (4 CO lines):

(KCDU cannot be installed
with any other type of
station PCB or PCOU PCB)

(PCOU can be installed with
PDKU, PEKU, PESU, or
PSTU, but not with KCDU)

NOTES:
1. The Base Unit by can only support up to 12 stations (8 digital and 4 standard)
and four CO lines.
2. The Expansion Unit can support up to eight stations and four CO lines.
3. If installing two DDCBs, a PDKU or a KCDU is required to support the second
DDCB—no matter what the total number of digital ports.
4. If installing two DDSS Consoles, a PDKU is required to support the second
DDSS Console—no matter the total number of digital ports. (KCDU does not
support DDSS.)

3. Refer to Worksheet 3 to determine option and peripheral requirements.
4. Refer to Worksheet 4 to determine the amount of power used by the system.

3-16

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK16 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES
1. BASE UNIT PERIPHERALS
Battery Backup Interface: Yes or No _____
Two 12-volt customer-supplied batteries can be connected to this interface to provide backup battery backup
if there is a power failure. See PBTC-3M.
K4RCU: Yes or No _____
The K4RCU is required to interpret Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones from standard telephones, Voice
Mail, Auto Attendant, and DISA CO circuits.
Music-on-hold/Background Music Source Interface: Yes or No _____
A music source can be connected to this interface (Standard on DK16) to provide Music-on-hold to CO lines
and stations on hold, and to provide Background Music to station speakers and external page speakers.
Alternate Background Music Source: Yes or No _____ (see Worksheet 1)
Power Failure Transfer Interface: Yes or No _____
A standard telephone can be connected to this interface to provide connection to a CO line if there is a power
failure. PFT interface is standard on DK16; one customer-supplied standard telephone is required.
PBTC-3M: Yes or No _____
One PBTC-3M cable is required for each system that requires battery backup. See Battery Backup Interface.
600 ohm page interface (Standard on DK16): Yes or No _____
This interface connects with customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers (or Toshiba HESB) for paging and
Background Music applications.
Night Bell: Yes or No _____
A customer supplied night ringing bell can be installed and controlled by the Base Unit relay control (Standard
on DK16).
2. EXPANSION UNIT PERIPHERAL PCB
PIOU or PIOUS: If yes, which one _____
See Table 3-D.
PPTC: One or Two _____
Modular adaptor, required for PIOU/PIOUS interface to SMDR device or local maintenance terminal.
3. TELEPHONE UPGRADES (All upgrades share the telephone port and do not require separate ports.)
Add-on Module: Total _____
2000-series digital telephones can be equipped with an Add-on Module to provide 20 Direct Station Selection
buttons. (If PDIU-DI2 is installed, Add-on Module cannot be installed.)
DVSU: Total _____
One DVSU is required for each digital telephone that must receive Off-hook Call Announce.
HESC-65A: Total _____
One HESC-65A modular connecting cable is required to connect the HESB to the HHEU in each telephone
requiring the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HHEU and HESB.

3-17

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK16 WORKSHEET 3, PERIPHERALS AND UPGRADES (continued)
HHEU: Total _____
One HHEU must be installed in each digital and electronic telephone that supports a headset or connects to
an HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature. See HESC-65A.
HVSU2 or Combined HVSU/HVSI: Total _____
Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 assembly or the combined HVSU and HVSIs
assemblies to receive Off-hook Call Announce. See EOCU under Miscellaneous Peripherals.
PDIU-DI2: Total_____ for 2000-series Digital Telephones;
PDIU-D1: Total_____ for 1000-series Digital Telephones
Digital telephones must be equipped with a PDIU-DI2 or a PDIU-DI to transmit and receive voice and data
calls. (If Add-on module is installed, then PDIU-DI2 cannot be installed.)
Miscellaneous Peripherals
DPFT: Yes or No_____
The DPFT provides a means to connect eight selected CO lines to standard telephones if there is a power
failure. (PSTU must be installed in Expansion Unit)
EOCU: Yes or No _____
An EOCU must be installed on a PEKU or PESU that is connected to electronic telephones which are
equipped to receive Off-hook Call Announce. See HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI in Telephone Upgrades.
HESB (Amplifier/Speaker): Total _____
1. One HESB and HHEU is required for each digital and electronic telephone with the Loud Ringing Bell
feature.
2. One HESB is optional to provide single-zone external page connected to the Base Unit's 600 ohm external page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.)
3. One HESB is optional to provide a talkback amplifier/page speaker connected to the Base Unit's 600 ohm
external page output. (Customer-supplied amplifiers/speakers may be used in place of the HESB.) Talkback
for HESB requires an MDFB.
MDFB (Door Phone): Total _____
The MDFB plugs into the DDCB to provide a door phone. Each DDCB can support up to three MDFBs; a
maximum of two DDCBs can be connected to the system. Each DDCB requires a Digital Telephone circuit.
The MDFB may also be connected to the HESB amplifier/speaker to provide page talkback.

3-18

INSTALLATION-CONFIGURATION
SECTION 100-816-203
MARCH 1993

DK16 WORKSHEET 4, SYSTEM POWER CHECK

Total Power Used:
Equipment Type:

Equipment
Quantity

Power Used
=
(Factor)

Ports Used

2000- and 1000-series digital telephone

(1.0)

2000-series electronic telephone

(2.0)

3000-series electronic telephone

(2.5)

6000-series electronic telephone

(2.0)

6005-series electronic telephone

(2.0)

6500-series electronic telephone

(1.0)

DDSS/HDSS console*

(0.8)

PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI

(0.5)

PDIU-DS

(0.8)

Standard telephone

(1.0)

Add-on Module

(0.4)

Total Power Used

* All series.
Power Criteria:
Power Supplied — Total Power Used:

Configuration Power Check:

—

24.8

Power Supplied
Total Power Used
Must be Greater than Zero

3-19

Must be greater than zero.

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER FOUR
DK8 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH

SUBJECT

PAGE

1
2
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
3
3.10
3.20
4
4.10
4.20

PART I
DK8 KSU INSTALLATION ...................................................................................
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING .........................................................................
Mounting Surface Considerations ......................................................................
Mounting Preparation .........................................................................................
Mounting the Key Service Unit ...........................................................................
Installing the Reserve Power Battery and Charger (HPFB) ................................
POWER SUPPLY TEST REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ..................................
Power Supply Removal ......................................................................................
Power Supply Replacement ...............................................................................
DK8 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION ...............................
DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation ..........................................
DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Test .....................................................

4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5

5
6
6.10
6.20
6.30
7
7.00
7.10
7.20
7.30
7.40
8
8.00
8.10
8.20
8.30
8.40
9
9.00
9.10
9.20
9.30
9.40
10
10.00
10.10
10.20
10.30

PART II
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION ...............................................
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................
KSU Option PCBs ..............................................................................................
PCB Option Considerations ................................................................................
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations ...................................................
CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (QCDU) ...............................
General ...............................................................................................................
QCDU Configuration ...........................................................................................
QCDU Installation Procedure .............................................................................
QCDU Wiring ......................................................................................................
QCDU Programming Overview ..........................................................................
STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (QSTU) ..........................................
General ...............................................................................................................
QSTU Configuration ...........................................................................................
QSTU Installation Procedure ..............................................................................
QSTU Wiring ......................................................................................................
QSTU Programming Overview ...........................................................................
DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT (QRCU) ...................................
General ...............................................................................................................
QRCU Configuration ...........................................................................................
QRCU Installation Procedure .............................................................................
QRCU Wiring ......................................................................................................
QRCU Programming Overview ..........................................................................
CONFERENCE CIRCUITS (QCNU) ......................................................................
General ...............................................................................................................
QCNU Configuration ...........................................................................................
QCNU Installation Procedure .............................................................................
QCNU Wiring ......................................................................................................

4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-15

4-i

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
PARAGRAPH
10.40
11
11.00
11.10
11.20
11.30
11.40
11.50
11.60
12
12.00
12.10
12.20
12.30
12.40
12.50
12.60

SUBJECT
QCNU Programming Overview ..........................................................................
OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (QSMU) .....................................................................
General ...............................................................................................................
QSMU Hardware Options ...................................................................................
QSMU Configuration ..........................................................................................
QSMU Installation Procedure .............................................................................
QSMU Wiring ......................................................................................................
QSMU Programming Overview ..........................................................................
Device Communication Parameters ...................................................................
BUILT-IN CO LINE, DIGITAL TELEPHONE AND OTHER CIRCUITS ...................
General ...............................................................................................................
Built-in CO Line Circuits .....................................................................................
Built-In Digital Telephone Circuits ......................................................................
KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring ...................................
Power Failure Telephone Installation .................................................................
Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) Source Connection ...............
External Page Output Connection ......................................................................

PAGE
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13

TITLE
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD .............................................
DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS .....................................................
DK8 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG/JACK LOCATIONS .............................
DK8 CABLING DIAGRAM ......................................................................................
DK8 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS ......................................................
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION .................................................
QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ........................................
MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE .........................................
QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .........................................
QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS .....................................................................
QCNU INTERFACE CONNECTORS .....................................................................
QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ........................................

4-ii

PAGE
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

secure the hard board to the wall, making
certain that screws are aligned with studs.

PART I. KSU INSTALLATION
1 GENERAL

2.10 Mounting Preparation

1.00 This chapter provides the instructions necessary to mount the STRATA DK8 Key Service
Unit. Instructions are also provided on how to
remove and replace the power supply.

2 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING

Loosen the screws on the front cover of the
Key Service Unit, and remove the cover (Figure
4-2).

Move the SW1 RAM Storage Battery jumper
plug strap on the motherboard to the ON
position (Figure 4-5).

If the DK8 is less than one mile from the central
office (or PBX), set the CO line PAD switches,
SW101 and SW201, to the PAD position to
provide a 3db level loss to avoid excessive
loudness.

Install all optional PCBs per Paragraph 5.

2.00 Mounting Surface Considerations
2.01 The Key Service Unit (KSU) is designed to be
mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. It is
recommended to use the method shown in Figure
4-1 (see Note). See Figure 4-2 for DK8 KSU
physical dimensions.

NOTE:
Install screws first to the hard board, and then

STUD
PLASTER
BOARD

HARD BOARD
(1/4 INCH PLYWOOD)

DK8 KSU

FIGURE 4-1
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNT METHOD
4-1

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
10"
WALL
MOUNT
SCREW

WALL
MOUNT
SCREW
6.875"

FRONT
COVER
SCREW

AC
DC

16.375"

FRONT
COVER
SCREW
FRONT
COVER
SCREW
WALL MOUNT
SCREW

WALL MOUNT
SCREW
6.75"

FIGURE 4-2
DK8 DIMENSIONS AND SCREW LOCATIONS
4-2

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

3"
TO HPFB
FG
SCREW

TIE-WRAP
HOLDER

RESERVE BATTERY
(HPFB) CONNECTOR

BATT

AC POWER
CORD AND
PLUG 4' 7"

—

DC ON/OFF
POWER SWITCH

6-WIRE SMDR/TTY
MODULAR JACK
SMDR/
TTY

STATION TIP/RING
AMPHENOL 25-PAIR
JACK (FEMALE)

RJ11 CO LINE JACKS
CO4

CO2

CO1

CO3

TIE WRAP
SUPPLIED WITH
DK8 TO HOLD
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

PFT

RJ11 POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER JACK

TIE-WRAP HOLDER

LEFT SIDE VIEW

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

FIGURE 4-3
DK8 SIDE VIEW DIMENSION AND PLUG/JACK LOCATIONS
4-3

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
2.30 Installing the Reserve Power Battery
and Charger (HPFB) (Figure 4-4)

2.20 Mounting the Key Service Unit
1)
2)

Make sure the power supply switch is turned
OFF.
Place the Key Service Unit on the desired
location on the mounting surface and mark the
location of the four screw holes (there is one
on each corner). See Figures 4-1 and 4-2.

NOTE:
Make sure the location of the Key Service
Unit meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2.
3)

Drill holes on these marks.

Secure screws approximately two thirds of the
way into the top two holes on the mounting
surface.

Hang the unit from the top two screws and
then secure the screws completely into the
mounting surface.

Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completely screwing the bottom two
screws into the wall.

Ground system according to Chapter 2, Paragraph 4.

Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line
cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cable, etc.)
to the Key Service Unit. Route the wiring as
shown in Figure 4-4, and then fasten wiring to
the unit with the tie wraps that come with the
Key Service Unit. (See Section 100-816-208,
for additional wiring information.)

Place the HPFU directly above the DK8 KSU.

Mark the location of the two screw holes, then
drill holes.

Screw the two screws two-thirds into the mounting surface.

Hang the HFPU on the screws then tighten the
screws into the mounting surface.

Plug the first HPFU connector into BATT connector on the right side of the KSU.

Connect a ground wire from the HPFB "FG"
screw to the DK8 QPSU8 screw labeled
"HPFB6." The ground wire can be fed through
the opening by the AC power cord (see Figure
4-3).

NOTE:
The DK8 should be plugged into AC power
and the DC power switch should be turned
on. The HFPU will not start to operate if AC
power is not available during the initial installation.
7)

The 24V LED on the HPFU should light. If it
does not light, press the battery OFF switch
with a pencil point or other small-tipped object.

Dress and tie-wrap the HPFU cables per Figure 4-4.

To mount a second HPFU, repeat steps 1~4,
then plug the second HPFU connector in the
first HPFU and connect an FG wire between
each HPFB FG screw.

10) To test the HPFU, remove the DK8 AC plug
from the AC outlet. The DK8 AC LED will go
out but the DK8 DC LED remains on, also the
system remains in normal working order and
the HPFU 24V LED remains on.

NOTE:
Figure 4-4 shows cables routed to the right;
they may also be routed to the left, depending
on the location of the MDF.
9)

11) If it is desired to turn off the HPFU (after loss
of AC power), use a pencil or other sharp
object to press the Battery Off switch.

If the Reserve Power Battery and Charger
(HPFB) is going to be installed, refer now to
Paragraph 2.30. If not, proceed to Step 10.

CAUTION!
Once the HPFU is turned off or unplugged
(During AC power loss) it will not operate
again until AC power is restored to the
DK8 KSU.

10) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and
then turn ON the DC power supply switch.
11) Reinstall the front cover onto the Key Service
Unit.

4-4

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

3 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT
3.00 The power supply comes factory-installed in
the Key Service Unit (Figure 4-5); if necessary, it
can be removed and replaced.

Plug the DC cable into the CN3 connector on
the power supply (Figure 4-5).

Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and
turn ON the power supply switch.

Test QPSU8 power supply according to the
DK8 Hardware Fault Isolation procedure, Section 100-816-500, Paragraph 6.

Plug HPFB cable into BATT connector of
power supply and reconnect the HPFB ground
wire (Figure 4-5).

Reinstall the cover on the key service unit.

3.10 Power Supply Removal (Figure 4-5)
1)

2)
3)

Make sure that the power supply switch is OFF
and that the AC power cable is not plugged
into an outlet. Confirm that green AC LED is
not lit.
Loosen the screws on the front cover of the
Key Service Unit, and remove the cover.

4 DK8 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY
TRANSFER OPTION

Unplug HPFB cable from BATT connector of
power supply and disconnect the HPFB ground
wire (Figure 4-5).

Unplug the AC cable from the CN1 connector
on the power supply (Figure 4-5).

Remove the FG screw, and disconnect the
green third wire ground ring terminal (Figure
4-5).

Unplug the DC cable from the CN3 connector
on the power supply (Figure 4-5).

Remove the top two, and bottom left corner
screws that attach the power supply to the Key
Service Unit. Remove power supply.

4.00 A dedicated standard telephone can be connected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface
(PF1) on the Key Service Unit to provide power
failure backup. During normal operation, this telephone cannot be used—it does not count as a
station; so it does not reduce the system's 10
maximum station capacity. But if there is a power
failure, the telephone will automatically be connected to CO line 1. When power is restored, the
system will automatically resume with its normal
station and CO line assignments, and the dedicated telephone will become inoperative again.
4.10 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer
Installation. Install the dedicated emergency standard telephone as follows (see Figure 4-6):

3.20 Power Supply Replacement (Figure 4-5)
1)
2)

3)
4)

Set the power supply in its proper place in the
Key Service Unit (Figure 4-5).

1) Connect a standard telephone to the PF1
connector in the Base Unit.

Secure the power supply to the Key Service
Unit with the top two, and bottom left corner
screws.

4.20 DK8 Power Failure Emergency Transfer
Test.

Install the green third wire ground ring terminal
with the FG screw.

1) Turn the system power switch off.

Plug the AC cable into the CN1 connector on
the power supply (Figure 4-5).

2) Lift the emergency standard telephone handset, and verify that there is CO dial tone.

4-5

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

TO HPFB
FG
SCREW

TIE-WRAP
HOLDER

RESERVE BATTERY
(HPFB) CONNECTOR

BATT

AC POWER
CORD AND
PLUG 4' 7"

—

DC ON/OFF
POWER SWITCH

6-WIRE SMDR/TTY
MODULAR JACK
SMDR/
TTY

STATION TIP/RING
AMPHENOL 25-PAIR
JACK (FEMALE)

RJ11 CO LINE JACKS
CO4

CO2

CO1

CO3

TIE WRAP
SUPPLIED WITH
DK8 TO HOLD
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

PFT

RJ11 POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER JACK

TIE-WRAP HOLDER

LEFT SIDE VIEW

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

FIGURE 4-4
DK8 CABLING DIAGRAM
4-6

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

RAM STORAGE BATTERY JUMPER PLUG
RAM STORAGE
BATTERY

J20-CONNECTOR FOR QSMU
PCB INSTALLATION

QPSU8 POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREW

CN4, BATTERY
CONNECTOR PLUG

F.G. SCREW FOR
THIRD WIRE
GROUND
CONNECTION TO
POWER SUPPLY
WARNING

HPFB
GROUND
WIRE

ACN1
POWER CORD
CONNECTOR

CN3

AC AND DC
POWER
INDICATOR LEDs

F201, 3 AMP FUSE
NON-REPLACABLE

ON OFF

YELLOW
WIRES (+24V)

J20

QMA
ROM

J16

RCU

J14
STU

QMAU1A

IC5
PIN 1

CDU

J18
CONF

J11
STU

FG
J19

SW1

SYSTEM FRAME
GROUND BAR

C02

CDU
J9
J12
STU

SW101

PAD NOR

J13
STU

C01
J2
FG1A

J1
PF1

VR701
FG1A

J8, EXTERNAL
PAGE RCA JACK
J7, MUSIC-ON-HOLD RCA JACK

FIGURE 4-5
DK8 BASE UNIT JACKS AND CONNECTORS
4-7

J2, CO LINE 1
MODULAR JACK
(RJ11)

SW201

PAD NOR

25-PAIR FEMALE
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR (TO
STATION TIP/RING
AND RELAY
CONTACT)

CN3, J19
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTORS
AND CABLE
DK8 MAIN PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD

J3, CO LINE 2
MODULAR JACK
(RJ11)

J15

J11, J14
CONNECTOR FOR
QSTU INSTALLATION

J12, J13
CONNECTORS
FOR QSTU
INSTALLATION

DC POWER
ON/OFF SWITCH

J10

J15, J16
CONNECTOR FOR
QSTU INSTALLATION

CN4

CN1

J17
CONF

POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREW
J17, J18
CONNECTOR FOR
QCNU INSTALLATION

Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.

TO HPFB6
FG SCREW

BATTERY
CONNECTOR
FOR HPFB

HPFB6

VR701 MOH VOLUME
CONTROL SCREW
ADJUSTER

SW101 (CO1)
SW201 (CO2):
3-db PAD
SWITCHES FOR
CO LINE 1 AND 2
J1, POWER FAILURE
TELEPHONE
MODULAR JACK
(RJ11)
J9, J10
CONNECTORS
FOR QCDU(S)
INSTALLATION
(1-PER QCDU)

MODULAR JACK
COVER HOLDERS
(FOR STORAGE OF
MODULAR JACK
COVERS)

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
DK8 OR DK16
KSU MAIN PCB
2

MDF

CO
LINE

POWER AVAILABLE
CONNECTION
KCOU
CO LINE 1

5
MOD JACK CO1
(KSU)
MDF

POWER FAIL
CONNECTION

R
T
PFT
STANDARD
TELEPHONE

MOD JACK PF1
(BASE UNIT)

FIGURE 4-6
DK8 KEY SERVICE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

4-8

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

call and three parties on the second simultaneous conference.

PART II. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
INSTALLATION

6.20 PCB Option Considerations

5 GENERAL

6.21 PCBs may be configured for a variety of
hardware and software options. Hardware options
are defined as either internal (generally related to
optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related
to connection of peripheral equipment such as
background music, voice mail, etc). Hardware and
software options for each PCB are identified in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter.

5.01 This chapter provides procedures for installation of STRATA DK8 system optional printed circuit
boards (PCBs) into the Key Service Unit. This
includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming
considerations for each PCB.
5.02 Be sure the ground has been checked. (See
Chapter 2 for grounding.)

6.22 PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be
configured for the applicable hardware options
prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures
in this chapter. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Peripheral
Installation, Section 100-816-207.

6 PCB INSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS
6.01 The STRATA DK8 KSU comes standard with
four digital telephone circuits (ports) and two CO
line circuits. These circuits, along with the common
control unit, are built into the motherboard.

6.23 PCB Software Options. PCBs are configured for software options through programming,
after installation of the PCBs in the KSU. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Programming Procedures, Section
100-816-300, for detailed programming instructions.

6.10 KSU Option PCBs
6.11 The KSU can support up to five optional
printed circuit boards (PCBs) (Figure 4-7): it can
support a maximum of two QCDUs, each of which
provides one CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits; a QSTU which provides two standard telephone circuits (ports); a QRCU which
provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones
(required for DISA and devices connected to
QSTUs), and three circuits to detect busy tone
(required for the ABR feature); and a QSMU which
provides a port for either a Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) device or a maintenance terminal or modem (System Program 10-3, LED 04)
selects the function of the port — SMDR or TTY).

6.30 PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations
6.31 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is
recommended that the power supply be OFF.

7 CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (QCDU)

6.12 The KSU does not come from the factory with
any option PCBs installed. Each of the option
PCBs listed above must be installed in specific
locations as described later in this chapter.

7.00 General
7.01 The QCDU provides one loop start CO line
circuit and two digital telephone circuits. The QCDU
digital telephone circuits can support digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s or ADMs connected
to the telephones and PDIU-DSs. The QCDU does
not support a DDSS console or DDCB. A maximum
of two QCDU PCBs may be installed in the KSU.

NOTE:
QCNU is a standard factory installed piggyback PCB which provides conference circuits
allowing two simultaneous conferences with
four of these parties on the first conference

4-9

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

WARNING

Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.

HPFB6

ON OFF
BATT
SW1
QMA
ROM
PIN 1 IC5
COMPONENT SIDE

QCNU1A

J1
J10

RCU

J6
J8

J7
J5

J4
J14
STU

SMDR/TTY
3-PAIR
MODULAR
JACK

QSMU1A

SW101

J1
J11
STU

PAD NOR

F.G.
CO4

QCDU1A

CO2

J1
J15

J6-25-PAIR
AMPHENOL
JACK FOR
TELEPHONE
TIP/RING AND
RELAY
CONTACT
(FEMALE)

CDU

J2
J16

CONF
J2
J18

CONF
J1
J17

RIGHT

J2
SMDR J20

QSTS1A

J1
J9

QSTU1A

SW1

SW101

190 130

PAD NOR

CDU

CO1

QCDU1A
J13
J3
STU

J12
J2
STU
VR701

MOH 600Ω
JACK PAGE

FIGURE 4-7
DK8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION
4-10

(MOH VOLUME
CONTROL)

F.G.
CO3

PFT, RJ11
MODLULAR
JACK
SYSTEM
FRAME
GROUND
BAR

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

J2
CO 3/4
FG
TO SYSTEM FRAME
GROUND BAR

PAD

NOR

FIGURE 4-8
QCDU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
7.02 The QCDU is shown in Figure 4-8.

7.20 QCDU Installation Procedure

7.10 QCDU Configuration

7.21 Install the QCDU in accordance with the
following steps (Figure 4-7):

7.11 The QCDU may have to be configured to
control excessive loudness if the system is close to
a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system.
It does not have to be configured for anything else.
The decibel (db) PAD switch, SW101 controls the
loudness by providing a 3 db signal level drop to, or
from, the PBX or CO when set to the PAD position.
The switch comes from the factory set at NOR (for
normal) meaning no PAD loss.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) If the system is located within one mile of the
CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD
switch SW101 to the PAD position.
3) Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF.

4-11

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

MODULAR
JACK

BASE
C02

C01

PFT
3
4

COVER

KNOCK OUT JACK COVER WHEN OCDU, SMDR/TTY IS INSTALLED

TAKE OUTJACK COVER WHEN PFT IS CONNECTED

STORE THE JACK COVER THAT HAS BEEN TAKEN OUT IN THE JACKCOVER
HOLDER

REINSTALL THE JACK COVER WHEN THE PFT TELEPHONE IS UNPLUGGED

FIGURE 4-9
MODULAR JACK COVER REMOVAL AND STORAGE
4) Slide front edge and FG wire of QCDU under
the "System Frame Ground Bar", align and
insert QCDU connector J1 into the motherboard
connector (J9 for CO3 first, J10 for CO4
second), and apply firm, even pressure to
ensure proper mating of the connectors. Make
sure the edge of the QCDU next to the connector J1 snaps firmly into the standoffs on the
KSU motherboard.
5) Connect the Frame Ground (FG) lead from the
QCDU to the screw nearest the QCDU located
on the system Frame Ground bar.

4-12

6) Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover
CO3 or CO4 access slot, and store the "knockout" in the slots provided in the KSU base
(Figure 4-9).
7.30 QCDU Wiring
7.31 Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring
Diagram in Section 100-816-208 for wiring/interconnecting details.

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
7.40 QCDU Programming Overview

8.20 QSTU Installation Procedure

7.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the QCDU.

8.21 Install the QSTU in accordance with the following steps (Figure 4-7):

Program 10-1
• Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Program 15
• Auto Release detection; DISA, and other attributes to the CO line.
Program 16
• Assigns CO line to groups 81 ~ 84, and dial 9
group.
Program 40
• Assigns stations access to CO line (incoming
and outgoing access).

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Set the ring voltage jumper plug SW1 to select
the appropriate ring generator voltage level,
either 130V P-P or 190V P-P.
3) Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF.
4) Align and insert QSTU connectors J1, J2, J3,
and J4 motherboard connectors J11, J12,
J13, and J14 respectively, and apply firm,
even pressure to ensure proper mating of the
connectors.
8.30 QSTU Wiring

8 STANDARD TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (QSTU)

8.31 Refer to DK8 MDF to KSU Amphenol Wiring in
Section 100-816-208 for QSTU wiring.

8.00 General
8.32 The QSTU must be connected to a OL13A (or
equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations.
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the
telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance.)

8.01 The QSTU provides two standard telephone
circuits. The QSTU supports two-wire devices such
as standard telephones, Auto Attendant devices,
separate BGM source connection, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines.

8.40 QSTU Programming Overview
8.41 The following parameters may be specified for
the QSTU:

NOTE:
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by
standard telephones (or any other device connected to a QSTU port), a QRCU must be
installed.

Program 31
• Used to configure all QSTU ports connected to
voice mail (see Chapter 7 for voice mail installation).
Program 10-2
• Used to set standard telephone ringing option
and separate BGM assignment.

8.02 The QSTU is shown in Figure 4-10. Note that
the QSTS PCB is factory installed on the QSTU.

NOTE:
QSTU Ports are fixed. They are assigned
even if a QSTU is not installed.

8.10 QSTU Configuration
8.11 The QSTU only has to be configured for the
ring generator voltage level, nothing else. Before
installing the QSTU in the KSU, set the SW1 ring
generator to 130V P-P or 190V P-P (Figure 4-10).
Most standard telephones and two-wire devices
require 190; however, some devices may experience ring-trip at 190, and should be set at 130.

9 DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE
DETECTOR UNIT (QRCU)
9.00 General
9.01 The QRCU must be installed to recognize

4-13

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

QSTS
J5

QSTS
FACTORY
INSTALLED

QSTU

190

130

SW1

FIGURE 4-10
QSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS

9.02 The QRCU is shown in Figure 4-11.

Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device
connected to a standard telephone circuit (QSTU)),
and it is required for Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) calls. The QRCU circuits are also used to
detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial
(ABR) feature and must be installed to allow ABR
to operate.

9.10 QRCU Configuration
9.11 The QRCU does not have to be configured for
operation.
9.20 QRCU Installation Procedure
9.21 Install the QRCU in accordance with the

4-14

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993

DK8RCU1A

V.1

FIGURE 4-11
QRCU INTERFACE CONNECTORS
four-party and one three-party). The QCNU is standard and is installed at the factory. If it is necessary
to remove and replace the QCNU, turn the system
off, remove the QCNU, and install another QCNU
per paragraph 10.20.

following steps (Figure 4-7).
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF.

10.02 The QCNU is shown in Figure 4-7.

3) Align and insert QRCU connectors J1 and J2
into motherboard connectors J15 and J16
respectively (note the component side placement in Figure 4-7), and apply firm, even
pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Push down until connectors lock together.

10.10 QCNU Configuration
10.11 The QCNU does not have to be configured
for operation.
10.20 QCNU Installation Procedure

9.30 QRCU Wiring

10.21 Install the QCNU in accordance with the
following steps (Figure 4-7):

9.31 The QRCU does not require any wiring.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

9.40 QRCU Programming Overview
9.41 The following parameters may be specified:

2) Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF.

Program 12
• Set QRCU release time.

3) Align and insert QCNU connectors J1 and
J2 into motherboard connectors J17 and
J18 respectively, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
(Note the side with “➝ RIGHT” silkscreened
on it should be positioned as shown in Figure 4-7.)

Program 15
• Sets QRCU operation after CO line flash.

10 CONFERENCE CIRCUITS (QCNU)

10.30 QCNU Wiring

10.00 General

10.31 The QCNU does not require any wiring.

10.01 The QCNU provides two conference circuits
which allow two simultaneous conferences (one

4-15

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
Maintenance Terminal (TTY) or modem; and in
System Prograrm 10-3:
• LED 04 ON — TTY
• LED 04 OFF — SMDR

RIGHT
J2

11.30 QSMU Installation Procedure
11.31 Install the QSMU in accordance with the
following steps (See Figure 4-7):
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Ensure the QSMU has been configured for the
appropriate program options (refer to Paragraphs 11.10 and 11.20).

FIGURE 4-12
QCNU INTERFACE CONNECTORS

3) Slide the QSMU under the "System Frame
Ground Bar", align and insert QSMU connector J2 into motherboard connector J20, ensuring the side of the QSMU with the modular
connector goes on the right side. (The QSMU
is not silkscreened “➝ RIGHT”.) Apply firm,
even pressure to ensure proper mating of
connectors. Make sure the edge of the QSMU
opposite connector J2 snaps firmly into the
standoffs on the KSU motherboard.

10.40 QCNU Programming Overview
10.41 The QCNU does not require any programming.

11 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (QSMU)
11.00 General
11.01 The QSMU provides a circuit interface with
peripheral options.

V.1

11.02 The QSMU is shown in Figure 4-13.
11.10 QSMU Hardware Options

QSMU1A

11.11 The QSMU supports the following STRATA
DK8 external hardware options:
• SMDR output or TTY (maintenance) port two-

way interface.

NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation,
Section 100-816-207, for installation of SMDR
and the Remote Maintenance Section 100816-600 for TTY.
11.20 QSMU Configuration

11.21 The QSMU must be configured for operation
with the appropriate external hardware: either an
SMDR printer or call accounting device; Remote

FIGURE 4-13
QSMU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
4-16

INSTALLATION-DK8 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-204
MARCH 1993
4) Remove the "knock-out" from the KSU cover
SMDR/TTY access slot, and store the "knockout" in the slots provided in the KSU base
(Figure 4-9).

are integrated into the KSU motherboard and are
identical to the QCDU CO line circuits. For wiring
and programming considerations, see the QCDU
instructions in Paragraph 7.

11.40 QSMU Wiring

12.20 Built-in Digital Telephone Circuits

11.41 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation
(Section 100-816-207, SMDR) and Remote Maintenance (Section 100-816-600, TTY) for QSMU
wiring/interconnecting details.

12.21 The four digital telephone circuits that come
standard with the system are integrated into the
motherboard in the KSU. These circuits are identical to the digital circuits found on the QCDU. The
motherboard does not have to be configured for the
digital circuits to operate. For wiring and programming considerations, see the QCDU instructions in
Paragraph 7.

11.50 QSMU Programming Overview
11.51 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the QSMU:
Program 60
• Assigns SMDR options.
Program 10-3
• LED04-SMDR/TTY Select option.

12.30 KSU Motherboard CO Line/Digital
Station Circuit Wiring
12.31 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for details.
• Station circuits: DK8 MDF to KSU Amphenol
Wiring Diagram
• CO lines: DK8 MDF TO CO Line (KSU and
QCDU) Wiring Diagram

11.60 Device Communication Parameters
11.61 Set the communication parameters for the
device connected tot he QSMU SMDR/TTY jack as
follows:
• TTY: 7 Bits, 1-Stop Bit, Even Parity
• SMDR: 8 Bits, 1-Stop Bit, Odd Parity
• TTY/SMDR: 1200 bps

12.40 Power Failure Telephone Installation
1) Remove the RJ11 cover (Figure 4-9) from the
PFT jack and store the jack cover.
2) Connect the power failure telephone (500/
2500-type standard telephone to the PFT jack.
(Refer to the DK8 MDF to CO Line Wiring
Diagram in Section 100-816-208.

12 BUILT-IN CO LINE, DIGITAL TELEPHONE, AND OTHER CIRCUITS

12.50 Music-On-Hold (MOH)/Background
Music (BGM) Source Connection

12.00 General
12.01 As mentioned in Paragraph 6, the KSU
comes standard with two CO lines and four digital
telephone circuits already installed.

12.51 Connect the MOH/BGM source to the MOH
RCA jack (Figure 4-7) in accordance with Music
Source Configuration A in Section 100-816-207.

12.10 Built-in CO Line Circuits

12.60 External Page Output Connection

12.11 The two standard loop start CO line circuits

12.61 Connect the external page system to the
600Ω PAGE RCA output jack (Figure 4-7) to an
external amplifier in accordance with the External
Page Installation guidelines in Section 100-816207.

4-17

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER FIVE
DK16 KSU AND PCB INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH

SUBJECT

PAGE

1
2
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
3
3.10
3.20

PART I
DK16 KSU INSTALLATION ....................................................................................
GENERAL ................................................................................................................
DK KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING .....................................................................
Mounting Surface Considerations ........................................................................
Mounting Preparation ...........................................................................................
Mounting the Base Key Service Unit ....................................................................
Mounting the Expansion Key Service Unit ...........................................................
Reserve Power Failure Options............................................................................
POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .............................................
Power Supply Removal ........................................................................................
Power Supply Replacement .................................................................................

5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-4
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-12

4
5
5.10
5.20
5.30
5.40
6
6.00
6.10
6.20
6.30
6.40
7
7.00
7.10
7.20
7.30
7.40
8
8.00
8.10
8.20
8.30
8.40
9
9.00
9.10
9.20
9.30
9.40

PART II
DK16 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION ..............................................
GENERAL ................................................................................................................
PCB INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ..............................................................
Base Unit PCBs ....................................................................................................
Expansion Unit PCBs ...........................................................................................
PCB Option Considerations ..................................................................................
PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations ....................................................
BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (KSTU) ........................
General .................................................................................................................
KSTU Configuration ..............................................................................................
KSTU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
KSTU Wiring .........................................................................................................
KSTU Programming Overview .............................................................................
DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PDKU) ................................................
General .................................................................................................................
PDKU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
PDKU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
PDKU Wiring ........................................................................................................
PDKU Programming Overview .............................................................................
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PEKU) ........................................
General .................................................................................................................
PEKU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
PEKU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
PEKU Wiring .........................................................................................................
PEKU Programming Overview .............................................................................
STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PSTU) ...........................................
General .................................................................................................................
PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options......................................................................
PSTU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
PSTU Wiring .........................................................................................................
PSTU Programming Overview .............................................................................

5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-19
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-22

5-i

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

PARAGRAPH
10
10.00
10.10
10.20
10.30
10.40
11
11.00
11.10
11.20
11.30
11.40
12
12.00
12.10
12.20
12.30
12.40
13
13.00
13.10
13.20
13.30
13.40
14
14.00
14.10
14.20
14.30
14.40
15
15.00
15.10
15.20
15.30
16
16.00
16.10
16.20
17
17.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SUBJECT
STANDARD/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PESU) ....................
General .................................................................................................................
PESU Hardware Options ......................................................................................
PESU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
PESU Wiring .........................................................................................................
PESU Programming Overview .............................................................................
CO LINE UNIT (PCOU) ............................................................................................
General
PCOU Hardware Options
PCOU Installation Procedure ...............................................................................
PCOU Wiring ........................................................................................................
PCOU Programming Overview .............................................................................
OPTION INTERFACE UNIT (PIOU AND PIOUS) ....................................................
General .................................................................................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options....................................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure ..............................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Wiring ......................................................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview ...........................................................
CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (KCDU) ..................................
General .................................................................................................................
KCDU Configuration .............................................................................................
KCDU Installation Procedure ................................................................................
KCDU Wiring ........................................................................................................
KCDU Programming Overview .............................................................................
DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE DETECTOR UNIT (K4RCU) ....................................
General .................................................................................................................
K4RCU Configuration ...........................................................................................
K4RCU Installation Procedure ..............................................................................
K4RCU Wiring ......................................................................................................
K4RCU Programming Overview ...........................................................................
BUILT-IN CO LINE AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS ....................................
General .................................................................................................................
Built-in CO Line Circuits .......................................................................................
Digital Telephone Circuits .....................................................................................
Base Unit CO Line/Digital Station Circuit Wiring ..................................................
KCOU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ................................................................
General .................................................................................................................
KCOU Removal ....................................................................................................
KCOU Replacement .............................................................................................
DK16 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY TRANSFER OPTION ...............................
DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation .........................................

5-ii

PAGE
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

FIGURE
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24

FIGURE LIST
TITLE
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR ........................................................
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS ..........................
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR .........................................................
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS ..................................
CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT ............
MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT ............................................................
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR .......................................................................
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS ...............................................
POWER SUPPLY (KPSU) .......................................................................................
BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................
KSTU OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS ...................................................................
PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION .........................................................................
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..........................................
OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT (EOCU) INTERFACE CONNECTORS .........
PSTU AND SUBUNIT (SSTU) .................................................................................
PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION ........................................
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .................
PIOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ...................
PIOUS PCB SWITCH/JUMPER, OPTION LOCATION ............................................
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT (IMDU) INTERFACE CONNECTORS ...
KCDU INDICATORS, OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS ...........................................
K4RCU PCB .............................................................................................................
KCOU PCB ...............................................................................................................
EMERGENCY STANDARD TELEPHONE INSTALLATION .....................................

PAGE
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-16
5-18
5-20
5-21
5-23
5-26
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-32
5-34
5-35
5-36

TABLE LIST
TABLE
5-A
5-B
5-C
5-D
5-E
5-F
5-G
5-H

SUBJECT
KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..........................................
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..........................................
PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..........................................
PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ..........................................
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .................
PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS ...........................................
PIOUS CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS .........................................
KCDU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS .......................................

5-iii

PAGE
5-15
5-19
5-21
5-24
5-27
5-29
5-31
5-33

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES!
These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation.
1. Set the SW1 switch in the Base Unit ON for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed
customer data will be lost on power down.
2. If required, install KSTU and K4RCU in the Base Unit.
3. If the system is configured with an Expansion Unit, follow the order prescribed below:
a) Install PDKU, PEKU, PSTU, PESU, or KCDU in Slot 04.
b) If installing two KCDUs, install a KCDU in Slot 05. (The other KCDU should be installed in
Slot 04.)
c) If the system is configured with a PCOU, install it in Slot 05. (The system cannot be
configured with both a PCOU and KCDU in the Expansion Unit.)
d) If the system is configured with a PIOU or PIOUS, install it in Slot 06. (Slot 07 should be
reserved for future use.)
4. Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 by running Program 90.
5. Run Program 92.
6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming mode, turn power
OFF for five seconds, then turn power back ON.

WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs
1. Install new PCBs and set the new configuration with Program 03. (Turn power OFF for five
seconds after running Program 03.)
2. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions.

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
6)

PART I. KSU INSTALLATION
1 GENERAL

• The "DC" LED on the power supply will light

green. (If not, refer to the Fault Finding
section later in this manual).

1.00 This chapter provides the instructions necessary to mount both the STRATA DK16 Base Key
Service Unit and the Expansion Key Service Unit.
Instructions are also provided on how to test,
remove, and replace the power supply and base
unit CO line interface subassembly.

2 KEY SERVICE UNIT MOUNTING
2.00 Mounting Surface Considerations
2.01 The Base Key Service Unit and the optional
Expansion Key Service Unit are both designed to
be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. It is
recommended to use Method 1 or 2 in Figure 5-2
(see Note).

2.20 Mounting the Base Key Service Unit

2.10 Mounting Preparation
Loosen the screws on the front cover and the
side cover of the Base Key Service Unit, and
remove the covers (Figure 5-1).

Move the SW1 Memory Battery Backup strap
on the motherboard to the ON position (Figure
5-3).

If applicable, install the K4RCU into the Base
Key Service Unit (see Paragraph 14).

If applicable, install the KSTU into the Base
Key Service Unit (see Paragraph 6).

Using a voltmeter or other device which checks
voltage, measure the voltages referenced to
frame ground (FG) at the DC OUT connector
pins (test points) located on the motherboard
(Figure 5-3). The voltages should fall within
the ranges below. If the voltages do not fall
within the ranges, unplug the DC power pins
from the DC OUT connector and measure
again at the same location; if the ranges
remain unacceptable, replace the power supply (see Paragraph 3).
• Yellow-Green, Black, and Green Wires: 0V
• Yellow Wire: -24V
• Range: -26.3V ~ -27.8V
• Red Wire: 5V
• Range: 4.5V ~ 5.5V
• Blue Wire: -5V
• Range: -4.5V ~ -5.5V

NOTE:
If mounting the KSU directly to a wall, be sure
to align screws with studs behind the wall; if
using a hard board between the KSU and the
wall, install screws first to the hard board, and
then secure the hard board to the wall, making certain that screws are aligned with studs.

Turn the switch on the power supply to the ON
position (Figure 5-3).

Make sure the power supply switch is turned
OFF.

Place the Base Key Service Unit on the desired location on the mounting surface and
mark the location of the four screw holes
(there is one on each corner). See Figure 5-2.

NOTE:
Make sure the location of the Base Key
Service Unit meets the minimum clearance
requirements specified in Figure 2-2 in Chapter 2.
3)

Drill holes on these marks.

Plug the AC power cable into an outlet (Figure
5-3).
• The "AC" LED on the power supply will light

green (If not, refer to the Fault Finding section later in this manual).

5-1

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

COVER
SCREWS (6)
AC

DC
POWER

BASE COVER

SIDE COVER

= Six cover screws to be removed
before mounting KSU

KFCU DOOR SCREW
(Do not remove to mount KSU)

FIGURE 5-1
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT EXTERIOR
METHOD 1

PLASTERBOARD

PLASTER
BOARD

STUD

METHOD 2

HARD BOARD
(1/2 INCH PLYWOOD)

STUD

EXPANSION
UNIT

BASE UNIT

FIGURE 5-2
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WALL MOUNTING METHODS

5-2

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

POWER SUPPLY

KPSU16

MOUNTING HOLE
AND SCREW
BATT
±

AC POWER CABLE

MOUNTING HOLE
AND SCREW

PULL
LOCK

FG SCREW
(LEFT SIDE)

PUSH
UNLOCK

AC
DC
DC POWER

FG WIRE
(GREEN/YELLOW)

DC POWER SWITCH
–24V CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(RIGHT SIDE)

DC OUT
CONNECTOR
P9 (KPSU16
VOLTAGE
TEST POINTS)

MODULAR
CONNECTORS
KRCU

TB1, FG2
CONNECTOR
FOR EXPANSION
GROUND WIRE

P2A

P2B

SW SW SW
SW
400 425 450
475

KCOU

RIBBON
CONNECTOR (P3)

BATTERY

J3 (CO3)

J1 (CO1)
MOH VOLUME
CONTROL
PFI
(STANDARD
TELEPHONE)
P5 (AMPHENOL JACK)
J6, MOH
(TO MOH/BGM
SOURCE)

KSTU

OPTIONAL KSTU
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY

J4 (CO4)

J2 (CO2)

OFF BATT ON

SW1
MEMORY BATTERY
BACKUP STRAP
OFF BATT ON

RESERVE POWER
BATTERY
CONNECTOR

J7, 600Ω PAGE
(TO PAGE AMP)

MOUNTING HOLE
AND SCREW

KFCU
CONNECTOR

SW
400

NOR PAD

MOUNTING HOLE
AND SCREW
TIE WRAP
HOLDER

PAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENTS:
SW400 – CO1
SW425 – CO2
SW450 – CO3
SW475 – CO4

FIGURE 5-3
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT INTERIOR

5-3

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
4)

Secure screws approximately two thirds of the
way into the top two holes on the mounting
surface.

Hang the unit from the top two screws and
then secure the screws completely into the
mounting surface.

Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completley screwing the bottom two
screws into the wall.

Ground system according to Chapter 2, paragraph 4.

Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line
cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cable, etc.)
to the Base Key Service Unit and then fasten
wiring to the unit with the tie wrap that comes
with the base unit (Figure 5-4). Remove
amphenol connector clamp from plastic bag
that comes with the Base Unit. Fasten the
clamp to hold the amphenol connector.

Connect Reserve batteries (per Paragraph
2.40) and plug battery cable into BATT connector of the KPSU16 power supply (Figure 53 and 5-4).

10) Set the KCOU PAD switches (SW400-SW475)
to the appropriate position (Figure 5-3). The
factory setting is NORMAL. If CO lines are
connected to a PBX or are in close proximity
to the central office the PAD position may be
required.
11) If the Expansion Key Service Unit is going to
be installed, refer now to Paragraph 2.30. If
not, proceed to Step 12.
12) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and
then turn ON the power supply switch.

Set the Expansion Key Service Unit on the
Base Key Service Unit's hinge mounts, making sure that the Expansion Unit sets properly
in place (Figure 5-5).

Remove safety lock from plastic bag which
comes with the Expansion Unit. Install safety
lock to the Base Unit as shown in Figure 5-5.

Pull out on the safety lock until it can no longer
be moved, securing the Expansion Key Service Unit to the Base Key Service Unit (Figure
5-5). Do not detach the lock from the Base Key
Service Unit.

Connect the Expansion Key Service Unit Ribbon Cable to the connector on the Base Key
Service Unit (Figure 5-5). Close ribbon cable
connector lock on Base Unit.

Connect Expansion Unit green/yellow ground
wire plug (FG2) to TB1 of the Base Unit. (Make
sure the plug locks on TB1.) See Figure 5-3
and 5-4.

Making sure that the Expansion Key Service
Unit is flush against the mounting surface,
mark the location of the Expansion Unit mounting screw hole (Figure 5-6).

Swing the Expansion Key Service Unit away
from the mounting surface, and drill a hole at
the mark made in Step 7.

Install applicable printed circuit boards (PCBs)
(see Chapter 5, Section II)—after PCBs are
installed, slide the slot lock to the lock position
(Figure 5-7).

10) Swing the Expansion Key Service Unit back to
the mounting surface and secure it to the
surface with a screw.

13) Reinstall the front and side covers onto the
Base Key Service Unit.
2.30 Mounting the Expansion Key Service
Unit

11) Connect applicable wiring (modular CO line
cords, 25-pair amphenol connector, etc.) to
the PCBs (Figure 5-8).

12) Fasten the wiring with tie wraps (supplied) to
the bottom of the Expansion and Base Key
Service Units (Figure 5-8).

Make sure the side cover is removed from the
Base Key Service Unit. Turn Base Key Service Unit DC power switch off.

5-4

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

AC
PO

DC
–2

NOTES
1. SUPPLIED IN PLASTIC BAG WITH
BASE UNIT.
2. DO NOT ROUTE POWER CORD WITH
OTHER CORDS.
AC POWER CORD2
MODULAR
CONNECTOR
SELF-ADHESIVE
RUBBER PAD1

AMPHENOL
CLAMP1
RCA JACK

TIE WRAP1

AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

TIE WRAP
HOLDER

MODULAR
CORD (X5)
DK 16
BASE UNIT
AMPHENOL
CORD (X1)

FIGURE 5-4
DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS

5-5

PIN JACK
CORD (X2)

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

DK16 BASE
UNIT

HINGE
MOUNT

TB1 (FG2)
BACK OF DK16
EXPANSION UNIT

GREEN/YELLOW
FG2 WIRE AND PLUG
(FROM EXPANSION
UNIT – PLUGS INTO
TB1 OF BASE UNIT)

P3
RIBBON
CONNECTOR
LOCK

LL
PU K
C
LO
SH
PU K
C
LO

SAFETY LOCK
(SUPPLIED WITH
EXPANSION UNIT)

RIBBON CABLE (FROM EXPANSION UNIT – PLUGS
INTO EXPANSION CONNECTOR (P3) OF BASE UNIT)

FIGURE 5-5
CONNECTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT TO THE DK16 BASE UNIT

5-6

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

EXPANSION
UNIT

EXPANSION
SAFETY LOCK

FG SCREW

BASE UNIT

PULL
LOCK

AC
DC
DC POWER

PUSH
UNLOCK

FG WIRE
FG2 WIRE
RIBBON CABLE
TO EXPANSION UNIT
EXPANSION
UNIT LATCH

OFF BATT ON

MOUNTING
HOLE AND SCREW

AC CORD
TIE WRAP HOLDER

FIGURE 5-6
MOUNTING THE DK16 EXPANSION UNIT

5-7

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

EXPANSION UNIT

SLOT LOCK

SO6

SO7

PCB
LOCK
SO4

SIDE COVER

FIGURE 5-7
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT INTERIOR

5-8

SO5

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

BATT
±

PULL
LOCK

AC
DC
DC POWER

PUSH
UNLOCK

KRCU

OFF BATT ON

AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

TO MDF

TIE WRAP

9 FT
AC POWER CORD

OPTIONAL AC GROUND WIRE
FROM FG TERMINAL TO EARTH
GROUND (COLD WATER PIPE)

TO AC OUTLET (DO NOT ROUTE
AC POWER CORD SIDE-BY-SIDE
WITH OTHER CABLES)

FIGURE 5-8
DK16 EXPANSION UNIT WIRING CONNECTIONS

5-9

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

4. Exercise care in handling batteries in
order not to short the battery with conduction materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns.
5. Charge the batteries provided with or
identified for use with this product
only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this
manual.
6. Observe proper polarity orientation
between the batteries and battery
charger.

13) Knock out the tab on the bottom of the side
cover.
14) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and
then turn ON the power supply switch.
15) Install the side cover to the Expansion Key
Service Unit (Figure 5-7).
2.40 Reserve Power/Power Failure Options
2.41 The STRATA DK systems offer two options
to protect system operation in the event of a power
failure; the Reserve Power option (Paragraph 2.422.44), and the Power Failure Emergency Transfer
option (Paragraph 17).

2.44 Reserve Power Installation. Install the Reserve Power option in accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure 5-9):

2.42 Reserve Power Option STRATA DK16 system power supply provides the capability of connecting a reserve power source (two customer
supplied 12-volt batteries) to ensure uninterrupted
system operation in the event of a power failure. A
pre-assembled interface cable for installation of
the Reserve Power option is available from Toshiba
(PBTC-3M), refer to Figure 5-9.

1) Connect the PBTC-3M black jumper wire
from the positive terminal of one 12VDC
battery to the negative terminal of the second
12VDC battery.
2) Ensure that a serviceable 10-ampere fuse is
installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC3M battery cable.

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Local ordinances may dictate battery type
and installation details.

3) Connect the white lead of the PBTC-3M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the
12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the
open negative terminal of the second 12VDC
battery.

2.43 The batteries require a well-ventilated location close (within 9 feet) to the system —the
interface cable is 9 feet long.

IMPORTANT NOTE!
The KSU must be connected to the live
operating (HOT) AC power source, and
the power supply ON/OFF switch set to
ON prior to the final step of connecting the
reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the
batteries are connected after AC power is
lost, reserve power will not function.

WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire or injury to
persons, read and follow these instructions:
1. Use only the following type and size
batteries: 12-volt, gelcell.
2. Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire.
The cells may explode. Check with
local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
3. Do not open or mutilate the batteries.
Released electrolyte is corrosive and
may cause damage to the eyes or skin.
It may be toxic if swallowed.

4) Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable twoprong male plug to the power supply BATT +/
- receptacle.
5) To test reserve power operation, disconnect
the system AC power plug with the power
supply power ON/OFF switch in the ON position. The system should continue to operate
without any interruption.

5-10

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TWO-PRONG
MALE CONNECTOR
(PRE-ASSEMBLED)

KPSU16

BATT

+
–

PBTC-3M
BATTERY CABLE
WITH RING TERMINALS
AND PPSU CONNECTOR
(LENGTH 9 FEET)

WHITE

BLACK
IN-LINE
FUSE HOLDER
10 A
(FUSE PROVIDED)
POWER SUPPLY

WHITE

BLACK

16AWG

–
ACTUAL
SIZE

+
12 VDC
BATTERY

RING TERMINALS 3/8 IN.

–
12 VDC
BATTERY

BLACK JUMPER
WITH RING TERMINALS
(PROVIDED)

FIGURE 5-9
RESERVE POWER/BATTERY WIRING

3 POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT

supply to free FG wire/terminal and building
ground wire.

3.00 The power supply (KSPU 16) comes factoryinstalled in the Base Key Service Unit (Figure 510); if necessary, it can be removed and replaced.

3.10 Power Supply Removal

3.20 Power Supply Replacement

Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF and that the AC power cable is not
plugged into an outlet. Confirm that green AC
LED is not lit.

Route FG1 wire (soldered on both sides of
Base Unit motherboard) so it will be under the
power supply inside of standoffs (see Figure
5-10).

Unplug reserve battery cable from BATT connector of power supply (Figure 5-10).
Remove K4RCU PCB and Expansion Unit
Unplug the DC cable from the DC OUT connector (see Figure 5-10).
Remove FG screw from left side of power

Set the power supply in its proper place in the
Base Key Service Unit (see Figure 5-9).

Secure the power supply to the Base Key
Service Unit with the six screws.

3)
4)
5)

5-11

Remove the six screws that attach the power
supply to the Base Key Service Unit. Remove
power supply.

INSTALLATION-DK16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

MOUNTING
SCREWS (6)
RESERVE BATTERY
CONNECTOR

KPSU16A
POWER SUPPLY

BATT
±

MOUNTING HOLE
AND SCREW

PULL
LOCK
PUSH
UNLOCK

AC
DC
DC POWER

DC POWER
SWITCH

AC POWER CABLE
FG SCREW
(LEFT SIDE)

–24V CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(RIGHT SIDE)

DC CABLE
KRCU

(FG) GREEN/YELLOW
WIRE WITH RING
TERMINAL THAT IS
FASTENED TO
POWER SUPPLY
FG SCREW
DC OUT (P9) CONNECTOR
(KPSU16 VOLTAGE TEST POINTS)

FG1 GREEN/YELLOW WIRE RUN
UNDERNEATH POWER SUPPLY
BEHIND STAND-OFFS

GREEN/YELLOW WIRE
(RIGHT-HAND SIDE)

FIGURE 5-10
POWER SUPPLY (KPSU16)
4)

Plug the DC cable into the DC OUT connector.
Green/yellow wire is on right-hand side (Figure
5-10).
Fasten FG green/yellow wire ring terminal and
building ground wire to the left side of the
power supply with the FG screw.
Re-install K4RCU PCB (if required).

5-12

Plug the AC power cable into an outlet and
turn ON the power supply switch.

Refer to Paragraph 2.10 to confirm that the
power supply is working properly.

Plug reserve battery cable into BATT connector of power supply (Figure 5-10).

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
CO line circuits; one or two KCDUs which provide
two CO line circuits and four digital telephone
circuits (ports); a PDKU which provides eight digital
telephone circuits (ports); a PEKU which provides
eight electronic telephone circuits (ports); a PESU
which provides two standard and four electronic
telephone circuits (ports); a PSTU which provides
eight standard telephone circuits (ports); and a
PIOU or PIOUS which both provide a port for a
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) device,
an interface for remote maintenance, and relay
control options.

PART II. DK16 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
INSTALLATION
4 GENERAL
4.01 This chapter provides procedures for installation of STRATA DK16 system printed circuit boards
(PCBs) into the Base and Expansion units. This
includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming
considerations for each PCB.
4.02 Be sure the power supply has been tested,
and the ground has been checked. (See Chapter 5,
Section I for the power supply and Chapter 3 for
grounding.)

5.22 The DK16 Expansion Unit does not come from
the factory with any PCBs installed. Any of the
PCBs listed above can fit into any of the unit's four
universal slots; however, it is recommended that
PCBs that support electronic or digital telephones
be installed into Slots 04 and 05, because Slots 06
and 07 cannot support Off-hook Call Announce or
Data Interface Units (DIUs).

4.03 It is recommended to install the Base Unit
option PCBs K4RCU and/or KSTU before mounting the Base KSU on the wall.
4.04 Begin Expansion PCB installation only after
completion of Expansion Unit installation (see Chapter 5, Section I).

Recommended PCB slot assignments:
• KCDU — Slot 04 and 05 (2 maximum)
• PDKU, PEKU, PESU, PSTU — Slot 04 (1 maxi-

5 DK16 PCB INSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS

mum, cannot be installed with KCDU.)
• PCOU — Slot 05 (1 maximum, cannot be in-

stalled with KCDU.)

5.01 The STRATA DK16 Base Unit comes standard with eight digital telephone circuits (ports) and
four CO line circuits. The digital circuits are integrated into the motherboard, and the CO line circuits are on the KCOU which is attached to the P6
and P7 connectors on the motherboard. The common control unit, like the digital telephone circuits,
is built into the motherboard.

• PIOU/PIOUS — Slot 06 (1 maximum)

5.30 PCB Option Considerations
5.31 PCBs may be configured for a variety of
hardware and software options. Hardware options
are defined as either internal (generally related to
optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related
to connection of peripheral equipment such as
background music, voice mail, etc). Hardware and
software options for each PCB are identified in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter.

5.10 DK16 Base Unit PCBs
5.11 The Base Unit can support an optional KSTU
printed circuit board (PCB) which provides four
standard telephone circuits (ports). In addition, a
K4RCU PCB can be installed to receive DTMF
tones, and detect busy tone for Automatic Busy
Redial (ABR) operation.

5.32 PCB Hardware Options. Each PCB must be
configured for the applicable hardware options
prior to installation of the PCB. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures
in this chapter. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Peripheral
Installation, Section 100-816-207.

5.20 DK16 Expansion Unit PCBs
5.21 The Expansion Unit can support a number of
PCBs: it can support a PCOU which provides four

5-13

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by
standard telephones (or any other device connected to a KSTU port), a K4RCU must be
installed in the Base Unit.

5.33 PCB Software Options. PCBs are configured for software options through programming,
after installation of the PCBs in the KSU. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the
individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Programming Procedures, Section
100-816-300, for detailed programming instructions.

6.02 The KSTU is shown in Figure 5-11 and its
connectors and controls are described in Table 5A.

5.40 PCB Installation/Power Supply Considerations

6.10 KSTU Configuration
5.41 Whenever removing or installing PCBs it is
recommended that the power supply be OFF.

6.11 The KSTU only has to be configured for the
ring generator voltage level, nothing else. Before
installing the KSTU in the Base Unit, set the SW540
ring generator to 130V P-P or 190V P-P. Most
standard telephones and two-wire devices require
190; however, some devices may experience ringtrip at 190, and should be set at 130.

6 BASE UNIT STANDARD TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (KSTU)
6.00 General
6.01 The optional KSTU provides four standard
telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the
Base Unit. The KSTU supports the two-wire devices such as standard telephones, Auto Attendant
devices, voice mail machines, and facsimile machines. The KSTU can also support an alternate
Background Music (BGM) source on circuit 4.

6.20 KSTU Installation Procedure
6.21 Install the KSTU in accordance with the following steps:

PLASTIC
STAND-OFF

RED
(WIRE)

P504

P508

MOUNTING
SCREW

KSTU

1) Make sure that the power supply switch is

RED

3 2 1

MOUNTING
SCREW

SW540
130 190

FIGURE 5-11
KSTU OPTIONS AND CONNECTORS

5-14

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-A
KSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-11)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

Ring Voltage Jumper
Plug SW540

Three-terminal jumper

Sets ring generator voltage level for all
circuits:
H = 190V P-P
L = 130V P-P

Connector P508

Female Connector

Mates to male connector P8 on the
motherboard.

Connector Cable P504

Cable

Connects to P4 connector on the
motherboard.

OFF.

Program 10-2
• Used to set standard telephone ringing option.
• Not required for Background Music (BGM) connection.
Program 19
• Used for BGM connection to KSTU Port 11.

2) Plug the KSTU cable into the P4 connector on
the motherboard in the Base Unit. The red
wire on the cable should match up with pin 1
on the lower side of the connector.
3) Plug the KSTU P508 female connector into
the P8 male connector on the motherboard.

NOTE:
KSTU Ports (08~11) are fixed. They are assigned even if a KSTU is not installed.

4) Secure the KSTU to the standoffs with the two
provided screws.
6.30 KSTU Wiring

7 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE
UNIT (PDKU)

6.31 Refer to Base Unit Wiring in Section 100-816208 for KSTU wiring.

7.00 General

6.32 The KSTU must be connected to a OL13A (or
equivalent) type lines for off-premises stations.
(300 ohms loop resistance max., including the
telephone or other devices DC off hook resistance.

7.01 The Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU)
provides eight ports/circuits for digital telephones
and it can only be installed in the Expansion Unit.
The PDKU can also support Integrated Data Interface Units (PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s), Stand-alone Data
Interface Units (PDIU-DSs), a Digital Door Phone/
Lock Control Unit (DDCB), a Digital Direct Station
Selection Console (DDSS), and Add-on Modules
(ADMs). The DDSS console, DDCB, and PDIUDSs are wired directly to the PDKU and require no
additional hardware, but do require their own dedicated ports/circuits. The PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 or the
ADM shares with its accompanying digital tele-

6.40 KSTU Programming Overview
6.41 The following parameters may be specified for
the KSTU:
Program 03
• Specify code 31 for KSTU slot.
Program 31
• Used to configure all KSTU ports connected to
voice mail (see Chapter 7 for voice mail installation).

5-15

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
phone the same wire pair and circuit on the PDKU.
The PDKU (Figure 5-12) has no controls.

NOTE:
The PDIU-DI attaches to 1000-series Digital
Telephones, and the PDIU-DI2 attaches to
2000-series Digital Telephones.
7.10 PDKU Hardware Options
7.11 The PDKU supports the hardware options
noted below. Unlike the other PCBs, there are no
controls on the PDKU that need to be set for
options.
Internal option:
• none
External option:
• DDSS console
• PDIU-DS
• PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2
• DDCB

NOTE:
There are two versions of the PDKU: PDKU1,
and PDKU2. These versions are identical
except for the number of Data Interface Units
(DIUs) they can support (see Paragraphs 7.14
and 7.15). Also, PDKU2 supports continuous
DTMF tones with 2000-series digital telephones, but PDKU1 does not support continuous DTMF tones.
7.12 Hardware Configuration
7.13 DDSS Console Configuration. Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-206,
for installation procedures for the DDSS console.
The DDSS console requires dedicated use of Circuit 8 of the PDKU.
7.14 PDIU-DS Configuration. Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 100-816-207, for installation procedures for the PDIU-DS. A PDIU-DS can
be connected to Circuits 1 ~ 7 on a PDKU1 or

50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-12
PDKU INTERFACE CONNECTION
5-16

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
for a DDSS console and OCA.
Programs 20, 21, and 22
• Use to configure PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s and PDIUDSs.
Programs 28 and 29
• Use for DDSS assignments.
Program 30
• Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital
telephone handsets.
Program 92-5
• Initializes initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring
volume levels of digital telephones.
Programs 77-1, 77-2, and 79
• Used for DDCB and door phone assignments

Circuits 1 ~ 8 on a PDKU2; the circuit must be
dedicated to the PDIU-DS.
7.15 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 Configuration. Refer to
Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816206, and Peripherals Installation, Chapter 7, for
installation procedures for the PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2.
PDIU-DIs/PDIU-DI2s can be equipped with any
digital telephone connected to PDKU Circuits 1 ~ 7
with PDKU1 or Circuits 1 ~ 8 with PDKU2.
7.16 DDCB Configuration. Refer to Peripherals
Installation, Section 100-816-207, for installation
procedures for the DDCB. The DDCB must be
connected to the Circuit 8 on the PDKU.
7.17 ADM Configuration. Refer to Section 100816-206, Paragraph 7.00.

8 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (PEKU)

7.20 PDKU Installation Procedure
8.00 General

7.21 Install the PDKU in accordance with the following steps:

8.01 The Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
(PEKU) provides eight ports for electronic telephones and it must be installed in the Expansion
Unit. It is recommended that the current 6500series be used, because this series consumes the
least amount of power.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Insert the PDKU into the appropriate slot (see
Paragraph 5.22, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.

8.02 The PEKU can be configured to receive Offhook Call Announce (OCA) by installing an Offhook Call Announce Unit (EOCU). It can also be
configured to support an HDSS console and an
external Background Music (BGM) source connector. An external amplifier for two-CO line conference calls can also be connected to Circuits 6 and
7 of the PEKU. The HDSS console, the external
amplifier, and the BGM source, are wired directly to
the PEKU and require no additional hardware, but
do require specific ports/circuits. Electronic telephones also wire directly to the PEKU, and they can
be connected to any PEKU circuit.

NOTE:
Ensure the PDKU's component side is facing
right when installing it in the KSU.
4) After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
7.30 PDKU Wiring
7.31 Refer to PDKU Wiring Diagrams, Chapter 8,
for wiring/interconnecting details.
7.40 PDKU Programming Overview
7.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PDKU:
Program 03
• Specify code 61 if no options are installed on a
PDKU.
• Specify code 62 to indicate a PDKU that will
support stations that must receive Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA).
• Specify code 64 to indicate a PDKU configured

8.03 PEKU controls and interface connectors are
shown in Figure 5-13 and described in Table 5-B.
8.10 PEKU Hardware Options
8.11 The PEKU supports the following hardware
options:
Internal Options
• Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU)
External Options

5-17

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

EKT
DSS

SW1

W5, cut for
BGM option

P10

P40

P20
P50 P60

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-13
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
• HDSS console
• BGM source connection
• External Amplifier

4) Use a 3-pair cable for making connections
between the PEKU and the Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA) electronic telephone. Refer
to Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for
wiring/interconnecting details.

8.12 Off-hook Call Announce (EOCU) Installation. Install the Off-hook Call Announce Unit
(EOCU) in accordance with the following steps:

5) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-206, for procedures to upgrade
electronic telephones for OCA.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

8.13 HDSS Console Configuration. Configure
the PEKU to support an HDSS console in accordance with the following steps:

NOTE:
PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and
P60 are positioned to allow installation of the
EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 513).

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Set the SW1 DSS/EKT switch to DSS.

2) Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50,
and J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20,
P40, P50, and P60 (Figure 5-14).

3) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-206, for installation procedures
for the HDSS console. The HDSS console
requires dedicated use of Circuits 7 and 8 of
the PEKU PCB.

3) Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.

5-18

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-B
PEKU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR (Figure 5-13)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

Off-hook Call
Announce P10

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P20,
P40, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P20

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P40, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P40

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P50

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P40, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P60

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P40, and P50).

DSS/EKT DSS Console/
Electronic Telephone
SW1 Switch

Two-position slide switch

Configures PEKU for operation with either
an HDSS console or electronic
telephones.

BGM source connection
W5 Jumper Wire

White jumper wire

When cut, configures PEKU for BGM
source connection.

8.14 Background Music (BGM) Configuration.
Configure the PEKU to support a BGM source in
accordance with the following steps:

8.15
External Amplifier Configuration. The
PEKU does not have to be configured to support an
external amplifier. However, the system must be
programmed for one; see Paragraph 8.40. See
Peripherals Installation, Section 100-816-207, for
external amplifier installation instructions.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Cut the W5 (BGM) jumper wire on the PEKU
PCB.

8.20 PEKU Installation Procedure
8.21 Install the PEKU in accordance with the following steps:

3) Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 100816-207, for installation procedures for BGM
connection.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

5-19

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
• Specify code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured
J60

for OCA and an HDSS console.
Program 10-2
• Used for BGM connection.

J40

Program 10-3

J50

• Used for external amplifier connection.

Program 19
• Also used for BGM connection.

Programs 28 and 29
• Used for HDSS assignments.

J20

9 STANDARD TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (PSTU)

J10

9.00 General
9.01 The Standard Telephone Interface Unit
(PSTU) provides an interface between standard
telephones or two-wire devices and the system,
and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit. The
PSTU PCB adds eight standard telephone lines to
the system. The PSTU can also support a Background Music (BGM) source.

FIGURE 5-14
OFF-HOOK CALL ANNOUNCE UNIT (EOCU)
INTERFACE CONNECTORS
2) Ensure the PEKU has been configured for the
appropriate hardware options (refer to Paragraph 8.10).

NOTE:
For the system to recognize the Dual-Tone
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by
a standard telephone (or any other device
connected to a PSTU port), a DTMF Receiver
Unit (K4RCU) must be installed in the Base
Unit.

3) Insert the PEKU into the appropriate slot (refer
to Paragraph 5.22), and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.
4) After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
8.30 PEKU Wiring

9.02 PSTU controls are shown in Figure 5-15 and
described in Table 5-C.

8.31 Refer to PEKU Wiring Diagrams, Section
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.

9.10 PSTU (1 and 2) Hardware Options

8.40 PEKU Programming Overview

9.11 There are two PSTU versions (1 and 2): They
are identical except for the ring generator. The ring
generator on the original version (V.3) of PSTU1 is
fixed at a 190V P-P level, while the ring generator
on PSTU1 (V.4) and PSTU2 can be set for 130V PP or 190V P-P. The W1 jumper plug is used to set
the voltage level. Most standard telephones and
two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; however, some devices may experience ring-trip with
190V P-P and they require the 130V P-P level.

8.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PEKU:
Program 03
• Specify code 21 to indicate a station line PEKU.
• Specify code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured

for OCA.
• Specify code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured

for an HDSS console.

5-20

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

W1
H

SSTU
SUBUNIT

W1 Ring Voltage
H = 190V P-P
L = 130V P-P
(For PSTU1 (V.4)
and PSTU2 only)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-15
PSTU AND SUBUNIT (SSTU)

TABLE 5-C
PSTU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-15)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

Ring Voltage W1 Jumper Three-terminal jumper
Plug (PSTU1 ( V.4 ) and
PSTU2 only)

NOTE:
PSTU1 (V.4) became available in November
1989. PSTU1(V.3) was discontinued.

DESCRIPTION
Sets ring generator voltage level for all
circuits.
H = 190V P-P
L = 130V P-P

9.13 Unlike the PEKU or PESU, the PSTU does not
have to be configured for BGM: There is no jumper
wire to cut, etc.
9.20 PSTU Installation Procedure

9.12 Set the PSTU1 (V.4) or PSTU2 ring generator
level as required:

9.21 Install the PSTU in accordance with the following steps:
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging. The protective shield on the back of the
PSTU is designed to protect the installer from

• W1 set to H (190V P-P).
• W1 set to L (130V P-P).
• Two ringers maximum per port (H or L).

5-21

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not
remove this shield.

four electronic telephone interface circuits (5 ~ 8)
identical to PEKU circuits for connecting electronic
telephones, BGM or an external amplifier. The
PESU provides a ring generator for circuits 1 and 2
(with a ring voltage of either 190V P-P or 130V PP), and it must be installed in the Expansion Unit.
• The PESU does not support an HDSS console
connection.
• The PESU provides connectors to mount the
EOCU for OCA to electronic telephones.

2) Ensure that the PSTU subunit (SSTU) is securely attached to the PSTU (refer to Figure 515).

NOTE:
W1, the ring generator level option, should be
set in the H position (factory) for initial installation.
3) Insert the PSTU into the appropriate slot (refer
to Paragraph 5.22), and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.

NOTE:
A KSU must be installed in the Base Unit for
the system to recognize Dual-Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) tones sent from standard
telephones or other two-wire devices that are
connected to the PESU.

9.30 PSTU Wiring
9.31 Refer to PSTU Wiring Diagram, Section 100816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.
9.32 The PSTU is registered for use with OL13A
type lines for off-premises stations.

10.02 The PESU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 5-16 and described in
Table 5-D.

9.40 PSTU Programming Overview

10.10 PESU Hardware Options

9.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PSTU:
Program 03
• Specify code 31 for all slots that have PSTUs
installed.
Program 31
• Used to configure all PSTU ports connected to
voice mail (Section 100-816-207 for more details).
Program 10-2
• Used to set standard telephone ringing option.
• Also used for BGM connection.
Program 19
• Used for BGM connection also.

10.11 The PESU supports the following hardware
options:
• Internal option: Off-hook Call Announce
(EOCU).

NOTE:
Refer to Section 100-816-206 and Section
100-816-207 for installation of external options.
10.12 Off-hook Call Announce (EOCU) Installation. Install the Off-hook Call Announce in accordance with the following steps:
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

10 STANDARD/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE UNIT (PESU)

NOTE:
PESU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and
P60 are positioned to allow installation of the
EOCU only in the proper position (refer to
Figure 5-16).

10.00 General
10.01 The Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) provides two standard telephone
interface circuits (1 and 2) identical to PSTU circuits
for connection between standard telephones, or
two-wire devices, and the system. It also provides

2) Mate the EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40,
J50, and J60 with the PESU connectors P10,
P20, P40, P50, and P60 (refer to Figure 5-16).

5-22

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

CUT W7 ONLY IF BGM IS CONNECTED TO
CIRCUIT 8.

P60

W7
PESU

P40
P50
OPTIONAL
EOCU, EQUIP
FOR OCA
FEATURE

50-PIN
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR
(FEMALE)

P10

P20

ESTS

P80

P70
UP

P90

RING VOLTAGE OPTION (CIRCUITS 1 & 2):
L = LOW LEVEL (130V P-P)
H = HIGH LEVEL (190V P-P)

PESU

ESTS: STANDARD TELEPHONE
INTERFACE, ALWAYS EQUIPPED
FROM FACTORY

NOTE: Connect two ringers maximum per port (H or L).

FIGURE 5-16
PESU PCB OPTION LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION
5-23

BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-D
PESU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR (Figure 5-16)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

Off-hook Call
Announce P10

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P20,
P40, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P20

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P40, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P40

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P50, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P50

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P40, and P60).

Off-hook Call
Announce P60

10-pin connector

Interface connector for optional Off-hook
Call Announce subassembly
connector (used in conjunction with P10,
P20, P40, and P50).

Ring Voltage Jumper
Plug P90

Three-terminal jumper

Sets ring generator voltage level for
circuits 1 and 2.
H = 190V P-P (factory setting)
L = 130V P-P

BGM W7 Jumper Pack

White jumper wire

When cut, configures PESU, circuit 8,
for BGM source connection.

10.13 Background Music (BGM) Configuration. Configure the PESU to support a BGM source
in accordance with the following steps:
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) Cut the W7 (BGM) jumper wire on the PESU
PCB.
3) Refer to Peripherals Installation, Section 100816-207, for BGM installation procedures.

3) Apply firm, even pressure to the EOCU to
ensure proper mating of connectors.
4) Use 3-pair cable for connecting the PESU and
the OCA electronic telephone (refer to Wiring
Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for wiring/
interconnecting details).
5) Refer to Station Apparatus Installation, Section 100-816-206, for procedures to add OCA
to electronic telephones.

10.14 External Amplifier Configuration. The
PESU does not have to be configured to support an

5-24

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
external amplifier. However, the system must be
programmed for one; see Paragraph 10.40. The
external amplifier requires Circuits 6 and 7 on the
PESU. See Peripherals Installation, Section 100816-207, for external amplifier installation instructions.

Program 03
• Specify code 25 for all slots that have PESUs
without EOCU.
• Specify code 26 for all slots that have PESUs
equipped with EOCU.

NOTE:
A special code is not required to connect BGM
to a PESU.

10.20 PESU Installation Procedure
10.21 Install the PESU in accordance with the
following steps:

Program 31
• Configures the PESU Circuits 1 and 2 for connection to voice mail devices.
Program 10-2
• Sets the standard telephone ring cadence for
normal or distinctive ringing and BGM source
connection.
Program 10-3
• Used for external amplifier connection.
Program 19
• Also used for BGM connection.

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging. The protective shield on the back of the
PESU is designed to protect the installer from
potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not
remove this shield.
2) Ensure that the PESU subunit (ESTS) is
securely attached to the PESU (refer to Figure
5-15).
3) If the electronic telephones connected to the
PESU must receive OCA calls, install the
EOCU subassembly PCB on the PESU per
Paragraph 10.12.

11 CO LINE UNIT (PCOU)
11.00 General

6) Insert the PESU into the appropriate slot, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of connectors.

11.01 The PCOU PCB adds four CO lines to the
system and it can only be installed in the Expansion
Unit. The PCOU provides Ring Detection, Dial
Outpulsing and Hold; as well as Automatic Busy
Redial (ABR) circuitry. Each CO line can be programmed for Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
or dial pulse.
NOTE:
There are two PCOU versions (1 and 2). They
are identical in fit/form/function and are interchangeable in all DK system models.

7) After installing the PESU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.

11.02 PCOU controls, indicators, and interface
connectors are shown in Figure 5-17 and described
in Table 5-E.

4) If a BGM source is connected to the PESU,
Circuit 8, cut W7.
5) Ensure that the ring voltage option, P90, is set
to the “H” position for initial installation. The “L”
position is used if devices connected to the
PESU trip ring voltage before answer.

10.30 PESU Wiring

11.10 PCOU Hardware Options

10.31 Refer to PESU Wiring Diagram, Section
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.

11.11 There are no hardware options supported
by the PCOU.

10.40 PESU Programming Overview

11.20 PCOU Installation Procedure

10.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PESU:

11.21 Install the PCOU in accordance with the
following steps:

5-25

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

11.30 PCOU Wiring
11.31 Refer to PCOU Wiring Diagram, Section
100-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.

NOTE:
The dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401
control excessive loudness resulting from close
proximity to the CO or PBX telephone office by
providing a 3 decibel (dB) signal level drop to, or
from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position.
Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal
level drop) position.

11.40 PCOU Programming Overview
11.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PCOU:
Program 03
• Specify code 11 for the slot in which the PCOU
is installed.
Program 10-1
• Allows/denies two-CO Line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Program 15
• Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse (DP) Dialing, Tenant
Service, DISA, and other attributes to each CO
line.
Program 16
• Assigns CO lines to groups 81 ~ 88, and dial 9
group.
Program 40
• Assigns stations access to CO lines (incoming
and outgoing access).

2) If the Expansion Unit is located within one mile
of the PBX or CO telephone office, set dB PAD
switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3
dB signal level drop) position.
3) Insert the PCOU into the appropriate slot
(refer to Paragraph 2.22), and apply firm,
even pressure to ensure proper mating of
connectors.
4) After installing the PCOU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
CO LINE MODULAR
JACK CIRCUITS 1 AND 2

CO LINE MODULAR
JACK CIRCUITS 3 AND 4

SW101

SW201

SW301

0
3
PAD

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-17
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
5-26

SW401
0
3
PAD

CO LINE
LED'S

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-E
PCOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-17)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

CO Line Circuit 1
Indicator CD112

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

CO Line Circuit 2
Indicator CD212

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

CO Line Circuit 3
Indicator CD312

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 3 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

CO Line Circuit 4
Indicator CD412

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 4 is in
operation (NOTE: CO line indicator will
not light unless PCOU is connected to
a CO).

J1 Connector

Modular connector

Interface connector for CO line circuits
1 and 2.

J2 Connector

Modular connector

Interface connector for CO line circuits
3 and 4.

PAD Switch SW101

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 1.

PAD Switch SW201

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 2.

PAD Switch SW301

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 3.

PAD Switch SW401

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 4.

Program 41
• Assigns stations access to CO lines (outgoing
only).
Program 42-0, 1-8
• Assigns behind PBX/CENTREX operation to
each CO line.
Programs 45 ~ 48
• Defines Toll Restrictions for any CO line.
Programs 50 ~ 56
• Defines Least Cost Routing using CO lines.

Program 78
• Assigns special ringing of CO lines: Night Ring
Over Page, DISA, IMDU.
Programs 81 ~ 89
• Assigns CO lines to ring selected stations.
• Assigns Delayed Ringing to any CO line.
Program 93
• Assigns names to CO lines.

5-27

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
Internal Options
• Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (IMDU)
External Options
• Alarm Sensor
• Local Maintenance Terminal or Modem
• SMDR Printer or Call Accounting Port
• Remote Maintenance Port
• Relay control options
• Zone Page via relays (PIOU only)

12 OPTION INTERFACE UNIT
(PIOU AND PIOUS)
12.00 General
12.01 The Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS)
provides a circuit interface with peripheral options.
A maximum of one PIOU or PIOUS PCB can be
installed in the system. The PIOU and PIOUS
support the same options, except the PIOUS
does not support Zone Paging (see Paragraph
12.11).

NOTE:
Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation,
Section 100-816-207, for installation of external options.

12.02 PIOU controls, indicators, and interface
connectors are shown in Figure 5-18 and described in Table 5-F. PIOUS information is provided in Figure 5-19 and Table 5-G.
12.03 The internal 600 ohm or 3 watt page amplifier of the PIOU is not supported by Strata
DK16.

12.12 Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (IMDU)
Installation. Install the Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (IMDU) in accordance with the following
steps:

12.10 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options

12.11 The PIOU and PIOUS support the following
STRATA DK16 hardware options:
50-PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

SW2

SMDR TTY

J3
B

P13

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-18
PIOU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
5-28

P12

M C.C.I.T.T. N.O.

P11
P10

SPO

1200

SW1
300
TTY

SPI

SW3
MODEM

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-F
PIOU CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-18)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

SMDR/TTY Interface
Connector J3

Dual modular connector

Interface connector for SMDR printer/
call accounting device and
maintenance terminal/modem.

IMDU Connector P1

10-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

IMDU Connector P2

9-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

IMDU Connector P3

3-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug P10

Three-terminal jumper plug

External Page/Door Lock Control Relay
MAKE or BREAK jumper plug.

M/B Make/Break
Jumper Plug P11

Three-terminal jumper plug

Night/Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK
jumper plug.

Alarm Sensor N.O./N.C.
Jumper Plug P12

Three-terminal jumper plug

Alarm sensor normally open or normally
closed jumper plug.

CCITT/BELL Jumper
Plug P13

Three-terminal jumper plug

IMDU or external modem operating
specification jumper plug.

SMDR Baud Rate
Switch SW1

Two-position slide switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
SMDR printer or call accounting device.

TTY Baud Rate Switch
SW2

Two-position locking pushbutton switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back
module (IMDU) or external TTY jack.

Modem/TTY Switch
SW3

Two-position slide switch

Enables PIOU for operation with IMDU
modem or TTY jack.

(refer to Figure 5-20).
NOTE:
PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3
are positioned to allow installation of the IMDU
only in the proper position.
6) Apply firm, even pressure to IMDU to ensure
proper mating of connectors.
NOTE:
The IMDU default station intercom number is
619; and IMDU communication parameters are
7-bits, even parity, 1-stop bit.

2) Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front
panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the
PIOU/PIOUS has been installed in the Expansion Unit (in-300 bps—out-1200 bps).
3) Set SW3 to MODEM position for IMDU operation.
4) Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
BELL position; or, cut the W4 jumper on the
PIOUS for BELL operation.
5) Mate IMDU connectors J1, J2, and J3 with
PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3

7) Refer to Programming Procedures, Section
100-816-300, Program 77-1, and set LED 14
to ON to enable IMDU operation.

5-29

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

SW1

W4 NOT FACTORY
INSTALLED FOR BELL
MODEM SPECIFICATION

SW3

TTY
CCITT W4 NORMAL OPEN
W3
BELL
NORMAL CLOSED

SMDR

IMDU

SW2
P1
P3

CD4

OPTIONAL IMDU PCB
REMOTE MAINTENANCE
MODEM

MAKE

DE
NH
ALM

SPT SPR DET DER NHT NHR ALMT ALMR

600

TBI
TERMINAL
STRIP

BREAK
MAKE

W2
BREAK

BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR

PIOUS

FIGURE 5-19
PIOUS PCB SWITCH/JUMPER, OPTION LOCATION
4) After installing the PIOU or PIOUS, gently pull
the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt.

NOTE:
Refer to Remote Maintenance Procedures,
Section 100-816-600, for information regarding the IMDU.

12.30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring
12.31 Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation
(Section 100-816-207) and Wiring Diagrams (Section 100-816-208) for PIOU/PIOUS wiring/interconnecting details.

12.20 PIOU and PIOUS Installation Procedure
12.21 Install the PIOU or PIOUS in accordance
with the following steps:

12.40 PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview

1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

12.41 The following parameters may be specified,
through programming, for the PIOU and PIOUS:
Program 77-1
• Assigns relay control and IMDU options.
Program 60
• Assigns SMDR options.
Program 78
• Enables Night Ringing over External Page.

2) Ensure the PIOU or PIOUS has been configured for the appropriate hardware options
(refer to Paragraph 12.10 and Section 100816-207).
3) Insert the PIOU or PIOUS into slot 06 in the
Expansion Unit, and apply firm, even pressure
to ensure proper mating of connectors.

5-30

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-G
PIOUS CONTROLS AND INTERFACE CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-19)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

SMDR/TTY Interface
Connector J3

Dual modular connector

Interface connector for SMDR printer/
call accounting device and
maintenance terminal/modem.

IMDU Connector P1

10-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

IMDU Connector P2

9-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

IMDU Connector P3

3-pin connector

Interface connector for Remote
Maintenance Modem piggy-back module.

M/B Make/Break Jumper
W1

Wire jumper

External Page/Door Lock Control Relay
MAKE or BREAK jumper.

M/B Make/Break Jumper
W2

Wire jumper

Night/Hold Relay MAKE or BREAK
jumper.

Alarm Sensor N.O./N.C.
W3

Wire jumper

Alarm sensor normally open or normally
closed jumper.

CCITT/BELL Jumper
W4*

Wire jumper

IMDU or external modem operating specification jumper plug. (BELL = NO W4)

SMDR Baud Rate
Switch SW1

Two-position slide switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
SMDR printer or call accounting device.

TTY Baud Rate Switch
SW2

Two-position locking pushbutton switch

Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for
Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back
module (IMDU) or external TTY jack.

Modem/TTY Switch
SW3

Two-position slide switch

Enables PIOUS for operation with IMDU
modem or TTY jack.

*Most modems in USA require BELL specification: W4 not factory-installed.

and a DDCB. The KCDU does not support a DDSS
console. One or two KCDU PCBs may be installed
in the Expansion Unit. No other station or CO line
PCB can be installed if the KCDU is installed.

13 CO LINE/DIGITAL TELEPHONE
INTERFACE UNIT (KCDU)
13.00 General
13.01 The KCDU, which can only be installed in the
Expansion Unit of DK16 (it will not function in DK24/
56/96), has two loop start CO line circuits and four
digital telephone circuits. The KCDU digital telephone circuits can support all but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit
integrated digital telephone circuits: digital telephones, PDIU-DIs/PDIU-D12s, PDIU-DSs, ADMs,

13.02 The KCDU is shown is Figure 5-21, and its
controls, connectors, and indicators are described
in Table 5-H.
13.10 KCDU Configuration
13.11 The KCDU may have to be configured to
control excessive loudness if the system is close to

5-31

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
a CO or installed behind a PBX telephone system.
It does not have to be configured for anything else.
The decibel (db) PAD switches, SW501 (CO1) and
SW601 (CO2), control the loudness by providing a
3 db signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO
when set to the PAD position. The switch comes
from the factory set at NOR (for normal) meaning
no PAD loss.

J3
J1

13.20 KCDU Installation Procedure
J2

13.21 Install the KCDU in accordance with the
following steps:
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.
2) If the system is located within one mile of the
CO or PBX telephone system, set db PAD
switches SW501 and SW601 to the PAD
position.

FIGURE 5-20
REMOTE MAINTENANCE MODEM UNIT (IMDU)
IINTERFACE CONNECTORS

3) Insert the KCDU into the appropriate slot (04
first, 05 second) in the Expansion Unit, and
apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper
mating of the connectors.
25-PAIR AMPHENOL CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

CO2
CO1

SW601 SW501
(CO2) (CO1)
PAD NOR

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FIGURE 5-21
KCDU INDICATORS, OPTIONS, AND CONNECTORS
5-32

PAD NOR

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

TABLE 5-H
KCDU CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
CONTROL/INDICATOR/
CONNECTOR
(Figure 5-21)

TYPE OF COMPONENT

DESCRIPTION

CO line circuit 1
Indicator CD517

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 1 is in
operation.

CO line circuit 2
Indicator CD617

Red LED

Lights to indicate CO line circuit 2 is in
operation.

J7 Connectors

Modular connector

Interface connector for CO line circuits,
1 and 2.

PAD Switch SW501

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 1 (when set in PAD position).

PAD Switch SW601

Two-position slide

Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line
circuit 2 (when set in PAD position).

connected to a standard telephone circuit) and it is
required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
calls. The K4RCU can only be installed in the Base
Unit. The K4RCU circuits are also used to detect
busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
feature and must be installed to allow ABR to
operate.

4) After installing the KCDU, gently pull the PCB
outward. If the connectors are properly mated,
a slight resistance will be felt.
13.30 KCDU Wiring
13.31 Refer to KCDU Wiring Diagram in Section
100-816-208 for wiring/interconnecting details.

14.10 K4RCU Configuration

13.40 KCDU Programming Overview

14.11 The K4RCU does not have to be configured
for operation.

13.41 See the PCOU programming overview and
the PDKU overview in this chapter for KCDU programming information. When running Program 03
for the KCDU slot(s), specify code 65 if the KCDU
does not support OCA or PDIU-DI telephones or
code 66 if the KCDU supports OCA or PDIU-DI
telephones. Do not specify code 11, 61, 62, or 64.

14.20 K4RCU Installation Procedure
14.21 Install the K4RCU in accordance with the
following steps (Figure 5-22).
1) Remove the PCB from its protective packaging.

14 DTMF RECEIVER/ABR TONE
DETECTOR UNIT (K4RCU)

2) Make sure that the power supply switch is
OFF.
3) Making sure that the component side of the
K4RCU is facing up toward the power supply,
plug the K4RCU P602A and P602B female
connectors into the P2A and P2B (K4RCU)
connectors on the motherboard.

14.00 General
14.01 The K4RCU must be installed to recognize
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device

5-33

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
tical to the PCOU and KCDU CO line circuits. The
KCOU also has four PAD (3 dB) switches—SW400,
SW425, SW450, and SW475—to reduce excessive loudness caused by a nearby CO or PBX
telephone system. For wiring and programming
considerations, see the PCOU instructions in Paragraph 8. The Base Unit circuits are fixed and are
assigned to Base Unit virtual equipment slots as
follows: 8-digital station circuit to slot 01, 4-CO line
circuits (KCOU) to slot 02, and 4 standard telephone circuits (KSTU) to slot 3.

14.30 K4RCU Wiring
14.31 The K4RCU does not require any wiring.
14.40 K4RCU Programming Overview
14.41 The following parameters may be specified:
Program 03
• Enter code 92 for Slot 00 if K4RCU is installed.
Program 12
• Set K4RCU release time.
Program 15
• Sets K4RCU operation after CO line flash.

15.20 Digital Telephone Circuits

15 BUILT-IN CO LINE AND
DIGITAL TELEPHONE CIRCUITS

15.21 The eight digital telephone circuits that come
standard with the system are integrated into the
motherboard in the Base Unit. These circuits are
indentical to the digital circuits found on the PDKU
and KCDU. The motherboard does not have to be
configured for the digital circuits to operate. For
wiring and programming considerations, see the
PDKU instructions in Paragraph 7.

15.00 General
15.01 As mentioned in Paragraph 2, the Base Unit
comes standard with four CO lines and eight digital
telephone circuits already installed.
15.10 Built-in CO Line Circuits
15.11 The four standard loop start CO line circuits
are on a printed circuit board (PCB) called the
KCOU, which is installed on the motherboard at the
factory (Figure 5-23). The KCOU circuits are iden-

15.30 Base Unit CO Line/Digital Station
Circuit Wiring
15.31 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for details.

P2A (BASE UNIT)

P2B (BASE UNIT)

P602A

P602B

VERSION

CONNECTORS

FIGURE 5-22
K4RCU PCB

5-34

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993

16 KCOU REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT

16.20 KCOU Replacement

16.00 General

1) Make sure the Power Supply (KPSU16) DC
power switch is off.

16.01 The KCOU comes factory-installed in the
Base Key Service Unit (Figure 5-3); if necessary,
it can be removed and replaced.

2) Mate and connect KCOU P6 cable connector
to P6 on Base Unit motherboard so that the
red wire is aligned as shown in Figure 5-23.
3) Position KCOU as shown in Figure 5-23.

16.10 KCOU Removal

4) Mate and connect KCOU P7 to P7 on the Base
Unit motherboard.

1) Make sure the Power Supply (KPSU16) DC
power switch is turned off.

5) Secure plastic stand-off tab and install screws
1 and 2.

2) Loosen and remove screws 1 and 2 (Figure
5-23).

6) Set SW400 ~ 475 to appropriate position. In
most cases set to the normal position (NOR);
if CO lines are connected to a PBX or are in
close proximity to the Central Office, set to the
PAD position to provide a 3 db loss in signal
level.

3) Pull back plastic stand-off tab and pull up on
KCOU until P7 is unplugged.
4) Pull wires on P6 and remove P6 connector
from Base Unit.

SCREW (2)
KRCU
P2A

J4 (CO4)

P2B
KCOU

KCOU

J3 (CO4)

SW475

SW450

J2 (CO4)

NOR

BASE UNIT
MOTHERBOARD

PAD

SCREW (1)

SW400

SW425

RED RED

SW400
SW425
SW450
SW475

FIGURE 5-23
KCOU PCB
5-35

FOR
FOR
FOR
FOR

CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4

PLASTIC STAND-OFF
(TAB)

J1 (CO4)

INSTALLATION-DK 16 KSU & PCB
SECTION 100-816-205
MARCH 1993
17.10 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer
Installation. Install the dedicated emergency standard telephone as follows (see Figure 5-24):

17 DK16 POWER FAILURE EMERGENCY
TRANSFER OPTION
17.00 A dedicated standard telephone can be connected to the Power Failure Transfer Interface
(PF1) on the DK16 Base Unit to provide power
failure backup. During normal operation, this telephone cannot be used—it does not count as a
station; so it does not reduce the system's 20
maximum station capacity. But if there is a power
failure, the telephone will automatically be connected to CO line 1. When power is restored, the
system will automatically resume with its normal
station and CO line assignments, and the dedicated telephone will become inoperative again.

1) Connect a standard telephone to the PF1
connector in the Base Unit.
17.11 DK16 Power Failure Emergency Transfer Test.
1) Turn the system power switch off.
2) Lift the emergency standard telephone handset, and verify that there is CO dial tone.

DK8 OR DK16
KSU MAIN PCB

MDF

POWER AVAILABLE
CONNECTION

CO
LINE

KCOU
CO LINE 1

5
MOD JACK CO1
(BASE UNIT)
POWER FAIL
CONNECTION

MDF

T
PFT
STANDARD
TELEPHONE

MOD JACK PF1
(BASE UNIT)

FIGURE 5-24
DK16 BASE UNIT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER (PFT) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

5-36

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER SIX
STATION APPARATUS INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
1.00
1.10
2
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
3.50
3.60
3.70
3.80
3.90
4
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40
4.50
4.60
5
5.10
5.20
6
6.10
6.20
6.30
6.40
7

SUBJECT
OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................................
Purpose ................................................................................................................
Types of Telephones ............................................................................................
TELEPHONE INSTALLATION .................................................................................
General .................................................................................................................
Connecting Digital Telephones to the System .....................................................
Connecting Electronic Telephones to the System (DK16 only) .............................
Connecting Standard Telephones to the System .................................................
Telephone Wall Mounting .....................................................................................
DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES .......................................................................
Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade (PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI) ........................
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) ...........................................................
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU).......................................................
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps..........................................................................
Beep Strap ............................................................................................................
Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) ....................
Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option ..............
External Power Straps ..........................................................................................
DKT2000 Add-On-Module Installation ..................................................................
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE UPGRADE OPTIONS (DK16 Only) ............................
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) .................................
Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU).......................................................
Carbon Headset/Handset Straps..........................................................................
Beep Strap ............................................................................................................
Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones Only) .......................................
Handset Receiver Volume-Up Strap (Version 2 6500-Series Telephones Only) ..
DIRECT STATION SELECTION CONSOLE/SYSTEM CONNECTION
(DK16 Only) ..............................................................................................................
DDSS Console Connections ................................................................................
HDSS Console Connections ................................................................................
DOOR PHONE/LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DOOR PHONE
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................
DDCB and MDFB Cabling ....................................................................................
DDCB Wall Mounting ............................................................................................
Door Phone (MDFB) Wall Mounting .....................................................................
Door Phone/Lock Programming Considerations ..................................................
ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION ........................................................................

6-i

PAGE
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-4
6-4
6-6
6-6
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20

TITLE
REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE ....................................................................
HANDSET HANGER ................................................................................................
WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION .....................................................................
PDIU-DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE ..................
PDIU-DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE....................
DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES ............................................
DKT2010-H STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ...........................................
DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, AND DKT2020-SD STRAP AND CONNECTOR
LOCATIONS .............................................................................................................
1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION
LOCATIONS .............................................................................................................
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE ..............................................
HESC-65A CABLING ...............................................................................................
HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES ..................................
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS ...............................................
HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES ..........................
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES ....................................
DOOR PHONE (DDCB) INSTALLATION .................................................................
DOOR PHONE (MDFB) INSTALLATION .................................................................
ADD-ON-MODULE INSTALLATION ........................................................................
DK16 ADD-ON-MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ......................................
DK8 ADD-ON-MODULE DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS ........................................

6-ii

PAGE
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-18

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

WARNING!
1. Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install the telephone jacks in
wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone
wires or terminals unless the telephone
line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
5. If telephone, DSS console, Door phone
control box, or Door phone wiring exits the building, external secondary
protection is required. See Section 100816-208.

1 OVERVIEW
1.00 Purpose
1.01 This chapter provides instructions on how to
connect telephones to the STRATA DK8 and DK16
systems and how to configure and upgrade them
for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles and door phones
also appear in this chapter.
1.10 Types of Telephones
1.11 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems can
support the following telephones.
• Digital Telephones: Installation instructions for
digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere
in this manual apply only to the Toshiba 2000and 1000-series Digital Telephones. The 2000series Digital Telephones consist of four models: the DKT2010-H, the DKT2010-SD, the
DKT2020-S, and the DKT2020-SD. There are
two 1000-series Digital Telephone models, the
DKT1020-H and the DKT1020-SD.
• Electronic Telephones: (DK16 only) The electronic telephone instructions here apply to the
Toshiba 6500-series Electronic Telephones,
although there are other electronic telephones
(the 2000-, 3000-, 6000-, and 6500-series) that
are compatible with the STRATA DK16. The
6500-series electronic telephones consist of
four models: the EKT6510-H, the EKT6510-S,
the EKT6520-H, and the EKT6520-SD.
• Standard Telephones: 500- and 2500-type
standard telephones apply whenever standard
telephones are mentioned in this manual.

CAUTION!
When installing the station cable, do not
run parallel to and within three feet of an
AC power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs
near devices that generate electrical noise,
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
2.10 Connecting Digital Telephones to the
System
2.11 The following provides information on how to
connect digital telephones to the DK8 or DK16
system.

NOTE:
Before proceeding, see warning and caution
notes in Paragraph 2.01.
2.12 Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the main distribution frame (MDF)
with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable.
Single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for
digital telephones to operate effectively at up to
1000 feet from the key service unit, if using 24
AWG cable. But digital telephones that are
equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units or
ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to
function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital telephones that are supported by
systems that must operate with battery reserve
power—see Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816208, for loop limits (see Table 8-D).

2 TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
2.00 General
2.01 This section describes the wiring required to
connect telephones to the system. Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes:

6-1

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
To accommodate the digital telephone line cord,
the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ-11) at the station location.
The standard single-pair, modular digital telephone
cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 feet (the
maximum allowed is 25 feet).

The overall length of the station cable run from the
DK16 key service unit (KSU) to the telephone must
not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters), if using 24
AWG cable.
2.30 Connecting Standard Telephones to the
System

NOTES:
1. Digital telephone cable runs must not
have the following:
• Cable splits (single or double)
• Cable bridges (of any length)
• High resistance or faulty cable splices
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary
protector information.

2.31 The following provides information on how to
connect standard telephones to the DK8 or DK16
system.

NOTE:
Before proceeding, see warning and caution
notes in Paragraph 2.01.

2.20 Connecting Electronic Telephones to
the System (DK16 only)

2.32 Standard telephones connect to standard
telephone circuits in the DK8 Standard Telephone
Interface Unit (QSTU), telephone circuits on the
DK16 Base Unit Standard Telephone Interface
Unit (KSTU), the DK16 Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PSTU), and the DK16 Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) via the
main distribution frame (MDF) with standard
twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Single-pair
wiring is required. (Refer to Wiring Diagrams,
Section 100-816-208, for more details.)

2.21 The following provides information on how to
connect electronic telephones to the DK16 system.

NOTE:
Before proceeding, see warning and caution
notes in Paragraph 2.01.
2.22 Electronic telephones are connected to electronic telephone circuits in the DK16 Expansion
Unit on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit
(PEKU) and the Standard/Electronic Telephone
Interface Unit (PESU) via the main distribution
frame (MDF) with standard twisted-pair jacketed
telephone cable. Two-pair wiring, as a minimum, is
required for telephone connection. However, threepair wiring is recommended to permit future upgrades, such as Off-hook Call Announce.

NOTE:
See Section 100-816-208 for secondary protector information.
The standard telephone cable's overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms
maximum, including the telephone resistance. This
also applies to all devices connected to standard
telephone circuits. A standard telephone connected
off-premises via the telephone network should
interface with OL13A lines (or equivalent) and
connect to an RJ21X FIC jack (or equivalent).

To accommodate the electronic telephone line
cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular
station connector block (RJ-11) at the station location. The standard two-pair modular electronic
telephone cord length is seven feet (the maximum
allowed length is 25 feet). See Wiring diagrams,
Section 100-816-208 for more details.

2.40 Telephone Wall Mounting
2.41 This section provides instructions on how to
mount digital telephones and electronic telephones
(DK16 only) to a wall or other vertical surface.
Instructions on mounting standard telephones are
not provided here; refer to the manufacturer's
documentation for those instructions.

NOTE:
See Section 100-816-208 for secondary protector information.

6-2

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

HANDSET
HANGER

2.42 Mount digital and electronic telephones in
accordance with the following steps:

PLASTIC
TAB

NOTES:
1. Digital telephones equipped with Integrated Data Interface Units (PDIU-DIs or
PDIU-DI2s) cannot be wall mounted.
2. Electronic and older digital telephones
equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall
mounted. 2000-series Digital Telephones
with headsets can only be wall mounted
with an HHEU2.
1) Loosen the captive screws, and remove the
telephone base (Figure 6-1).
2) Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset
hanger from the base (Figure 6-1). Insert the
handset hanger in the slot provided on the
front of the telephone (Figure 6-2). The hanger
fits in the notch on the handset cradle.

FIGURE 6-1
REMOVING THE TELEPHONE BASE

3) Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and
secure it to the telephone with its four captive
screws (Figure 6-3).

HANDSET
HANGER

FIGURE 6-2
HANDSET HANGER

FIGURE 6-3
WALL MOUNTING BASE ROTATION

6-3

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
4) Connect the telephone to the wall modular
connector with a cord approximately four
inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base.

with a PDIU-DI2 can support an HHEU at
the same time, but cannot support a
DVSU. A 1000-series Digital Telephone
equipped with a PDIU-DI cannot support
an HHEU, ADM, or a DVSU for OCA.
2. PDKU1 circuits 1 ~ 7 only can support
PDIU-DI(2)s, but all PDKU2 and base unit
digital circuits, can support PDIU-DI(2)s.

5) Mount the telephone on the wall mounting
modular connector plate.

3 DIGITAL TELEPHONE UPGRADES

3.13 PDIU-DI(2) Installation. Install the integrated
data interface unit (PDIU-DI for 1000-series and
PDIU-DI2 for 2000-series) in accordance with the
following steps:

3.00 This section describes how to upgrade and
configure 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones for features and options.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
digital telephone base and remove it (Figure
6-1).

3.10 Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrade
(PDIU-DI2 and PDIU-DI)
3.11 Both the 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones can be upgraded with an integrated data
interface unit to transmit and receive simultaneous
voice and data calls. There are two versions of the
integrated unit: the PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DI2.
The 2000-series telephones can only be equipped
with a PDIU-DI2, and the 1000-series telephones
can only be equipped with a PDIU-DI. Asynchronous devices, such as personal computers (PC)
and terminals, can be connected to the standard
RS-232 connector of the PDIU-DI(2). Station users are able to transmit and receive RS-232 data
over the single wire pair of the PDIU-DI(2)-equipped
telephone.

2) Refer to Figure 6-4 for 2000-series telephones
or Figure 6-5 for 1000-series telephones, and
insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into
the connectors on the printed circuit board
(PCB) in the telephone (observing the red
wire for correct positioning).
3) Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the
telephone and secure with the four captive
screws.
4) Remove the telephone number directory tray
from the original telephone base and install it
on the integrated unit telephone base. Bend
the tray by squeezing its sides so it bows
slightly to remove and re-install (Figure 6-4 or
6-5).

3.12 Data calls can be manually dialed with a
Data Call button and disconnected with a Data
Release button on the telephone; or, data and
voice calls can be dialed from the keyboard of the
terminal or PC using standard "AT" commands.
Digital telephones may also be assigned a Modem button to reserve a modem or monitor modem availability and status. Assign feature buttons
to telephones with Program 39.

5) Check Table 8-D in Section 100-816-208;
install 2-pair house cable (or external power)
and 2-pair modular cord (supplied with PDIUDI) if required to achieve maximum distance.
3.14 Integrated Data Interface Unit Programming Overview
Program 39
• Assigns the Data Call, Data Release, and
Modem buttons.
Programs 20 and 22
• Used for data interface unit assignments.

NOTES:
1. 1000- and 2000-series Digital Telephones
equipped with a PDIU-DI(2) cannot be
wall-mounted or equipped with an AddOn-Module (ADM), or DVSU for OCA. A
2000-series digital telephone equipped

6-4

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
RS-232 (FEMALE)
DB-25 CONNECTOR

DIU & VSU
DIU & ADM

TO P1 OF
BOTTOM PCB

RED
WIRE

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
TOP ASSEMBLY

TO P2 OF
BOTTOM PCB

PDIU-DI2 2000
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE BASE

FIGURE 6-4
PDIU-DI2 INSTALLATION INTO 2000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE

-2

RS-232 (FEMALE)
DB-25 CONNECTOR

HHEU

DVSU

PDIU

TO P1 OF
BOTTOM PCB

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
TOP ASSEMBLY

PERCEPTION
STRAP (ONLY CUT
IF INSTALLED ON
PERCEPTION)

PDIU/
DVSU

RED
WIRE

TO P2 OF
BOTTOM PCB

RED
WIRE

PDIU-DI PCB

IMPORTANT: DO NOT CONNECT
DIU CABLES TO HHEU CONNECTOR

DIRECTORY TRAY
NOTE:
A 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE
CANNOT SUPPORT AN HHEU AND A
PDIU-DI AT THE SAME TIME.

PDIU-DI 1000 DIGITAL
TELEPHONE BASE

FIGURE 6-5
PDIU-DI INSTALLATION INTO 1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE

6-5

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
3.20 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade
(DVSU)

RED
WIRE

3.21 To receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
calls, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a
DVSU; the telephone making the call does not
require a DVSU. An additional wire pair is not
required for digital telephones that receive OCA
calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000series and 1000-series Digital Telephones.

RED WIRE

NOTE:
Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a
DVSU and integrated data interface unit
(PDIU-DI or PDIU-DI2) at the same time.
3.22 DVSU Upgrade Installation. Install the
DVSU upgrade in accordance with the following
steps.

FIGURE 6-6
DVSU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL
TELEPHONES

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1) and remove the
base.

3.30 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade
(HHEU)

2) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
metal plate to the standoffs inside the base
where the DVSU will be installed (Figure 6-6).
Remove the plate, which can be discarded.

3.31 The loud ringing bell/headset upgrade (HHEU)
enables an external speaker (HESB) for the Loud
Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be connected to both series of digital telephones.

3) Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs
(Figure 6-6), and secure with the four provided screws.

NOTES:
1. There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1
(which has four versions, V.1 ~ V.4) and
the HHEU2.
2. Both 2000- and 1000-series Digital Telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3
or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient
for headset operation only.
3. Only digital telephones equipped with an
HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2
is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that
the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting.
4. A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to
connect the HHEU in a digital telephone
to the HESB.
5. 1000-series digital telephones cannot be
equipped with the HHEU (any type or

4A) If installing the DVSU into a 2000-series digital
telephone, refer to Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H)
or Figure 6-8 (DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S,
DKT2020-SD), and then connect the DVSU
wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the
printed circuit board (PCB) inside the
telephone.
4B) If installing the DVSU into a 1000-series digital telephone, refer to Figure 6-9, and connect
the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors
on the PCBs inside the telephone.
5) Reinstall the telephone base and secure it
with its four captive screws.

6-6

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

W101
W102

DIU&ADM
P1

DIU&ADM
P1
RED

EX.SP

W204

RED

W204

HHEU
P3

REDP6

HHEU
W203

HHEU
P3

W203

BEEP

DVSU DIU&DVSU
RED P2

CARBON
W201
W202

RED

HHEU

DVSU DIU&DVSU
P6
P2

CARBON
W201
W202

RED

W409

HS-BOV

BEEP

W101
W102

EX.POW

EX.SP

FIGURE 6-8
DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, AND DKT2020-SD
STRAP AND CONNECTOR LOCATIONS

FIGURE 6-7
DKT2010-H STRAP AND CONNECTOR
LOCATIONS

HHEU

EX: POWER
W101/W102-1020H
BEEP
W301-1020H
W304-1020SD

DKT1020H

DKT1020SD
W303
W302
CARBON

W202
HHEU

W201

W203
CARBON

W301
CARBON

0
T1

K
D

EX: POWER
W101/W102-1020SD

1O
-2

U
-S

D
0K

(S
B

DVSU

N
H

H
S

1020SD ROOM
NOISE SWITCH

HHEU
RED
WIRE

DVSU
RED
WIRE

EX.SP STRAP
W204-1020H
W305-1020SD

HHEU
RED
WIRE

FIGURE 6-9
1000-SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE STRAP AND CONNECTION LOCATIONS

6-7

DVSU

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

version) and the integrated data interface
unit (PDIU-DI) at the same time, but 2000series digital telephones can support an
HHEU and a PDIU-DI2 at the same time.

4) Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the
HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the
HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell
option is required (Figure 6-11). Refer to
Section 100-816-207 for HESB installation
procedures.

3.32 HHEU Upgrade Installation (HHEU) Install
the Loud Ringing Bell/headset upgrade (HHEU) in
accordance with the following steps.

5A) For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is
connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the
R607 resistor (Figure 6-10), then remove the
resistor to eliminate electrical contact.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.
2) Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool,
remove the plastic tab located on the back of
the base (Figure 6-1); the HHEU modular
connector for the headset will be accessed
through this opening.

NOTE:
Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing
Bell—even if a headset is also installed on the
HHEU.

3) If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601
switch on the HHEU to HEADSET for the
headset or loud bell application (Figure 6-10).
V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this
switch, because both of these upgrades are
automatically set for the headset/loud bell
application.

5B) For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: If only
the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut
the OCA strap (Figure 6-10).

NOTE:
Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing
FEED THROUGH
FOR HESC-65(A) CABLE

COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU
R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)

TO HESB
BLOCK

SW601
(HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)
OCA (HHEU1
V.4 or HHEU2)
P601

SW601

HHEU

HESC-65 CABLE
OR
HESC-65A CABLE
HHEU

FIGURE 6-10
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE

FIGURE 6-11
HESC-65A CABLING

6-8

P601

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

Bell—even if a headset is also installed on the
HHEU.

11) To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud
Ringing Bell: Call the telephone connected to
the HESB, and adjust the volume control on
the back of the HESB and the ring volume
control on the telephone.

6) Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs
inside the base (Figure 6-10), and secure with
the two provided screws.

3.40 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps

7A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),
and connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB
to the HHEU connector on the printed circuit
board (PCB) on the telephone.

3.41 If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the
telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone
must be cut. Cut the straps in accordance with the
following steps:

NOTE:
It is not necessary to cut these straps if the
headset is connected to the HHEU.

7B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-9, and connect the wire plug of the
HHEU to the HHEU connector on the PCB of
the telephone.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

8A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),
and locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the
telephone. Cut the strap if an HESB will be
connected to the HHEU.

2A) For 2000-series digital telephones refer to
Figure 6-7 or 6-8, and cut the CARBON
straps, W201 and W202.
2B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-9, and cut the CARBON straps,
(W301 and W302 on the DKT1020-SD; W201
and W203 on the DKT1020-H).

8B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-9, and locate the EX.SP strap on the
upper PCB in the telephone, and cut it if an
HHEU will be connected to an HESB for the
Loud Ringing Bell option.

3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

9A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-7 (DKT2010-H) or Figure 6-8
(DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, DKT2020-SD),
and locate the HHEU strap on the PCB in the
telephone. Cut the strap if a headset will be
connected to the HHEU.

3.50 Beep Strap
3.51 A "beep" sounds whenever a dialpad button
or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone.
To eliminate this beep follow the procedure below:
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

9B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-9, and locate the HHEU strap on the
upper PCB in the telephone. Cut the strap if
an HHEU will be connected to a headset.

2A) For 2000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figures 6-7 or 6-8, and cut the BEEP strap.

NOTE:
If the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for
proper telephone operation.

2B) For 1000-series digital telephones, refer to
Figure 6-9, and cut the BEEP strap.

10) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

6-9

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
set, in addition to the speaker, with 2000-series
digital telephones. The tones only sound over the
speaker with 1000-series Digital Telephones. Perform the following procedure to have these tones
sent over the handset of the DKT2010-H model:
(For the DKT2010-SD, the DKT2020-S, and the
DKT2020-SD models, see the Note following the
procedure.)

3.60 Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only)
3.61 High ambient noise levels may cause the
speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone
models to cut off frequently. To prevent this for the
1000-series digital telephone models, perform the
following procedure to make the telephones less
sensitive to the noise: (The 2000-series Telephones are adjusted per the instructions in the
Note after the procedure.)

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
1000-series Digital Telephone speakerphone
base (Figure 6-1), and remove the base.

2) Refer to Figure 6-7, and install a strap in the
HS-BOV W409 location.
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

2) For the 1000-series speakerphone model
(DKT1020-SD), refer to Figure 6-9, and locate the ROOM NOISE switch. Push the
switch carefully to the H (high) position (for
low sensitivity) when there is high background
noise in the area surrounding the telephone.

NOTES:
1. To enable Busy Override tone and Campon Ring tones over the handset or headset of a DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-SD,
DKT2020-S model, hold down the Redial button and press the up Vol button.
To block the tone, hold down the Redial
button and press the down Vol button.
2. For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the OCA strap or R607 is
cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU
strap is cut on the telephone (see Paragraph 3.32).

3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

NOTES:
1. To make the 2000-series Digital Telephone speakerphone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise, hold down
Mic button, then press the up Vol button. The less-sensitive level will be set
after the third flash of the Mic LED. To
reset the sensitivity back to the normal
level, hold down the Mic button, then
press the down Vol button. The normal
level will be set after the third flash of the
Mic LED.
2. On 2000-series Digital Telephone speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the Mic LED will flash at the in-use
rate when using the speakerphone. When
set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED will
be on steady when using the speakerphone.

3.80 External Power Straps
3.81 Digital telephones equipped with options
such as Integrated Data Interface Units and ADMs
require two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance
from the key service unit (KSU). Two-pair wiring or
external power is also necessary for maximum
cable run lengths for digital telephones that are
connected to systems that must operate with reserve power. (See Table 8-D in Section 100-816208 for reference.)

3.70 Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone
Over Handset/Headset Option

Each Digital telephone has two external power
straps which must be cut for external power when
the cabling of the telephone is connected to an
external AC/DC power supply. Cut these straps in
accordance with the following procedure:

3.71 The Busy Override and Camp-on Ring tones
can be sent over the telephone handset or head-

6-10

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

TO HVSU
CONNECTOR (P2)
ON MAIN PCB
INSIDE
TELEPHONE

2) Depending on the telephone, refer to Figure
6-7, 6-8, or 6-9 and locate the EX.POW
straps, W101 and W102. Cut these straps.

HVSU2

3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

NOTE:
Refer to Section 100-816-208 for external
AC/DC power supply ordering information
and installation instructions.
3.90 DKT2000 Add-On-Module Installation
3.91 See Paragraph 7 in this chapter.

4 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
UPGRADE OPTIONS (DK16 Only)

FIGURE 6-12
HVSU2 INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONES

4.00 This section describes how to upgrade and
configure electronic telephones for features and
options.

3) Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2
connector on the printed circuit board (PCB)
in the telephone (Figure 6-13).

4.10 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade
(HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI)

4.13 HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation. Install the HVSU/HVSI subassemblies in accordance with the following steps:

4.11 Electronic telephones must be equipped with
either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined
HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Offhook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These telephones also require three-pair wiring to receive
OCA, instead of the standard two-pair. Telephones
making OCA calls do not require an upgrade or
extra wire pair.

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.
2) Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subassembly with the receptacle on the HVSU
subassembly (Figure 6-14). Apply firm, even
pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the
connectors mate properly (they should click).

4.12 HVSU2 Upgrade Installation. Install the
HVSU2 in accordance with the following steps:
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

NOTE:
Exercise care when assembling the HVSU to
the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector
pins; also, verify that the HVSU is aligned with
the silk-screened image on the HVSI.

2) Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside
the base, and secure with the two provided
screws (Figure 6-12).

6-11

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
R-UP (6510-H,
6510-S, 6520-S)
ROOM NOISE

TO P2 HVSU
CONNECTOR
ON MAIN PCB
INSIDE
TELEPHONE

TO HHEU
CONNECTOR
P1

P5
HSVI
HVSU

RED

HI
P2

BEEP
STRAP

CARBON

RED

R-UP
(6520-SD)

RED
WIRE

TO HVSU
CONNECTOR, P2
CARBON STRAPS
W201
W202
HHEU STRAP
W203

FIGURE 6-13
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE PCB CONNECTIONS

FIGURE 6-14
HVSI/HVSU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONES

3) Position the HVSU/HVSI subassembly on the
standoffs inside the base, and secure with the
two screws provided (Figure 6-14).

2. Only electronic telephones equipped with
an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The
HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1,
except that the HHEU2 has longer wires
to accommodate wall mounting.
3. A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable
is required to connect the HHEU in an
electronic telephone to the HESB. Refer
to Section 100-816-207 for HESB installation procedures.
4. All HHEU versions and types, except for
V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Offhook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2
and HVSU/HVSI).

4) Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly wire
plug to the P2 connector on the electronic
telephone PCB (Figure 6-13).
5) Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and
secure it with its four captive screws.
4.20 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade
(HHEU)
4.21 The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade
(HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) and/
or a headset to be connected to the electronic
telephone. The HESB serves as a Loud Ringing
Bell when connected to a telephone.

4.22 HHEU Upgrade Installation. Install the HHEU
upgrade in accordance with the following steps:
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

NOTES:
1. There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1
(which has four versions, V.1 ~ V.4) and
the HHEU2.

2) Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool,
remove the plastic tab located on the back of

6-12

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing
Bell—even if a headset is also installed on the
HHEU.

the base (Figure 6-1). The HHEU modular
connector for the headset will be accessed
through this opening.
3) If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the
SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for
HESB and/or headset connection (Figure 615). This switch is not on either the V.4
HHEU1 or the HHEU2, because the operation is automatic with these subassemblies.

5B) For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: If only the
headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the
OCA strap (Figure 6-15).

NOTE:
Do not cut the OCA strap if connecting an
HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing
Bell—even if a headset is also installed on the
HHEU.

4) Connect the HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable
(either one) to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud
Ringing Bell option is required (Figure 6-11).
Refer to Section 100-816-207 for HESB installation procedures.

6) Position the HHEU subassembly on the standoffs inside the base (Figure 6-15), and secure
with the two provided screws.

5A) For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: If only the
headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both
sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU
(Figure 6-15) and then remove the resistor to
eliminate electrical contact.

7) Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to
the P1 connector on the electronic telephone
PCB (Figure 6-13).
8) Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB
(Figure 6-13).

COMPONENT SIDE OF HHEU

NOTE:
The HHEU strap must be replaced if the
HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone.

R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3)
TO P1, HHEU
CONNECTOR
OF
TELEPHONE
PCB

SW601
(HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3)

9) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

OCA (HHEU1
V.4 or HHEU2)
P601

10) To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud
Ringing Bell: Call the telephone connected to
the HESB, and adjust the volume control on
the back of the HESB and the ring volume
control on the telephone.

HHEU

4.30 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps
4.31 If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500series electronic telephone, two straps inside the
telephone must be cut. Cut the straps in accordance with the following steps:

FIGURE 6-15
HHEU INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONES

NOTE:
It is not necessary to cut these straps if the
headset is connected to the HHEU.

6-13

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
telephone base (Figure 6-1), and remove the
base.

4.60 Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap
(Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only)
4.61 For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic
telephones only, the handset receiver volume can
be increased six decibels (db) by cutting a strap
inside of the telephone. Cut the strap in accordance with the following steps:

2) Refer to Figure 6-13, and locate the CARBON straps, W201 and W202. Cut both
straps.
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it
with its four captive screws.

1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
telephone base to the telephone, and remove
the base (Figure 6-1).

4.40 Beep Strap
4.41 A "beep" sounds whenever a dialpad button
or feature button is pressed on an electronic
telephone. This beep can be eliminated with the
following procedure:

2) Locate the R-UP strap on the printed circuit
board (PCB) inside the telephone, and cut it
(Figure 6-13).
3) Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in
place using the four captive screws.

1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
telephone base to the telephone (Figure 6-1),
and remove the base.

5 DIRECT STATION SELECTION
CONSOLE/SYSTEM CONNECTION
(DK16 Only)

2) Locate and cut the BEEP strap on the telephone printed circuit board (PCB) (Figure 613).

5.01 STRATA DK16 systems configured with just
a Base Unit can support one Direct Station Selection Console, and systems with the optional Expansion Unit can support two consoles. There are
two types of consoles: the DDSS console and the
HDSS console. The DDSS console can be connected to designated digital telephone circuits,
and the HDSS console can only be connected to
designated PEKU circuits. This section provides
instructions on how to install both types of consoles.

3) Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and
secure in place using the four captive screws.
4.50 Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only)
4.51 High ambient noise levels may cause the
speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone
models (the EKT6510-S, the EKT6520-S, and the
EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently. To make these
telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent
the cut-off, follow the steps below:

5.10 DDSS Console Connections
5.11 The DDSS console, which can operate with a
digital or electronic telephone (preferably an LCD
model), can connect only to Circuit 8 of the Base
Unit digital telephone circuit set or Circuit 8 of the
PDKU. Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair
jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet,
303 meters) is used for the connection. To accommodate the DDSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be terminated in a
modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to
Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for wiring/
interconnecting details, including cable length limitations (see Table 8-D).

1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
base to the telephone, and remove the base
(Figure 6-1).
2) Locate the ROOM NOISE switch on the
printed circuit board (PCB) inside the telephone, and push it carefully to the HI (high)
position (Figure 6-13).
3) Reinstall the telephone base and secure in
place using the four captive screws.

6-14

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
1. DDSS console cable runs must not have
the following:
• Cable splits (single or double)
• Cable bridges (of any length)
• High resistance or faulty cable splices
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary
protection information.

HDSS console cable should be terminated in a
modular station connector block (RJ-11). Refer to
Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for wiring/
interconnecting details. The overall length of the
cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the
HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet (152
meters), if using 24 AWG cable. The HDSS console can operate with either an electronic or digital
telephone (preferably an LCD model).

CAUTION!
When installing the DDSS cable, do not
run parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC
power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs
near devices that generate electrical noise,
such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.

CAUTION!
When installing the HDSS console cable,
do not run parallel to and within 3 feet of an
AC power line. AC power lines should be
crossed at right (90°) angles only. Avoid
running HDSS console wire pairs near
devices that generate electrical noise, such
as neon or fluorescent light fixtures.
5.22 HDSS Console Configuration. The following considerations should be made when installing
an HDSS console:
• A PEKU PCB is required in the expansion unit
for an HDSS console. (The DSS switch on the
PEKU must be set to DSS.)
• Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS
console (always Circuits 7 and 8).
• The PESU does not support the HDSS console.
• A system must be configured with the Expansion Unit to support an HDSS console. Only one
HDSS console can be installed in a system.

5.12 DDSS Console Configuration. The following considerations should be made when installing
DDSS consoles:
• DDSS consoles can connect only to Circuit 8 of
the Base Unit digital telephone circuit set or
Circuit 8 of the PDKU.
• A maximum of two DDSS consoles can be
installed per system equipped with an Expansion Unit.
• DDSS consoles can operate with an attendant
electronic telephone, as well as with a digital
one.
• A KCDU will not support a DDSS.

5.23 HDSS Programming Overview
Program 03
• Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports
a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console.
Program 28
• Assigns HDSS console to a telephone.
Program 29
• Assigns individual button functions for the
HDSS console.

5.13 DDSS Programming Overview
Program 03
• Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS
consoles.
Program 28
• Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones.
Program 29
• Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles.

6 DOOR PHONE/LOCK CONTROL UNIT
AND DOOR PHONE INSTALLATION

5.20 HDSS Console Connections
5.21 The HDSS console must be connected to the
data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU in the
Expansion Unit (via the MDF) with standard twopair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accommodate the connection, the instrument end of the

6.01 This section provides installation instructions
for the digital door phone/lock control units (DDCB).
It also includes installation instructions for the door
phone (MDFB). Each DDCB can support as many
as three door phones (MDFBs), or two MDFBs and
one door lock.

6-15

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993

EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS
(DDCB ONLY)

NOTE:
DK8 and DK16 do not support the HDCB.
6.02 DK8 and DK16 systems can be equipped with
up to six MDFBs.
6.03 For DK8, DDCBs can only connect to Circuit
3 (Port 02) and Circuit 4 (Port 03).
6.04 For DK16, DDCBs can only connect to Ports
04 and 12. DDCBs can only connect to Circuit 5
(Port 04) of the Base Unit and/or Circuit 1 (Port 12)
of a PDKU or KCDU in the Expansion Unit.

NOTE:
DDCBs cannot connect to the QSTU, KSTU,
PSTU, PESU or PEKU.

DO
PH OR
ON
E

MOUNTING
SCREWS (4)

NOTE
See Table 8-D regarding external power requirements.

6.10 DDCB and MDFB Cabling
6.11 Refer to Section 100-816-208 for DDCB and
MDFB wiring/interconnecting details. For door lock
control installation procedures, refer to Section
100-816-208. The length of the cable run from the
key service unit (KSU) to the MDFB (via the DDCB)
must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters), if using
24 AWG cable (see Table 8-D).

FIGURE 6-16
DOOR PHONE (DDCB) INSTALLATION
4) Secure the DDCB to the mounting surface
with four one-inch panhead wood screws.
6.30 Door Phone (MDFB) Wall Mounting

NOTES:
1. DDCB cable runs must not have the following:
• Cable splits (single or double)
• Cable bridges (of any length)
• High resistance or faulty cable splices
2. See Section 100-816-208 for secondary
protector information.

6.31 Mount door phones (MDFBs) to a wall or
vertical surface in accordance with the following
steps:
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the
cover. Detach the cover from the base and
metal frame (Figure 6-17).
2) Position the metal frame and base to the
mounting surface and secure with two oneinch panhead wood screws (Figure 6-17).

6.20 DDCB Wall Mounting
6.21 The DDCB is designed to be mounted on a
wall or other vertical surface. Mount the units in
accordance with the following steps:

3) Attach cover to the metal frame and base and
secure with the screw which was removed in
Step 1.

1) Locate the two mounting holes on the righthand side on the DDCB (Figure 6-16).

6.32 Door Phone Volume Control. Adjust the
ring and voice volume to the MDFB in accordance
with the following procedure:
1) Remove the screw from the bottom of the
MDFB cover. Detach the cover from the base
and metal frame (Figure 6-17).

2) Remove the side cover from the DDCB to
expose the two left-hand mounting holes (Figure 6-16).
3) Position the DDCB adjacent to the key service unit (KSU) with regard to wiring needs.

6-16

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
Program 79
• Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assignments.

BASE

METAL
FRAME

7 ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION
7.01 Install the Add-on Module (DADM 2020) to a
2000-series Digital Telephone (only) according to
the steps that follow:

3.25
INCHES

1) Loosen the four captive screws securing the
2000-series Digital Telephone base (Figure
6-1) and remove the base.
TWO WALL
MOUNTING
HOLES

2) Remove the base handset hanger (Figure
6-1).
3) Loosen two captive screws securing ADM
base and remove base.

DOOR PHONE

4) Put on ADM cable (supplied with ADM) through
telephone base and ADM base as shown in
Figure 6-18.

FIGURE 6-17
DOOR PHONE (MDFB) INSTALLATION
2) The volume level is changed by a screw
adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn
the screw with a flat-tipped screwdriver while
ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it. The
volume level will change as the screw is
turned.

5) Connect ADM cable connectors to P1 of ADM
and P1 of DKT2000 telephone as shown in
Figure 6-18.
6) Install base of ADM and telephone – tuck
ADM cable into ADM and telephone base as
necessary for proper length.

6.40 Door Phone/Lock Programming Considerations

7) Secure ADM to telephone base with ADM
connecting Plate (using four screws).

6.41 The following programs should be considered when programming the system for door
phones:
Program 39
• Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to
digital telephones.
Program 77-1
• Assigns DDCBs to ports, door phone ringing
over External Page during the NIGHT mode,
and door lock activation time.
Program 77-2
• Used to busy out unused MDFB positions and to
identify which DDCBs support the door lock
option, and to set the door phone to ring one or
five times.

8) Check Table 8-D in Section 100-816-208;
install 2-pair house cable (or external power)
and 2-pair modular cord (supplied with ADM)
if required to achieve maximum distance.
7.11 ADM Programming. ADMs do not require
programming. The ADM provides 20 DSS buttons
only (Figure 6-19) for the STRATA DK16, and 10
DSS buttons, 8 speed dial buttons, one night
transfer button, and one all call page button (Figure 6-20) for the STRATA DK8. One ADM can be
installed on any (or all) 2000-series telephone (16
max on DK16 or 8 max on DK8).

6-17

INSTALLATION-STATION APPARATUS
SECTION 100-816-206
MARCH 1993
4-SCREWS
ADM CONNECTION
PLATE (PROVIDED
WITH ADM)
ADM BASE

REMOVE HANDSET
HANGER (SEE
PARAGRAPH 2.42,
STEP 2)

ADM CABLE
(SUPPLIED WITH ADM)

TELEPHONE
BASE
BLACK WIRE TO PIN 1 (SMALLER CONNECTOR)
P1
NOT USED
ON DK16

DADM2020

1
P2

2000-SERIES DKT

BLACK WIRE TO PIN 1

(LARGER CONNECTOR)
DIU & ADM
P1 OF BOTTOM PCB

2000-SERIES
DIGITAL TELEPHONE

VIEW OF BOTTOM

FIGURE 6-18
ADD-ON MODULE INSTALLATION

Night
Transfer
All Call
Page

SD 17

SD 16

SD 15

SD 14

SD 13

SD 12

SD 11

SD 10

Note: The button assignments for DSS (10-19),
Speed Dial (SD10 ~ 17), All Call Page, and
Night Transfer button assignments are fixed
and cannot be changed.

Note: This DSS button
assignment is fixed and
cannot be changed.

FIGURE 6-20
DK8 ADD-ON MODULE DSS BUTTON
ASSIGNMENTS

FIGURE 6-19
DK16 ADD-ON MODULE DSS BUTTON
ASSIGNMENTS
6-18

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER SEVEN
PERIPHERAL INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
3
3.00
3.10
3.20
3.30
4
4.10
4.20
5
5.00
5.10
6
6.10
6.20
7
7.00
7.10
7.20
8
9
10
10.00
10.10
10.20
10.30
10.40
10.50
10.60
10.70
10.80
11
11.00

SUBJECT
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND MUSIC OPTIONS ..........................................
DK8 and DK16 Music-on-Hold (MOH) Option .....................................................
Background Music (BGM) Options .....................................................................
RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS ................................................................................
General ...............................................................................................................
DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit Relay ................................................................
DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS Relays .................................................
DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay Options with
PIOU or PIOUS ..................................................................................................
EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT (HESB) OPTIONS ....................................................
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................
HESB Option Installation ....................................................................................
EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS ................................................................................
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................
External Page Option Installation .......................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)
PRINTER/CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS ..............................................
SMDR Hardware Requirements .........................................................................
SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation ..............................................
VOICE MAIL OPTIONS ..........................................................................................
System Hardware Requirements........................................................................
Toshiba VP Voice Messaging System................................................................
Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems ...........................................
DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION ..............................................................
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE ......................................
DATA INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................
General ...............................................................................................................
Common DIU Connections .................................................................................
EIA Interface Leads (Signals) .............................................................................
DIP Switch Options .............................................................................................
PDIU-DI to Personal Computer (PC) Installation ................................................
PDIU-DS to Printer Installation ...........................................................................
PDIU-DS to Modem Installation..........................................................................
PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Installation Tests ..................................................................
DK16 TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE ............................
General ...............................................................................................................

PAGE
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-7
7-7
7-9
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-23
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-30
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-40
7-51
7-56
7-56

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5

TITLE
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC-ON-HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM .....................................................................................
DK16 BGM SOURCE/STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION
DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION A .....................................
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION B .....................................
DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C ......................................................

7-i

PAGE
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-39

TITLE
DK16 PIOU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM ....................
DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM ..................
DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (PIOU/PIOUS) .....................................
DK8 AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (DDCB) ...............................
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING
BELL WIRING ......................................................................................................
DK16 HESB/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING
BELL WIRING ......................................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING ......................................
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING ..................
HESB WALL MOUNTING ....................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PAGE AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER ........
DK16 PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NIGHT RING (SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS) ........
DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS ...................................................
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES ..........................
DK8 AND DK16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES ................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS ...........................
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR PORT (PROGRAM 97) DATA DUMP EXAMPLE ................
DK8 AND DK16 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............
DK16 ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM .........................................................
DK8 OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM .................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ..................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER,
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ..................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER,
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ..................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM,
RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS ..................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45 ADAPTER
CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS
AND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS ..........................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS/RS-232
CONNECTOR INFORMATION ............................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION .............
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM ....................
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS ......................
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING ........
DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL
USING AT COMMANDS ......................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL
USING AT COMMANDS ......................................................................................
DK8 AND DK16 PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST ..........................................
DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE AND/OR AMPLIFIED DISA
FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................................

7-ii

PAGE
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-14
7-15
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-26
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-33
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-56
7-57

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
• Relay Contact Specifications
§ Voltage: 24VDC maximum
§ Current: 1 ampere maximum

1 GENERAL
1.00 This chapter provides procedures necessary
to connect optional peripheral equipment to the
STRATA DK8 or DK16. The installation instructions for each peripheral option include hardware
requirements, printed circuit board (PCB) configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and
programming considerations, as applicable.

IMPORTANT NOTICE!
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a
license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and
Publishers (ASCAP), or other similar organization, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature
of this telecommunications system.
Toshiba America Information Systems,
Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising
out of the failure to obtain such a license.

1.01 Peripheral equipment is connected to the
Base Unit itself and PCBs located in the Base Unit
and Expansion Unit on the DK16. On the DK8,
peripheral equipment connects to the KSU. Refer
to Section 100-816-204 for Key Service Unit installation instructions, PCB installation instructions,
and PCB configuration information for the DK8.
Refer to Section 100-816-205 for Base Unit and
Expansion Unit installation instructions, PCB installation instructions, and PCB configuration information for the DK16.

2.12 Music-on-Hold Installation. Install the Music-on-Hold option in accordance with the following
steps (refer to Figure 7-1):
1) Connect the external music source to the
MOH RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16
Base Unit.

1.02 Wiring diagrams for each peripheral are located in this chapter.

2) Rotate the MOH volume control (VR1) on the
Base Unit to adjust Music-on-Hold volume:
clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise decreases volume. Listen to the CO line
on-hold when setting MOH to the proper volume.

2 MUSIC-ON-HOLD/BACKGROUND
MUSIC OPTIONS
2.00 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems provides a
Music-on-Hold option for CO lines and digital, electronic (DK16 only) and standard telephones connected to the system. A variety of Background
Music options are also provided (refer to Figure
7-1).

3A) If MOH relay control is required in DK8, the
MOH relay is selected in Program 77-1. Follow program instructions to make selection.
This will short pins 42 and 17 of the DK8 KSU
or DK16 Base Unit amphenol connector when
MOH is activated by a CO line on hold.

2.10 DK8 and DK16 Music-on-Hold (MOH)
Option
2.11 An external music source—such as a tape
player or tuner—can be connected to the RCA jack
(labeled MOH) on the STRATA DK8 or DK16. The
MOH source can be controlled (on/off) by a relay
option set in Program 77-1. The DK8 KSU and
DK16 Base Unit relay can control the MOH source,
or the DK16 night bell. The MOH source and MOH
relay contact specifications are:
• MOH Source Specifications
§ Input Impedance: 600 ohms
§ Input Voltage (recommended levels)
Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

3B) If MOH relay control is required in DK16, the
Base Unit or the PIOU/PIOUS relay may be
selected in Program 77-1. Follow Program
instruction to make the selection.
4A) Set PIOU jumper plug P11 to MAKE or BREAK
position as required:
• MAKE (M)—Shorts the normally open
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is
activated.
• BREAK (B)—Opens the normally closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is
activated.

7-1

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG.

MUSICON-HOLD
SOURCE *

ON/OFF
CONTROL
(24 VOLT
MAX)

VR1
MOH/BGM
VOLUME CONTROL

MUSIC

BACKPLANE
MOH TO:
CO LINES
AND
STATIONS
ON-HOLD

MUSICON-HOLD

MAX.

MOH
RCA
JACK

PAGE OR
BACKGROUND
MUSIC
PAGE/BGM
CONTROL

AMPHENOL
PIN NO. (4)
(17)
DK8 OR
DK16
RELAY
PROG:
77-1
(NOTE)

MOH CONTROL-CHOOSE BASE UNIT
OR PIOU/PIOUS RELAY:

*MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:
• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω
• INPUT VOLTAGE:
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm)
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

OPTIONAL
EXTERNAL PAGE/
BGM OUTPUTS

600 OHM
PAGE
RCA JACK

TYPICAL MOH SOURCES:
• TAPE PLAYER
• TUNER

BGM TO:
DIGITAL
AND
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
SPEAKERS

HESB OR
AMPLIFIER
AND
SPEAKER

DK16 EXPANSION UNIT
PIOU/PIOUS (NOTE)
(9)
( ) PIN NO.s OF PIOU
AMPHENOL CONNECTOR

B
(34)

MOH/NT
RELAY CONTACT
JUMPER PLUG (MAKE OR BREAK)

M
P11

W2, IF USING PIOUS
(SEE FIGURE 7-7)

NOTE:
DK8 KSU relay or DK16 Base Unit relay can be
programmed (77-1) as the MOH control relay: or in DK16
the PIOU MOH/NT relay can be used to control MOH.

MOH OR
NIGHT TRANSFER
CONTROL
RELAY
SELECT
MOH
PROG. 77-1
RELAY CONTACT SPECIFICATION:
24 VDC MAX.
1 AMPERE, MAX.

FIGURE 7-1
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC-ON-HOLD AND BACKGROUND MUSIC FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
(SEE MDF WIRING DIAGRAM FOR DETAILS)
7-2

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
3) Configuration C (DK16 only)—three music
sources: This configuration allows the MOH
source to be connected to the MOH jack on
the Base Unit (as in Configuration A). The
digital or electronic telephone BGM source is
connected to a designated circuit on the PEKU,
PESU, PSTU, or KSTU (as in Configuration
B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the
external page speakers via the PIOU Zone
relay contacts (see Figure 7-5). When a separate BGM source is connected to the PIOU,
two customer-supplied amplifiers are required
to drive the external speakers. One amplifier
(1) drives the speakers for BGM when page is
idle and the other amplifier (2) drives the
speakers during page.

4B) Solder PIOUS jumper W2 to MAKE or BREAK
position if required:
• MAKE (M)—Shorts the normally open
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in the hold condition.
• BREAK (B)—Opens the normally closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in the hold condition.
5) For DK8 and DK16, MOH is sent to any station
or CO line that is on hold.
6) MOH is also applied through the Page/Background Music (BGM) control to provide BGM
to electronic/digital telephone speakers and
external page (refer to Paragraph 2.20).
2.20 Background Music (BGM) Options

2.22 MOH Source as Background Music Installation (DK8 and DK16). Install the MOH/Background Music option in accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure 7-1):

2.21 The Background Music options allow music
to play over optional external speakers (external
page system) and/or electronic and/or telephone
speakers. The system allows BGM to be configured any of the three ways described below:

1) Ensure that the Music-on-Hold option is installed in accordance with Paragraph 2.12.

1) Configuration A (DK8 and DK16)—one music
source: This configuration allows BGM and
MOH to share the same music source (see
Figure 7-3). With this configuration, the MOH/
BGM music source is connected to the MOH
RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.
The music source is sent to CO lines/stations
on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speakers with BGM turned on (via Intercom 481
or Tel Set Music button), and to the external page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on
the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.

2) The output of the MOH RCA jack is applied to
the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output.
3) When using an HESB or external amplifier
for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the
HESB or amplifier volume control.
2.23 Alternate BGM Source Installation A
BGM source can be connected to either a QSTU,
PSTU, KSTU, PEKU, or PESU. This music will be
sent to all electronic/digital telephone speakers
and to the external page system via the 600 ohm
PAGE RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base
Unit. This BGM source is separated from the
MOH source connected to the MOH RCA jack on
the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit. Connect the
BGM source to the QSTU, PSTU, KSTU, PEKU
or PESU in accordance with the following steps
(Figure 7-4):

2) Configuration B—two music sources: This
configuration allows the MOH source to be
connected to the MOH jack on the DK8 KSU
or DK16 Base Unit (as in Configuration A) and
a separate BGM source to be connected to a
designated circuit on either a QSTU (circuit 2,
Port 19), PEKU (circuit 3), PESU (circuit 8),
PSTU, or KSTU (circuit 4)—see Figure 7-4.
With this configuration, the MOH source is
sent only to CO lines/stations on hold, while
the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/
digital telephone speakers and to the external
page system via the 600 ohm RCA jack on the
DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.

NOTE:
If connecting the BGM source to the KSTU,
PSTU, or QSTU PCB, a telephone adaptor
matching/isolation transformer should be installed between the source and the PCB to
protect the source from potentially ruinous
voltages generated by the PCB (see Figure
7-2).

7-3

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
1

KSTU OR PSTU
CIRCUIT 4
OR
QSTU,
CIRCUIT 2
(PORT 19)

UNIVERSITY SOUND
MODEL TM-2
TELEPHONE ADAPTOR
(OR EQUIVALENT)

RING
TIP

RCA JACK

HIGH LEVEL
OUTPUT

INPUT

BGM MUSIC
SOURCE
600Ω OUTPUT
OR 8Ω OUTPUT

PHONE LINE
SEE PROGRAM 19 FOR SLOT KSTU OR PSTU ASSIGNMENT
SEE PROGRAM 10-2, LED 10 FOR QSTU, PORT 19 ASSIGNMENT

*BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:

NOTE:
1. UNIVERSITY SOUND
1327 Ralston Avenue
Sylmar, Ca. 91342-7607
Phone: (818) 362-9516

• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω
• INPUT VOLTAGE:
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

FIGURE 7-2
DK16 BGM SOURCE/STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT PRECAUTION DIAGRAM
4) Using the BGM source’s volume control,
adjust the BGM volume to the desired level
while listening to BGM via an digital or
electronic telephone speaker and/or the external page speakers. When BGM is sent to
external speakers via the 600 ohm RCA jack
PCB, use the external amplifier volume control to balance the BGM and page volume
levels.

1) For DK16, enter the programming mode and
identify the BGM slot number in Program 19 of
the printed circuit board (KSTU, PSTU, PEKU,
and PESU) which the BGM source will be
connected to.
2) Connect the BGM source to the tip and ring of
the appropriate circuit of the BGM PCB: KSTU
or PSTU (circuit 4), PEKU (circuit 3), and
PESU (circuit 8). In Program 10-2, use LED 09
or 10 to specify the circuit number PEKU or
PESU. KSTU or PSTU does not require Program 10-2 assignment.

2.24 External Background Music Installation.
The external background music options are
closely associated with the external paging options. Refer to Paragraph 5 for external paging
amplifier installation.

2A) For DK8, enter the programming mode and
set LED 10 to on in Program 10-2. This
assigns QSTU circuit 2, Port 19 as the BGM
source for the system. You must cycle system
power for Program 10-2 to take effect.

3 RELAY CONTROL OPTIONS
3.00 General

3) If BGM is connected to PEKU or PESU, cut
W5 on the PEKU or W7 on the PESU PCB
that BGM is connected to.

3.01 The DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit provides
one relay, and the PIOU and PIOUS each provides
two relays that control peripheral options.

7-4

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
DK8 KSU or DK16 BASE KEY SERVICE UNIT
VR1
MOH VOLUME
CONTROL
MOH/BGM SOURCE
(SHARED)

MOH

CO LINES AND
STATIONS ON-HOLD

BGM PAGE

ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL
TELEPHONE SPEAKER

DK8/DK16
MOH
RCA
JACK

(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)
TO EXTERNAL
PAGE SYSTEM

*MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:
• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω
• INPUT VOLTAGE:
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

DK8/DK16
600 OHM
PAGE RCA
JACK

(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)

FIGURE 7-3
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION A
DK8 OR DK16 VR1 MOH
VOLUME CONTROL

MOH

MOH SOURCE
DK8 OR DK16 MOH
RCA JACK
QSTU – CIRCUIT 2
KSTU/PSTU – CIRCUIT 4
PEKU – CIRCUIT 3
PESU – CIRCUIT 8

BGM SOURCE:
DIGITAL/ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONES AND
EXTERNAL SPEAKERS

CO LINES AND
STATIONS ON-HOLD
(BGM WHEN
PAGE IS IDLE)

BGM/PAGE

TO EXTERNAL
PAGE SYSTEM

BGM

VT
VR

QSTU
KSTU, PSTU
PESU
OR PEKU

* BGM/MOH SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:

DK8 OR DK16
600 OHM
PAGE
JACK

(BGM: 491 ON/490 OFF)
(600Ω OUTPUT)

ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL
TELEPHONE SPEAKER
(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)

• INPUT IMPEDANCE: 600Ω
• INPUT VOLTAGE:
RECOMMENDED LEVELS,
MIN. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm)
MAX. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm)

BACKPLANE WIRING
INSTALLATION WIRING

SEE: PROGRAM 19 (SLOT ASSIGNMENT)
SEE: PROGRAM 10-2 (CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT)

FIGURE 7-4
DK8 AND DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION B
7-5

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

MOH

MOH SOURCE

CO LINES AND
STATIONS ON-HOLD

J6 MOH
RCA JACK
(BASE UNIT)
SEE: PROGRAM 10-2 (CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT)
PROGRAM 19 (SLOT ASSIGNMENT)

ELECTRONIC/
DIGITAL TELEPHONE
BGM SOURCE

BGM/PAGE

VT
VR

KSTU/PSTU – CIRCUIT 4
PEKU – CIRCUIT 3
PESU – CIRCUIT 8

KSTU,PSTU,
PESU
OR PEKU
IN SLOT

ELECTRONIC/DIGITAL
TELEPHONE SPEAKER
(BGM: 481 ON/480 OFF)

J7, 600 OHM
PAGE OUTPUT
(BASE UNIT)
PAGE
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
BGM SOURCE

PAGE
PAGE
OR BGM

P23
BGM

AMPLIFIER (1)

AMPLIFIER (2)

BGM

PIOU ONLY
TO EXTERNAL
PAGE SPEAKER
DK16 EXPANSION
UNIT
ZONE RELAYS
ACTIVATE
(BGM WHEN PAGE IS IDLE)
WITH PAGE

BACKPLANE WIRING
INSTALLATION WIRING

FIGURE 7-5
DK16 MUSIC SOURCE CONFIGURATION C

7-6

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
figure the PIOU or PIOUS for the door lock control
function in accordance with the following steps
(refer to Figure 7-6 and 7-7):

3.10 DK8 KSU and DK16 Base Unit Relay
3.11 The DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit Relay can be
programmed for one of three options:
• BGM mute
• Night transfer
• MOH source control

NOTE:
Only one door lock control is available using an
optional interface PCB (PIOU or PIOUS), because only one interface PCB is allowed .

These options are set in Program 77-1 (LED 01
and 02). Only one option is allowed per installation.
However, in the DK16, these options can be supplemented with PIOU/PIOUS relay options. Refer to
Chapter 8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as
follows:
Voltage
• 24VDC maximum
Current
• 1 ampere maximum
• Normally open—closed when activated

1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 07 for the
door lock control function.
2) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 20 to OFF for
a 3-second door lock activation time, or set LED
20 to ON for a 6-second door lock activation
time.
3A) Set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.

3.20 DK16 Expansion Unit PIOU and PIOUS
Relays
3.21 The Expansion Unit via the PIOU or PIOUS
provides two additional relays that control peripheral options (see Figures 7-6, 7-7, 8-23, and 8-25).
• Door Lock Relay/BGM mute
• Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay

3B) Solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to
the MAKE or BREAK position as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s
door lock button is pressed.

NOTE:
The above relay options are available in conjunction with the Base Unit relay option.
3.22 Each relay may be configured as normally
open (make) or normally closed (BREAK). Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as
follows:
Voltage
• 24VDC maximum
Current
• 1 ampere maximum

4) Refer to Figure 7-8 for wiring/interconnecting
details. Connect the PIOU or PIOUS to the
MDF as required for the door lock control
function.
3.24 DK8 and DK16 DDCB Door Lock Control.
In addition to the door lock control provided by the
PIOU or PIOUS (DK16 only), each door phone/lock
control box (DDCB) installed provides one door
lock control. Only two DDCBs can be installed in a
system: On DK8 a DDCB can be connected to
Circuit 3 (Port 02) and/or Circuit 4 (Port 03); on
DK16 a DDCB can be connected to the circuit 5

CAUTION!
Do not connect relays directly to 120VAC
power source.
3.23 Door Lock Control (PIOU or PIOUS). Con-

7-7

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

PIOU PCB

SELECT RELAY FUNCTION
WITH PROGRAM 77-1
DOOR LOCK OR EXTERNAL
PAGE CONTROL

PIOU 25 PR.
CONNECTIONS
PIN NO.

COLOR

MDF 66M
BLOCK

PAGE
AMPLIFIER

PIN NO.s

BREAK
P10

DE.T
DE. R

32
7

.
.

R-O
O-R

BGM MUTE

13
14

MAKE
.
BREAK P11
NH.T
NH.R

34
9

.
.
.

CONTROL
R-Br
Br-R

DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

TAPE
PLAYER

17
18

MAKE
.
.

SELECT RELAY FUNCTION
WITH PROGRAM 77-1:
NIGHT RELAY OR
MOH CONTROL

MDF
CONNECTIONS
ALL WIRES SHOULD
BE JACKETED 24 AWG
TWISTED PAIRS

NIGHT
BELL

TO MUSIC-ONHOLD INPUT

NOTE:
Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections
where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously.

FIGURE 7-6
DK16 PIOU RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM
3) On the DDCB, set SW1 to the DOOR position,
and SW2 to the LOCK position.

(Logical Port 04) of the Base Unit Digital telephone
circuit set and to circuit 1 of the KCDU or PDKU
(Logical Port 12) in the Expansion Unit. Each
DDCB door lock control installed reduces the system door phone capacity of six by one. Any electronic or digital telephone can be equipped with a
button for each of the door locks. Install each DDCB
door lock control as follows:

4) In Program 77-1, set the door unlock activation for three or six seconds, and enable the
applicable port for DDCB connection, and
specify if door phones should ring over external page at night.
5) In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for
door lock operation, and specify 1 or 5 rings
when door button is pressed.

DDCB Installation
1) On DK8, connect applicable digital telephone
circuit (Logical Port 02 or 03) to the DDCB
KSU modular jack (see Figure 7-9 and Figure
8-4).

6) In Program 79, specify door phone ringing
assignments.
7) In Program 39, assign Unlock Door buttons to
the desired stations.

2) On DK16, connect the applicable digital telephone circuit (Logical Port 04 or 12) to the
DDCB HKSU modular jack (see Figure 7-9
and Figure 8-4).

8) Check each Unlock Door button from each
station: DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4)
will momentarily close (three or six seconds)
when the appropriate Unlock Door button is
pressed.

7-8

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

TBI
BREAK

MDF

DET

W1 MAKE

DER

K1
BREAK

DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

MOH
SOURCE
UNIT

NHT

W2 MAKE

NHR

NIGHT BELL

NORMAL OPEN
ALMT

FACILITY
ALARM
UNIT

ALARM
SENSOR

ALM
ALMR
NORMAL
CLOSE

PIOUS

• All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.
RELAY OPTIONS:
• K1 (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07
• K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05
• K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM

FIGURE 7-7
DK16 PIOUS RELAY CONTROL FUNCTIONAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3.30 DK16 Expansion Unit Night Transfer/
Music-on-Hold Relay Options with PIOU or
PIOUS

3.25 Door Lock Assignments Guide
Host

Port Door
Prog. 39
No. Lock No. Assignments

DK16 PIOU/PIOUS

N/A

0
Unlock
Door 0

Code 71

Ckt 5 DK16
Base Unit DDCB
Ckt 3 DK8 KSU DDCB

1
Unlock
Door 1

Code 72

Ckt 1 Expansion Unit
(PDKU or KCDU)
Ckt 4 DK8 KSU DDCB

2
Unlock
Door 2

Code 73

3.31 The NHT/NHR relay may be programmed for
either the night relay or the MOH relay function
(refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7). These functions can
be provided in addition to the relay service provided
by the Base Unit.
3.32 When configured for the night transfer function with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the
system is in the NIGHT mode. The relay may be

Note: CKT1 must be used in installing DDCB on KCDU
or PDKU. (Must be in Port 12)

7-9

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
25-PAIR
AMPHENOL

PIOU

DET PIN 34, R-BR

PIN 9, BR-R
DER

TO DOOR LOCK
18

SEE PROGRAM 77-1,
LED 07, 20
FOR RELAY OPTIONS

DOOR LOCK 0 BUTTON

SEE FIGURE 8-23
FOR WIRING

P10

NOTE:
Unlock Door 0
assigned to digital and electronic
telephones in Program 39 with
Code 71.

MDF

PIOUS
BREAK

MDF
DET

W1
MAKE

K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 AMP MAX.)

TO DOOR LOCK

DER
TERMINAL ON FRONT EDGE OF PCB

FIGURE 7-8
DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (PIOU/PIOUS)
programmed to activate continuously when the
Night Transfer 1 button (only) is set to NIGHT
mode (for indirect answering machine control); or
to pulsate at 1-second ON/3-seconds OFF (for a
night bell) when incoming CO lines night ring over
external page (Program 78-13) (NT1 = tenant 1
CO lines; NT2 = tenant 2 CO lines) per Program
15.

2) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 06 to provide
continuous or pulsating relay activation as
follows:
• OFF—Programs the relay for continuous
activation when NT1 button (only) is set.
• ON—Programs the relay for pulsating
activation when the NT1 or NT2 button
is set to NIGHT mode and a tenant 1 or
tenant 2 CO line rings.

3.33 When configured for the Music-on-Hold function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any
time a CO line is on hold. In this configuration, the
relay is normally used to control the Music-on-Hold
source.

NOTE:
CO lines must be enabled in Program 78-13
for the NT pulsating relay function.

3.34 DK16 Night Transfer Relay Control. Configure the PIOU or PIOUS for the Night Transfer
Relay function in accordance with the following
steps (refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7):

3) Access Programs 87, 88, and 89 to set the
CO lines that will activate the relay (when the
system is in the NIGHT mode).
4) Access Program 39 to program a Night
Transfer button (NT1 or NT2) on all telephones that are to transfer the system into the
NIGHT mode.

1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to OFF to
configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night
Relay function.

7-10

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
DDCB
A

NOTE 1
RELAY
CONTROL
CONTACT
DK16 KDCU,
CKT1
- OR-

DK16 PDKU,
CKT1
- OR -

DK16 DIGITAL
CKT5 OF
BASE UNIT
- OR -

DK8 KSU,
CKT 3 AND 4

2
3

RJ11

4
5
B

(See Fig. 8-4
wiring diagrams)

2
5
RJ11

(DK16 Port 04, 12)
(DK8 Port 02, 03)

4
C

DOOR LOCK
CONTROL
CONTACT
NOTE 2

3
4

4
RJ11

1
2

MDFB
DOOR PHONE

A
TO CUSTOMER
SUPPLIED
DEVICE
MDFB
1
DOOR PHONE B
- or DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL
2

MDFB
DOOR PHONE

DDCB TO DK8 KSU WIRING CHART

DDCB TO DK16 BASE UNIT WIRING CHART

DK8 AMPHENOL

DDCB
KSU JACK

BASE UNIT
AMPHENOL

DDCB KSU JACK

DT (30) / DR (5)
PT (31) / PR (6)

TO
TO

PIN 3 / 4
PIN 5 / 6

DT (34) / DR (9)
PT (35) / PR (10)

TO
TO

PIN 3 / 4
PIN 5 / 6

DT (32) / DR (7)
PT (33) / PR (8)

TO
TO

PIN 3 / 4
PIN 5 / 6

PORT NO.

DDCB TO DK16 EXPANSION UNIT
WIRING CHART

NOTES
1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the
ringing, talk, or monitor state.
2. See Paragraph 4.25 for Door Lock assignments.
3. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do
not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power.

KCDU OR PDKU

DDCB KSU JACK

DT (26) / DR (1)
PT (27) / PR (2)

TO
TO

PIN 3 / 4
PIN 5 / 6

See Figure 8-4 for DK16 Base Unit, PDKU, and
KCDU pin-out information

FIGURE 7-9
DK8 AND DK16 DOOR LOCK CONTROL OPTION (DDCB)
7B) Solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night
relay is activated.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when night
relay is activated.

5) Access Programs 29-1 ~ 29-2 to program a
Night Transfer button (NT1 or NT2) on all
DSS consoles that are to transfer the system
into the NIGHT mode.
6) If tenant operation is required, access Program 15 to set the CO lines for tenant 1 (NT1)
or tenant 2 (NT2) operation.

8) Refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU or PIOUS to the MDF as required for the night relay
function.

7A) Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay
is activated.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night
relay is activated.

NOTE:
Door phones programmed to ring over external page in night mode (Program 77-1) do not
activate the NT relay.

7-11

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
3.35 DK16 Expansion Unit MOH Relay Control.
Configure the PIOU or PIOUS for the MOH relay
function in accordance with the following steps
(refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7):

4.02 Amplified Speaker Option. The Amplified
Speaker option allows the HESB to be configured
as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the
600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16
Base Unit to provide an amplified external speaker.

1) Access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to ON to
configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH
relay function.

4.03 Talkback Amplified Speaker Option. The
Talkback Amplified Speaker option allows a
talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a
telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the
HESB is connected to the 600 ohm Page RCA jack
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit and is used as
the amplifier and speaker. The door phone unit
(MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as
a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The
MDFB microphone is always on in this application
so the pushbutton is inoperative, and the unit
serves only as a microphone for talkback.)

2A) Set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO line is
on hold.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any CO
line is on hold.
2B) Solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the
MAKE or BREAK position, as required:
• MAKE—Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO line
is on hold.
• BREAK—Opens the normally closed
contacts (NHT and NHR) when any CO
line is in on hold.

NOTE:
The 600 ohm Page RCA jack is two-way
(duplex) and is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers.
4.10 System Hardware Requirements
4.11 System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. Refer to the
following installation procedures for the system
hardware requirements for each option.

3) Refer to Figures 7-6 and 7-7 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU or
PIOUS to the MDF as required for the MOH
relay function.

4.20 HESB Option Installation

4 EXTERNAL SPEAKER UNIT (HESB)
OPTIONS

4.21 Loud Ringing Bell Installation. Install the
HESB Loud Ringing Bell option in accordance with
the following procedures:

4.00 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems provide
three options utilizing an HESB:

DK8 and DK16 HESB Installation for Digital
Telephone Loud Ring Bell (Figure 7-10):

4.01 DK8 and DK16 Loud Ringing Bell Option.
The Loud Ringing Bell option allows the voice first
or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use
of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first
and ringing signal tones can be amplified on all
6500-series electronic telephones and 2000- and
1000-series digital telephones equipped with HHEU
PCBs (refer to Section 100-816-206). The HESB
automatically turns off once the ringing call or voice
first has been manually answered from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature
prevents audio feedback problems.

1) Connect a jumper between Terminals 2 and
10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block.
2) Connect a jumper between Terminals 4 and 5
on the HESB TB2 terminal block.

NOTES:
1. HESB connections made in steps 3~5
may be accomplished using the HESB
VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1
terminal block.

7-12

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
4) Connect Terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to the green (–) wire of the HESC-65
cable using a modular block.

2. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable
in the telephone per Section 100-816-206
before proceeding with Step 3.

5) Connect Terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s
modular block (VOICE TIP).

3) Connect Terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A
using a modular block.

6) Connect Terminal 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to Pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s
modular block (VOICE RING).

4) Connect Terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to the green (–) wire of the HESC-65A
using a modular block.

7) Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V
lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead
to Terminal 2.

5) Connect Terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A
cable using a modular block.

8) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.

6) Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V
lead to Terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead
to Terminal 2.

4.22 Loud Ringing Bell Test. Test the Loud Ringing Bell installation in accordance with the following steps:

7) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.

1) Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell.
• Ringing will be heard over the HESB.

DK16 HESB Installation for Electronic Telephone Loud Ring Bell (Figure 7-11):

2) Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired
level. (Screwdriver adjustment on back of
HESB and ring level control of associated
telephone.)

1) On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a
jumper between Terminals 6 and 7, and connect another jumper between Terminals 5 and
8.

3) If ringing is heard at the station, but not over
the HESB, perform the following check while
the station is ringing:
a) Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the
HESB TB1 terminal block.
• Voltage indication should be 4.5 ~
5.0 VDC.

2) On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a
jumper between Terminals 4 and 5.

NOTES:
1. HESB connections made in steps 3~6
may be accomplished using the HESB
VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1
terminal block.
2. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65 (or
HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per
Section 100-816-206 before proceeding
with Step 3.

NOTE:
Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential
across terminals 1 and 2.
b) If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to the HESB have been made
properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the
HESB TB1 terminal block may have been
reversed).

3) Connect Terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable
using a modular block.

7-13

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
HESB (REAR VIEW)
VOLUME CONTROL

(+)
(-)

INTERNAL
WIRING:
TBI
1
2
3
4

JUMPER WIRES:
TB1
2-10

TB2
4-5

(L2)

VOICE
6
1
3
4

TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
654321 654321
NOT USED NOT USED

HACU-120
117/VAC TO
12 VDC

117
VAC

24 AWG
JACKETED
TWISTED
PAIR
FROM
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
TO HESB

VOICE DOOR PHONE
12V 0V

MODULAR
CONNECTORS
MAY BE USED

TB2
1 2 3 4 5
12V
0V

POWER
SUPPLY
MDF
66 BLOCK

JUMPERS

STATION CABLING
TIP
RING
PT
PR

25-PAIR
CABLE

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

BASE UNIT,
PDKU, OR
KCDU

R
(+)

GN
(-)

654321

123456

MODULAR
CORD

STATION

(-) GREEN
(L2) YELLOW
+
(+) RED
P601
HHEU
(V.3 or .4)

NOTE:
See Section 100-816-206
for instructions to cut EXSP
and HHEU jumpers on the
digital telephone main PCB.

(L2)

HESC-65A
CABLE
OCA
STRAP
R607

DO NOT
CUT

INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT (V.3 or .4) or
HHEU2 CARD INTO BASE OF DKT PER
HHEU INSTALLATION INFORMATION
IN SECTION 100-816-206.

FIGURE 7-10
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/DIGITAL TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING
7-14

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
HESB (REAR VIEW)
VOLUME CONTROL

(+) (RED)
(-) (GREEN)
VOICE TIP
VOICE RING

INTERNAL
WIRING:
TBI
1
2
3
4

JUMPER WIRES:
TB1
5-8
6-7

TB2
4-5

VOICE
6
1
3
4

TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JUMPERS

654321 654321
NOT USED

117
VAC

HACU-120
117/VAC TO
12 VDC

VOICE DOOR PHONE
12V 0V

MODULAR
CONNECTORS
MAY BE USED

TB2
1 2 3 4 5
12V
0V

POWER
SUPPLY
MDF
66 BLOCK

24 AWG
JACKETED
TWISTED
PAIR
FROM
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
TO HESB

STATION CABLING
VOICE TIP
VOICE RING

VOICE TIP
VOICE RING
DATA T1
DATA R1

25-PAIR
CABLE

JACKETED

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

PEKU
(CKT 1~8)
OR
PESU
(CKT 5~8)

OCA
TIP

R
(+)

GN
(-)

654321

123456

MODULAR
CORD

NOTE:
See Section 100-816-206
for instructions on how to
cut the HHEU strap inside
the telephone.

OCA
RING

HESC-65 or HESC-65A
CABLE

STATION
GREEN

3
(-)
2
1
(+)
P601
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
6500-SERIES

OCA
STRAP
R607

HHEU
INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT
CARD INTO BASE OF
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
PER INSTRUCTIONS IN
SECTION 100-816-206.

FIGURE 7-11
DK16 HESB/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH LOUD RINGING BELL WIRING
7-15

RED

DO NOT
CUT OCA
STRAP OR
R607

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
4.23 Amplified Speaker Installation. Install the
HESB Amplified Speaker option in accordance
with the following steps (refer to Figure 7-12):

3) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

NOTE:
HESB connections made in steps 4 ~ 7 may
be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and
DOOR PHONE modular jack instead of the
TB1 terminal block.

1) Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.
2) Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.

4) Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to pin L1 of the MDFB.

3) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.

5) Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to pin L2 of the MDFB.

4) Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

6) Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal
block to pin 1 of the MDFB.

5) Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

7) Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 2 of the MDFB.

6) Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.

8) Connect the 600 ohm PAGE RCA jack output
from DK8 KSU or DK16 base unit to terminals
3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block.

7) Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to
terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block,
and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.

9) Connect the HACU-120 Power Supply’s +12V
lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal
block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2.

8) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117VAC, 60Hz power source.

10) Plug the provided power cord into the power
supply and to a 117 VAC, 60Hz power source.

4.24 Amplified Speaker Test. Test the amplified
speaker installation in accordance with the following steps:

4.26 Talkback Amplified Speaker Test. Test the
Talkback Amplified Speaker installation in accordance with the following steps:

1) Make an external page.
• Page should be heard over the HESB.

1) Make an external page.
• Page will be heard over the HESB.

2) Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired
level (screwdriver adjustment on back of
HESB).

2) Verify that someone speaking into the door
phone can be heard at the paging station (with
this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talkback through the door
phone).

4.25 HESB/MDFB Talkback Amplified Speaker
Installation. Install the HESB/MDFB Talkback Amplified Speaker option in accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure 7-13):
1) Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2
of the HESB TB1 terminal block.

4.27 HESB Wall Mounting Instructions. The
HESB can be mounted to a wall or other vertical
surface. Use the following instruction to mount the
HESB (see Figure 7-14).

2) Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4
of the HESB TB2 terminal block.

1) Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB.

7-16

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

DK8 OR DK16 KSU
600 OHM PAGE
RCA JACK

NOTE:
PIOU/PIOUS page outputs
do not operate.

6 5 4 3 2 1

JACKETED TWISTED PAIR
24AWG

VOLUME CONTROL

JUMPER WIRES:
TB1 TB2
1-2
3-4
5-8
5-6
6-7
INTERNAL WIRING:
TBI
3
4

TB1

MODULAR
CONNECTOR
MAY BE USED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
654321 654321
NOT USED
VOICE DOOR PHONE
12V 0V

VOICE
3
4

TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6
12V 0V
VDC

JUMPERS

HESB (REAR VIEW)

POWER
SUPPLY
117 VAC
TO
12 VDC

FIGURE 7-12
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING

7-17

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
MDFB (REAR VIEW)

2 L1 L2

DOOR PHONE
TALKBACK
MICROPHONE

DK8 OR DK16 KSU
600 OHM PAGE
RCA JACK
NOTE:
PIOU/PIOUS page outputs
do not operate.

JACKETED
TWISTED
PAIR
24 AWG

6 5 4 3 2 1

JACKETED TWISTED PAIR
24AWG
VOLUME CONTROL
L1 L2 1 2

JUMPER WIRES:
TB1
1-2

TB2
3-4
5-6
VOICE
4
3
DOOR PHONE
4
3
2
5

NOTE:
The 600 ohm duplex page output is
compatible with most commercially
available talkback amplifiers.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
654321 654321

INTERNAL WIRING:
TBI
4
3
TBI
7
8
9
10

TB1

MODULAR
CONNECTOR
MAY BE USED

VOICE DOOR PHONE
12V 0V
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6
12V 0V
HACU-120
POWER
CONVERTER
117 VAC TO 12 VDC

FIGURE 7-13
DK8 AND DK16 HESB/TALKBACK AMPLIFIED SPEAKER WIRING
7-18

JUMPERS
HESB (REAR VIEW)

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
2) Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into
the mounting surface, use wall anchors if
mounting to drywall surface.
3) Hang the HESB from the screw.
ONE WALL
MOUNTING
HOLE

5 EXTERNAL PAGE OPTIONS
5.00 System Hardware Requirements
5.01 The STRATA DK systems offer a variety of
external page options. Additionally, a BGM option
is available with each external page option. DK
systems support:
• DK8 and DK16 Paging with BGM (same amplifier)
• DK16 Zone paging with BGM (separate amplifiers)
• DK16 Zone paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers)
• See Paragraph 2 of this section for more Page/
BGM options

FIGURE 7-14
HESB WALL MOUNTING
2) Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal
via a MDF to pins 42 and 17 of the 25-pair
amphenol connector from the DK8 KSU or
DK16 Base Unit.
3) Connect the music source to the input no. 2 of
the paging amplifier.
4) Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier
output.

5.10 External Page Option Installation

5.13 DK16 Zone Page with BGM (separate amplifiers). This configuration provides multiple-zone
paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched
to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU relays K1
through K4. The relay selected is determined by
the access code dialed by the station user. Default
access codes are:
• K1/zone A = 35
• K2/zone B = 36
• K3/zone C = 37
• K4/zone D = 38
• All zones = 39

5.11 All voice paging connections are made via the
600 ohm Page RCA jack on the DK8 KSU or DK16
Base Unit. The PIOU and PIOUS voice and BGM
(600 ohm and 3 watt) outputs are inoperable on the
DK16 Expansion Unit.
5.12 DK8 and DK16 Page with Separate External BGM (same amplifier). In this configuration the MOH source or alternate BGM source
provides BGM to digital/electronic telephones
and a separate BGM source provides music to
external speakers. Also, in this configuration Paging and external BGM are amplified by a common
customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the external page access code is dialed, the external
page control relay is activated, which applies a
short to the amplifier mute control to mute the
external BGM music. Install this option in accordance with the following steps (refer to Figure
7-15):

NOTE:
Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maximum at 300 ohms.
5.14 An all zone page code (39) is also available as
an option (see Program 10-2). When the all page
code is dialed, all four relays are activated to permit
simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all
digital and electronic telephone speakers. Install
this option in accordance with the following steps
(refer to Figure 7-16):

1) Connect the input no. 1 from the paging amplifier via an RJ11 jack to the 600 ohm RCA jack
on the DK8 KSU or DK16 Base Unit.

7-19

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
BGM over external page option
must be turned off: Dial
Intercom + 490 from Station 10.

DK8 KSU OR DK16
BASE KEY
SERVICE UNIT

PAGE
600 OHM
RCA JACK

6 5 4 3 2 1

INPUT 1

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24AWG

EXTERNAL
PAGING AMP

OUTPUT

66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
DK8 KSU OR DK16
BASE UNIT
25-PAIR
AMPHENOL
CONNECTOR

(42)

(17)

SPEAKER

MUTE 2

INPUT 2
EXTERNAL
BGM MUSIC
SOURCE

FIGURE 7-15
DK8 AND DK16 PAGE AND SEPARATE BGM USING SAME AMPLIFIER
1) Connect the input from the paging amplifier
via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm RCA Jack
on the Base Unit. Or, direct connect J7 to Amp
using a standard audio cable with RCA plugs.

5) Connect the PIOU PGOUT pins to the zone A
~ zone D speakers (A).
5.15 DK16 Zone Page with BGM (multiple amplifiers). This configuration also provides multiplezone paging capability, as in Paragraph 5.13. However, separate amplifiers are used for each zone.
Install this option in accordance with the following
steps (refer to Figure 7-17):

2) Connect the BGM music source to the music
amplifier input.
3) Connect the paging amplifier's (+) output to
each PGIN of the PIOU K1 ~ K4 relays and
the amplifier's (-) output to each of the zone A
~ zone D speakers (C).

1) Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers
via an RJ11 jack to the J7 600 ohm Page RCA
Jack on the Base unit. Or, direct connect J7 to
Amp using a standard audio cable with RCA
plugs.

4) Connect the BGM music amplifier (+) output to
terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and
the (–) to the (–) output of the page amplifier.

7-20

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
PIOU

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

B
K1

PGOUT 1 (15)

PGIN 1 (40)

PGOUT 2 (17)

PGIN 2 (42)

PGOUT 3 (19)

PGIN 3 (44)

PGOUT 4 (21)

PGIN 4 (46)

ZONE A

M
B
K2

ZONE B

M
B
K3

ZONE C

M
B

ZONE D

PAGING AMP

RJ11
JACK

600Ω

OUTPUT

BASE KEY
SERVICE UNIT

INPUT

BGM OR
NIGHT
RINGING
AND/OR
PAGE
FROM
BASE
UNIT J7
600 OHM
RCA JACK

J7
PG
COMMON (23)

(+)

SPEAKER
COMMON
LINE

(–)

46
MUSIC AMP
OUTPUT

BGM
MUSIC
SOURCE
(TO EXTERNAL
SPEAKER ONLY)

INPUT

PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )
25-PAIR CABLE

(+)

(–)

NIGHT RINGING PROGRAM ASSIGNMENTS
(SEE PARAGRAPH 9 OF SECTION 100-816-207)

Program 77-1
Button/LED

Zone/
Relay

LED ON
Assignment

LED OFF
Assignment

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

Tenant 2 COs

Tenant 1 COs

FIGURE 7-16
DK16 PIOU ZONE, PAGE/BGM/NIGHT RING (SEPARATE AMPLIFIERS)
7-21

OPTIONAL
CONNECTION

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS

MDF

PIOU

PGOUT 1 (15)

PGIN 1 (40)

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

PAGE ACCESS
CODES ( ):
A
C

ZONE A
(35)

PGIN 2 (42)

OUTPUT

–

OUTPUT

AMP
3

–

PGIN 4 (46)

OUTPUT

–

RJ77
JACK

(+)
PG
COMMON (23)

BGM MUSIC
SOURCE &
AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT
(–)

PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )
25-PAIR CABLES

FIGURE 7-17
DK16 PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS
7-22

ZONE D
(38)

BASE UNIT
600Ω

ZONE C
(37)

PGOUT 4 (21)

AMP
4

ZONE B
(36)

PGIN 3 (44)

INPUT

BGM OR
NIGHT
RING OR
PAGE
FROM
BASE
UNIT J7
600 OHM
RCA JACK

AMP
2

PGOUT 3 (19)

INPUT

–

INPUT

OUTPUT

INPUT

PGOUT 2 (17)

AMP
1

ALL ZONES
(39)

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
2) Connect the music source to the music amplifier input.

8) In Program 78, enable the CO lines that are to
ring via external page when the system is set
in the NIGHT mode.

3) Connect the paging amplifier outputs to PIOU
(PGIN) relays K1 ~ K4 and zone A ~ zone D
speakers (C).

9) In Program 39, assign the Night Transfer
1 or Night Transfer 2 buttons to digital or
electronic telephones per the System Record
Sheets (see Note 2).

4) Connect the music amplifier (+) output to
terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and
the (–) output to the “C” terminal of zone A ~
zone D speakers.

10) Press the Night Transfer 1 or Night
Transfer 2 button on an electronic or digital
telephone to set the system into the NIGHT
mode. Test by calling into the system on a CO
line assigned (Program 78) to night ring over
external page.
• When ringing sounds (see Note 2) over
the page, press Intercom 5 3 5 to
answer.

5) Connect zone A ~ zone D speakers “A” terminal to the “PGOUT” contact of the PIOU relays
K1~ K4 respectively.
5.16 DK16 Night Ringing over All External Page
Zones (PIOU only). To allow the night ringing
signal to be sent over zone paging, install the
paging amplifier in accordance with the following
steps (refer to Figure 7-18). (Steps 2 ~ 6 are
performed at the MDF.)

NOTES:
1. All zones will ring with this option; night
ringing to selected zones is not possible;
see paragraph 9 for night ring over selected page zones.
2. The Night Transfer 1 or Night Transfer 2 buttons put CO lines in NIGHT ring
mode per Program 15; NT1-TENANT 1/
NT2-TENANT 2 CO line assignment.

IMPORTANT NOTE: To night ring over
selected PAGE zone, see Paragraph 9 of this
section.
1) Connect the amplifier input via an RJ11 jack to
the J7 600 ohm Page RCA jack on the Base
unit. Or, direct connect J7 to Amp using a
standard audio cable with RCA plugs.

6 DK8 AND DK16 STATION MESSAGE
DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) PRINTER/
CALL ACCOUNTING DEVICE OPTIONS

2) Cross-connect the amplifier output A to the
PGIN1 ~ PGIN4 connector from the PIOU.

5) Cross-connect the amplifier output A to pin 9
(NHR) of the PIOU.

6.00 An SMDR printer or call accounting device
may be connected to the system to provide a hardcopy record of station activity (incoming, outgoing,
and transferred calls account code entries) on CO
lines or a printout of the customer data base. Call
record data is printed out at the completion of each
call. Program SMDR with Program 60, and use
Program 97 to have the SMDR printer display the
customer data base.

6) Cross-connect a jumper from pin 34 (NHT) to
pin 23 (PG COMMON) from the PIOU PCB.

6.01 SMDR will send out special names for the
following types of calls:

3) Cross-connect the amplifier output B to the
zone A ~ zone D speaker common line.
4) Cross-connect the PIOU PGOUT1 ~ PGOUT4
to zone A ~ zone D speakers (A).

• MSS: Prints on DISA calls to stations (see Note).

7) In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to OFF and 06
to ON. Set LED 08 to ON if door phones are to
ring over external page when the system is in
NIGHT mode.

• MODM: Prints on calls to the IMDU remote

maintenance modem (station 619).
• DISA: Prints on DISA calls to CO lines when

7-23

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

66 BLOCK
PIN NUMBERS
PIOU

JACKETED
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

MDF

B
PGOUT 1 (15)

PAGE ACCESS
CODES ( ):

PGIN 1 (40)

PGOUT 2 (17)

M
B
K2

PGIN 2 (42)
M
B
K3

PGOUT 3 (19)

PGIN 3 (44)

PGOUT 4 (21)

PGIN 4 (46)

ZONE A
(35)

ZONE B
(36)

ZONE C
(37)

B
K4

ZONE D
(38)

PAGING AMP

RJ11
JACK

600 Ω
J7
PG
COMMON (23)

OUTPUT

BASE UNIT

INPUT

PAGE AND
NIGHT RING
SIGNAL
FROM
BASE
UNIT J7
600 OHM
PAGE RCA
JACK

(A)

SPEAKER
COMMON
LINE
(B)

(JUMPER WIRE)
BREAK

P11

MAKE

NHT (34)

NHR (9)

NIGHT RELAY
PROGRAMMING:
77-1: LED 05, OFF.
LED 06, ON.
78: ENABLE CO LINES TO NIGHT RING
OVER EXTERNAL PAGE.
77-1: LED 08, ON. FOR DOOR PHONE
NIGHT RING OVER PAGE.

PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )
25-PAIR CABLE

NOTES:
1. Page signal path
.
2. Night ring signal path
.
3. Background music over zone page is not possible with this configuration.
4. Available with PIOU only: not PIOUS.
5. Night ringing will be sent to all zones; selected zones are not possible.

FIGURE 7-18
DK16 NIGHT RINGING OVER ALL EXTERNAL PAGE ZONES
7-24

ALL
ZONES
(39)

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
calling through the system CO-to-CO.

• Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after

NOTE:
MSS will print only on DISA calls that are
answered 10 seconds or 1 second (see Program 60-2) after the DK dial tone is sent to the
calling party. If set for 10 seconds and the call
is answered before 10 seconds, the call will
register as a normal incoming call and the
MSS/transfer portion of the call will not print
out.

• Caller dials 13.
• After 48 seconds from start of call, station 13

two ring cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).

answers.
• Printout B prints after station 13 answers the call
at 4:32.

NOTE:
If Program 60-2 is set for 10 seconds, MSS
will not print if the call is answered within 10
seconds from when the caller receives dial
tone.

6.02 Figure 7-19 shows a sample SMDR printout
and describes the contents of each column of the
printout. The following examples show several call
record samples and describe the sequence of
events which occurred to generate the call records.

PRINTOUT B
03 MSS 04:32 00:00:48 00:05 13
EXAMPLE 3—DISA Outgoing CO Line Call

NOTE:
DISA CO line calls print out as DISA.

NOTE:
SMDR printout “time of day” and day/month/
year (DD/MM/YY) is the same as the system
clock time/date. SMDR DD/MM/YY will print
out each time 50 call records are generated.

Call Sequence C
• Outside caller rings CO line 01 (line 01 is programmed as DISA).
• Line 01 returns intercom dial tone after two ring
cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).
• Caller dials 703 to access CO line 03 (outgoing).
• Caller dials the DISA security code and receives
CO dial tone.
• Caller dials the telephone number and converses when the call is answered.
• Caller hangs up.
• The call releases, and Printout C prints after the
call disconnects at 12:22.

SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO Lines

NOTE:
DISA station calls print out as MSS.
EXAMPLE 1—Ring, No Answer DISA Call
Call Sequence A
• Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is
programmed as a DISA line).
• Line 03 returns intercom dial tone to caller after
two ring cycles (5 ~ 6 seconds).
• Caller does nothing.
• After 32 seconds, call is disconnected.
• Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59.

NOTES:
1. If the CO provides the auto release (AR)
signal (see Program 15), the call disconnects when either party hangs up. A “*” will
print out following the CO line number if
the call is disconnected by the AR signal.
2. If the auto release signal is not returned,
the CO lines will remain seized until the
DISA disconnect timer releases the call
(approximately five minutes).

PRINTOUT A
03 MSS 04:59 00:00:32 00:06
EXAMPLE 2—DISA Internal Station Call

PRINTOUT C

Call Sequence B
• Outside caller rings CO line 03 (CO line 03 is
programmed as a DISA line).

Auto Release Signal:
03*DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing)
01 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming)

7-25

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

(FC: 35-60)

(FC: 62-76)

(FC: 30-33)

(FC: 24-28) 3

(FC: 15-22)

(FC: 9-13)

(FC: 4-7)

Field Column (FC: 1-2) 3

07/06/90
456789
01
15 08:14 00:00;22
123456987
01 MODM 08:15 00:00;18 00;00
03
10 08:16 00:00;28 00;08 12
03 DISA 08:16 00:00;15
01 DISA 08:17 00:00;25
03 MSS 08:18 00:00;12 00;06 15 <05 ANSWERS DISA CALL 12 SECONDS AFTER DK DIAL TONE>
03
15 08:19 00:00;22
12
6
First Digit (varies)
Last (always this column)
03* 12 08:19 00:00;16
04
10 08:20 00:00;34
12345678912345678965412365
Last
02
10 08:22 00:00;22
7145833700 First Digit (varies)
7145833700 123456789456321
01
15 08:23 00:00;40

Account Code
(4~15 digits)

Outgoing Telephone Number (1~26 digits)
Station to which the CO Line was transferred (1~4 digits)
CO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS)
Call Duration (HH:MM:SS, see Note 1)
Time of Day (HH:MM; hour and minute the call was released)
Station Number (1~4 digits; see Note 2)
CO Line Number (01~36)

NOTES:
1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) can be 1.0 or 10 seconds (minimum) to generate a call record
printout (see Program 60-2).

2. “MSS”: designates a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO call to a station that is not answered; or, answered

* 3.
4.
5.

after 1.0 or 10 seconds (depending on Program 60-2). DISA calls always register 05 ~ 06 seconds ring before
answer duration time.
“MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem.
“DISA”: designates a DISA call thru the system via CO to CO connection.
Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes.
The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit.
Special dial printout:
Tone = "T"
Long pause = "L"
Flash = "F"
Pause = "P"
The " " indicates that the call was disconnected by the Central Office Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic
Release (AR) signal. CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled to be dropped by the CPC signal.

FIGURE 7-19
DK8 AND DK16 SMDR PRINTOUT EXAMPLES
7-26

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
Disconnect Timer:
01 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming)
03 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing)

• Item 3—Selects the records of outgoing calls or

6.03 System Program Data Printout. If a printer
is connected to the SMDR port on the QSMU,
PIOU, or PIOUS, customer program information
stored in the system RAM may be printed out for
reference by using Program 97 (see Paragraph
6.14).

• Item 5—Allows only long distance call records to

outgoing and incoming calls to be printed.
• Item 4—Selects digit length of account code (4 to

15 digits).
be printed.
Program 97
• Allows system program data to be printed via the
SMDR port (refer to Figure 7-21 for an example
printout).

6.10 SMDR Hardware Requirements

NOTES:
1. An SMDR printer must be connected to
the SMDR port to use the printout option
selected by Program 97.
2. Call record data is lost when program data
is printed out using Program 97.

6.11 The DK8 system must be equipped with a
QSMU option PCB. QSMU Program 10-3, LED 04
must be OFF. Install the QSMU PCB in accordance
with Section 100-816-204 and wire the SMDR
device to the QSMU (PPTC/mocular cord) in accordance with Section 100-816-208. The DK16 system must be equipped with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB
in the Expansion Unit to support the SMDR printer/
call accounting device option. Connection of the
printer or call accounting device to the PIOU or
PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular
cord (7 feet maximum) and a PPTC connector
adaptor (refer to Figure 7-20 for details). Call record
data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits, no parity, 1-stop bit.

6.20 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation
6.21 Install the SMDR printer/call accounting device option in accordance with the following steps
(refer to Figures 7-20, 8-26, and 8-24):
1) Connect the interface cable and the PPTC
adaptor from the DK8 QSMU or DK16 PIOU or
PIOUS SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call
accounting device DB25 connector.

6.12 The DK8 KSU and DK16 PIOU or PIOUS
contains a call record buffer which stores call
record data (for 20 calls on DK8 or 50 calls on
DK16) when the printed or call accounting device is
turned off, or when no device is connected to the
SMDR port. No further call records are stored after
the buffer is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational, an “ERROR
BUFFER OVERFLOW” message is printed to indicate that the buffer was full, and that some call
information may have been lost.

2) Set the DK16 PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to
the appropriate baud rate (300 or 1200 bps),
as determined by the baud rate of the printer
or call accounting device. For DK8, QSMU is
always 1200 bps.
3) The DK8 QSMU Program 10-3, LED 04 must
be OFF for SMDR operation.

6.13 SMDR Programming Considerations
4) Set the printer or call accounting device to 8bits/no parity/one stop bit.

6.14 Selectable programming options for the SMDR
printer or call accounting device are:
Program 60
• Item 2—Determines the length of time a call
must be active before it will be registered by
SMDR.

5) Program (Program 60) the system for the
required SMDR printer/call accounting device
options (refer to Paragraph 6.13 and the Programming Procedures, Section 100-816-300).

7-27

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
BASIC CONNECTION

DK8, QSMU*
DK16, PIOU
or
DK16, PIOUS

*QSMU,

DB25
Plug
3-pair
Modular
Modular
Cord (7 ft. max)
Jack

SMDR
Modular
Jack

PROGRAM 10-3
LED 04-OFF

Printer
or Call
Accounting
Device

50 ft. max
24 AWG Wire
Toshiba
Twisted Pair
PPTC1A-5M,
Modularized
RS232, Modular
to DB25 Adaptor

DATA FORMAT:
• ASCII
• 8-bits
• No parity
• 1-stop bit
• QSMU: 1200 bps
• PIOU/PIOUS 300 or
• 1200 bps

BASIC WIRING (see: QSMU PIOU or PIOUS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 8 for more detail)
PPTC1A-5M Adaptor
PIOU, SMDR Jack
Modular Pin No. Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No.

RS-232
Lead Name

1 To

6 To

2 To

5 To

3 To

4 To

DSR

4 To

3 To

DTR

5 To

2 To

6 To

1 To

4 Jumper to 5

RTS to CTS

FIGURE 7-20
DK8 AND DK16 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR CABLE CONNECTIONS
must be installed in the DK16 Base Unit, and a
QRCU must be installed in the DK8 KSU. The voice
mail system can be connected to any standard
telephone circuit at the MDF block.

7 VOICE MAIL OPTIONS
7.00 System Hardware Requirements
7.01 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 may be configured to support Toshiba VP voice mail messaging
system or a customer-supplier voice mail system.

7.10 Toshiba VP Voice Messaging System

7.02 The DK8 must be equipped with a QSTU, and
the DK16 must be equipped with a KSTU, PSTU, or
PESU to support a voice mail system. The DK8
QSTU is equipped with two standard telephone
circuits; the DK16 KSTU is equipped with four
standard telephone circuits, the PSTU with eight,
and the PESU with two. A K4RCU subassembly

7.11 The STRATA DK8 and DK16 is designed to
support the full range of features offered by the
Toshiba VP provides various call routing, message
handling, and information management features,
including:
• Automated Attendant
• Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
• Message Waiting Indication

7-28

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
CO LINE
NUMBERS

81
81
81
81
81
81
81

(CO LINE)
(LEDs ON)
(LEDs OFF)

8
1
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
CO LINE 08

CO LINE 01

STATION PORT
NUMBERS
PROGRAM NUMBER
NOTES:
1. In this example all lines are programmed to immediately ring the station at port 00 only.
2. 0 = LED off, 1 = LED on.

FIGURE 7-21
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR PORT (PROGRAM 97) DATA DUMP EXAMPLE
• Voice Mail Control from digital and electronic

release the Toshiba VP auto attendant port
when an outside CO line caller hangs-up and the
Central Office provides a disconnect signal, per
Program 15-0 and 15-3.)

telephone
• System Monitoring
• Feature Integration

NOTE:
1. Not all Central Offices provide the disconnect signal (calling party control) so this
feature will not operate in all areas.
2. Both answer and disconnect tones provide more efficient Toshiba VP port use.
Always enable these options. Both options are enabled by accessing Program
31 and setting LED 15 to ON (LEDs 16 and
17 must also be ON to allow A and D
tones), and by accessing Program 15-0
and 15-3 and enabling CO lines with ARVM
and AROH calls.
3. The AR signal of some Central Offices is
not reliable and may occur at times during
a CO line voice connection causing the
call to disconnect during a conversation. If
this occurs, disable AROH and ARVM
calls on all CO lines (Program 15-0 and
15-3).

7.12 A block diagram of voice mail connections is
shown in Figure 7-22. See Section 100-816-204 for
QSTU and Section 100-816-205 for PSTU, KSTU,
and PESU installation instructions.
7.13 STRATA DK8 and DK16/VP Programming
Considerations. Some features of STRATA DK8
and DK16 system programming are intended for
Toshiba VP, and are not necessarily available for
customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems.
These programming features are:
• Answer (A) Tone. The STRATA DK8 and DK16
stations will send an answer tone to Toshiba VP
when the station answers a Toshiba VP call.
• Disconnect (D) Tone. The STRATA DK8 and
DK16 stations will send a disconnect tone to
Toshiba VP when the station hangs up while
connected to Toshiba VP. (D-Tone is also sent to

7-29

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

DK8 QRCU
OR
DK16 K4RCU

NOTE:
The K4RCU or QRCU allows VM DTMF dialing.

VOICE MAIL OR AUTO
ATTENDANT MACHINE

MDF
DK8 QSTU (CKT 1 & 2)
or
PSTU (CKT 1~8)
or
DK16 PESU (CKT 1 & 2)
or
DK16 KSTU (CKT 1 ~ 4)

25-PIN CABLE
(8 CIRCUITS PER PSTU)
(2 CIRCUITS PER PESU)
(4 CIRCUITS PER KSTU)
(2 CIRCUITS PER QSTU)

QSTU, KSTU/PSTU/PESU CIRCUIT TIP & RING
(1 PAIR PER PORT)

FIGURE 7-22
DK8 AND DK16 VOICE MAIL/AUTO ATTENDANT BLOCK DIAGRAM
available with Toshiba VP (refer to Paragraph 7.10)
may be available with the customer-supplied system.

• B Tone Signals. Stations send a recall (B) tone

to VP whenever Toshiba VP answers a transfer
(camp-on) recall from a station that did not answer a Toshiba VP blind transfer. (The B tone
notifies Toshiba VP that the call is a recall and not
a new call, allowing Toshiba VP to respond with
the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to
operate, the QSTU, PSTU, KSTU, or PESU
voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20
turned ON in Program 31.

7.22 DK8 and DK16 Voice Mail (QSTU, PSTU,
KSTU, or PESU Port) Programming Considerations
7.23 Voice mail (all types) QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or
PESU port programming is accomplished using
Programs 31 and 10-2 (refer to Programming
Procedures, Section 100-816-300, for details). Voice
mail (VM) programming features are:
• VM Groups—This feature groups VM QSTU,
KSTU, PSTU or PESU ports together so that
message waiting set/cancel signals appear to
originate from the lowest port in the VM group. All
VM ports connected to a particular VM machine
should be set in the same VM group (Program
31, LEDs 05 ~ 08).
• Message Waiting Set/Cancel—If the VM machine has the ability to dial a code, plus the
appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the
message waiting LEDs on electronic telephones,

7.14 Toshiba VP Installation. Use the preceding
information in concert with Paragraphs 7.23 and
7.24 to install Toshiba VP.
7.20 Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging
Systems
7.21 STRATA DK8 and DK16 systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. Depending
on the voice mail system used, some of the features

7-30

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
(see Toshiba VP Installation and Maintenance
Manual for other parameter settings).

program the VM machine to dial the following
sequences (In Program 10-2, turn LED 04 ON):
1) To set a MW LED, the VM machine must
dial 6 3 + station number.

2) STRATA DK8 and DK16 programs:
• Program 92: Initialization clears voice mail
auto dial codes.
• Program 03: Verify that the KRCU is programmed in the Base Unit to allow the VM/
AA to send DTMF tones (does not apply to
DK8).
• Program 04: Assigns station numbers to
VM/AA ports (initialized numbers recommended).
• Program 05: First digit of special codes 63
and 64 (initialized numbers recommended).
• Program 10-1: Set the system for voice first,
and program the VM/AA device to dial the
suffix as “1” after station numbers.
• Program 10-2: Set LED 04 ON for set/cancel
operation and 06 ON for the VM to detect 80
msec. tones.
• Program 13: If the VM/AA device is the
message center, set the lowest VM port as
the message center.
• Program 31: Turn LEDs 05, 09, and 15 ~ 20
ON for the QSTU, KSTU, PESU, or PSTU
ports that are connected to the Toshiba VP
VM/AA ports. Do not set these options for
standard telephone, digital telephone, or electronic telephone station ports. LED 04 should
be off if the auto attendant only “BLIND”
transfers; if the AA does “Supervise” or
“Screened” transfers, set LED 04 ON for auto
attendant ports.

2) To cancel a MW LED, the VM machine
must dial 6 4 + station number.

NOTE:
Only dial codes 63 and 64 are set in the VM
device configuration; the VM device will dial
the station number automatically to set/cancel
the Message Waiting indication LED.
• No Conference VM—Prevents undesired CO

line three-party connections during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set for no conference
(Program 31, LED 09).
• Privacy Override Deny—Prevents stations from
overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls
(Program 31, LED 18).
• End-to-End Signaling—Allows VM port
DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for
end-to-end signaling (Program 31, LED 17).

NOTE:
The DK8 QRCU or DK16 K4RCU must be
installed to allow End-to-End Signaling.
• VM to VM Call Blocking—Prevents VM auto

attendant calls from forwarding back to VM auto
attendant during supervised transfers (Program
31, LED 04 ON). This will prevent the problem of
auto attendant to auto attendant looping connections.
• Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes—Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to
direct callers to stations’ mailboxes. All VM ports
should be set to receive auto ID code (Program
31, LED 16).
• “A” and “D” tones; see Paragraph 7.13.

NOTE:
A, D, and B tones should be enabled only for
VM/AA devices that respond to these tones.
• Program 33: Set the QSTU, KSTU, PESU

and PSTU ports that are connected to the
VM/AA ports to a hunting sequence, starting
with the lowest port hunting to the next highest port, etc. The last hunt should be to an
attendant.
• Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be ON for
stations to receive the message indication
(Msg LED flashing) from a VM device.

7.24 Voice Mail Program Checklist. The following items should be verified before programming
voice mail:
1) Set Toshiba VP Maintenance Menu system
parameters to “D” = STRATA DK8 and DK16

7-31

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
• Program 35: LED 20 should be ON to assign

standard telephone ports (refer to Wiring Diagrams, Section 100-816-208, for QSTU, PSTU,
KSTU, and PESU wiring/interconnecting details).

auto attendant ports the “Busy Station Transfer” option. with this option the auto attendant
will receive ring backtone when calling stations designated with “Busy Station Ringing”
(Program 35, LED 19 ON). This allows the
auto attendant to transfer calls to busy stations. Set LED 19 ON for answer position
stations.
• Program 36: Set fixed call forward to VM/AA
port per customer requirements.
• Program 37: Set the timer for the VM/AA
ports to 22 seconds minimum to allow call
forward no answer to work on VM transferred
calls.
• Program 39: Set the Message Waiting Indication, Fixed Call Forward, Redial, and Speed
Dial Select buttons on the digital and electronic telephones that will be used to communicate with the VM/AA device.

3) Program the system for the required voice
mail messaging features (refer to Paragraphs
7.13 and 7.22).
4) Ensure that the DK8 QRCU or DK16 K4RCU
is installed, and (for DK16) verify that the CTU
code in Program 03 is for KRCU-4 operation
as required (this is not required for DK8 QRCU).
5) Perform additional voice mail messaging system programming as applicable (refer to customer-supplied installation/programming
manuals).

NOTE:
Some voice mail devices may ring trip when
called; in this case, set the ring voltage jumper
to L (low position) on the QSTU, KSTU, PESU,
or PSTU2 PCB connected to the voice mail
device.

NOTE:
Message Waiting (Msg) and Redial buttons
are fixed buttons on digital telephones and it is
not necessary to assign them in Program 39.
Speed Dial is initialized as Button 20 on
Digital telephones.

8 DK16 ALARM SENSOR INSTALLATION

• Programs 81 ~ 89: Verify that the ringing

assignments to the VM/AA devices are set
per customer requirements.
• Programs 16, 40, 41, 45 ~ 48 and 50 ~ 56:
Verify that outgoing CO line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM/AA beeper
notification feature to operate.

8.00 The PIOU or PIOUS PCB provides a circuit
that can be set to detect a relay open or closed
condition from a facility alarm system. When the
sensor is activated, all electronic and digital telephones will sound an alarm signal. The electronic/
digital telephone alarm signal can be reset by any
electronic or digital telephone with an alarm reset
button (see Program 39).

7.25 Voice Mail System Installation. Install the
voice mail messaging system in accordance with
the following steps (See Figure 7-22):

8.01 Alarm Sensor Options. Jumper plug P12 on
the PIOU is used to set the alarm sensor to detect
an open or closed condition from the facility alarm
system. Set P12 as follows (refer to Figure 7-23):
• To detect a closed condition, set P12 to the N.O.
position.
• To detect an open condition, set P12 to the N.C.
position.

1) Ensure that the QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or PESU
PCB is installed in the system per Section
100-816-204 (DK8) or Section 100-816-205
(DK16).
2) Connect the voice mail messaging system to
the selected QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or PESU

7-32

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
8.02 Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the
alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition
from the facility alarm system. Solder the W3 jumper
wire as follows (refer to Figure 7-23):
• To detect a closed condition, solder W3 to the
normal open position.
• To detect an open condition, solder W3 to the
normal closed position.

lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4.
In non-shared systems, night ringing CO lines can
be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected
zones.
9.02 The following programs must be used to
assign CO lines to ring selected PIOU page zones:
• Program 78-1: Assigns CO lines, tenant 1 and
tenant 2, that will night ring over PIOU external
page zones.
• Program 15-5: Assigns CO lines to tenant 1 or
tenant 2. Lines are initialized as tenant 1.
• Program 77-1 (LEDs 10 ~ 13): Assigns tenant 1
and tenant 2 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU
external page zones. LED 06 must also be ON in
Program 77-1.
• Program 39: Assigns appropriate Night
Transfer, or Night Transfer 1 (tenant 1),
and NT2 (tenant 2) buttons to electronic and
digital telephones.

8.03 Alarm Sensor Wiring. Refer to Figure 7-23,
and connect the facility alarm system relay contacts to the PIOU/PIOUS PCB.

9 DK16 NIGHT RINGING
OVER EXTERNAL ZONE PAGE

NOTES:
1. See Paragraph 5 and Figure 7-16 and
7-17 for PIOU zone paging installation
instructions.
2. Any station can pick up CO lines that night
ring over external page zones by dialing
Intercom 5 9.

9.00 In systems shared by two tenants, each tenant’s
CO lines can be assigned to night ring separate
PIOU external page zones (Figure 7-16). This
feature can also be used in one-tenant systems.
9.01 With shared systems, for example, tenant 1’s
night ringing CO lines could be programmed to ring
PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while tenant 2’s
PIOU PIN NUMBERS ( )
25-PAIR CABLE

PIOU PCB
N.C.
ALARM
SENSOR

P12

66 BLOCK PIN NUMBERS

MDF

ALMT (36)

ALMR (11)

N.O.

FACILITY
ALARM
SYSTEM

25-PAIR CABLE

PIOUS PCB
NORMAL OPEN

TB1

TWISTED
PAIR
MDF

ALMT
ALARM
SENSOR

ALM
ALMR

NORMAL CLOSE

FIGURE 7-23
DK16 ALARM SENSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM (PIOU/PIOUS)
7-33

FACILITY
ALARM
SYSTEM

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
or terminal connected to a DIU) is limited to 9600
bps. A speed of 19.2 kbps can be achieved when
dialing from a PDIU-DI-equipped digital telephone
dialpad, but many PC software programs do not yet
handle 19.2 kbps in an error-free manner. Also for
a 19.2 Kbps operation the computer or terminal’s
“COM” port must be specified to function at 19.2
Kbps. Some computer “COM” ports, like those
used in older IBM XT type computers, will not
operate at 19.2 without errors. DIU data transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the
DIU receives once it is in the command state; if
manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer
(default) mode, the transmission speed is transparent.

10 DATA INTERFACE UNIT
INSTALLATION
10.00 General
10.01 STRATA DK8 and DK16 support two types of
Data Interface Units (DIUs) that enable digital telephone users to simultaneously transmit and receive data on the same digital station port and wire
pair while communicating on a voice call. One unit,
called the integrated DIU (PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2),
becomes part of the digital telephone, replacing the
telephone’s base; the other unit, is a small selfcontained unit called the stand-alone DIU (PDIUDS). Each DIU is powered by the digital port it is
connected (see Table 8-D for wiring requirements).

IMPORTANT NOTE!
To use the PDIU-DI or PDIU-DS with AT
commands, communications software or
a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used. AT commands cannot
be issued from the computer’s operating
system prompt.

NOTES:
1. “Digital Ports” includes the DK8 KSU, DK16
Base Unit, PDKU and KCDU digital station ports. This applies wherever the term
“Digital Ports” is used in the text and
figures in this chapter.
2. 2000-series digital telephones require
PDIU-DI2 and 1000-series telephones require PDIU-DI.

10.10 Common DIU Connections
10.11 The block diagram in Figure 7-24 illustrates
common DIU connections. In this example, PDIUDIs are connected to personal computers (PC1 and
PC2), and PDIU-DSs are connected to a serial
printer and modems. The personal computer users
can transfer files internally, print files on the same
printer, and access the modem pool to send/receive data to/from an external personal computer
or dial up data service.

10.02 Both DIUs can be connected to standard
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) RS-232
asynchronous serial data devices. EIA devices are
divided into two categories: data communication
equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment
(DTE). Common DCE devices are modems and
some printers; common DTE devices are personal
computers, ASCII terminals, and some printers.
The PDIU-DI operates like a DCE and connects
directly to DTE devices using standard RS-232
cables. Depending on how its internal jumper plugs
are configured, the PDIU-DS can either operate
like a DTE and connect to DCE devices; or operate
like a DCE device and connect to a DTE device. In
most applications, DTE and DCE devices exchange
data between each other via the standard RS-232
cable connection.

10.12 To access these devices, a data call connection must be established between the DIUs. This is
accomplished by dialing the destination DIU from a
digital telephone dialpad or from a PC keyboard
using standard AT dial commands. PDIU-DIs share
the same intercom numbers/ports with the digital
telephone to which they are connected, while PDIUDSs have their own. The Intercom and Data Call
LEDs on the digital telephone tell the system
whether a voice or data call is being made: the
Intercom LED, voice calls; and the Data Call LED
initiates data calls. When dialing from a keyboard
with AT commands, A␣ T D is typed for voice calls,
and A T D D for data calls.

10.03 DIUs can function with DCE and DTE devices at data speeds of up to 19.2 kbps. However,
keyboard dialing using AT commands (from a PC

7-34

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
• Receive Data (RD, Pin 3): The DCE device

10.13 Installation instructions for these devices are
provided in Paragraphs 10.40 thru 10.70. Call
paths and scenarios for five types of data test calls
are provided in Paragraphs 10.82 ~ 10.86. Stepby-step data calling procedures are provided in the
Data Interface User Guide in the Installation &
Maintenance Manual, Operating Procedures.

•

10.20 EIA Interface Leads (Signals)
10.21 Both DIUs operate with nine standard EIA
RS-232 interface leads (signals) on which signaling data is transmitted and received. DIUs connect
to serial data devices with standard RS-232 cables,
available from telephone supply stores (see Figures 7-25 ~ 7-30). The PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS requires
nine signals for some applications, but can function
with eight using modular cords and connectors with
RJ45/DB25 adapters for other applications. If uncertain which signals are necessary for an application, all nine should be connected.

•

IMPORTANT NOTES!
1. The PDIU-DI is always a DCE device;
the PDIU-DS may be a DTE or DCE,
depending on how its internal jumpers
(1 ~ 9) are configured.
2. In the descriptions below, when a signal is ON, its potential is about seven
volts positive relative to signal ground
(pin 7); when a signal is OFF, it is about
7 volts negative relative to the signal
ground (pin 7).

•

• Frame Ground (FG, Pin 1): The FG signal (EIA

circuit AA) is a protective or safety ground which
is bonded to the PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS PCB. If
required by local codes, the FG should be connected to external ground.
• Signal Ground (SG, Pin 7): The SG signal (EIA
circuit AB) establishes the common ground reference for all other PDIU and data device signals and must be wired for all applications.
• Transmit Data (TD, Pin 2): DTE devices transmit and DCE devices receive data on the TD
lead (EIA circuit BA). Before the DTE device can
transmit the TD signal, the RTS, CTS, DSR, and
DTR signals (all discussed below) must be ON.
The TD signal is OFF in the idle state.

7-35

transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead
(EIA circuit BB); the DTE receives data on the
RD.
Request to Send (RTS, Pin 4): Some DTE
devices send an RTS signal (EIA circuit CA) to
the DCE device when they are ready to transmit
data on the TD lead. If the DTE device does not
generate the RTS signal, the DIU DIP switch
SW1-4 should be set ON to inform the DIU.
Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device may use RTS/
CTS for Ready/Busy type flow control, in these
cases DIP switch SW1-4 should be OFF (see
Figure 7-32 for DIP switch information).
Clear to Send (CTS, Pin 5): The DCE device
sends the CTS signal (EIA circuit CB) which
indicates that it is prepared to transmit data to
the line side. The DCE device sends this signal
only when it receives the RTS signal from the
DTE device. Sometimes, the DTE/DCE device
may use RTS/CTS for Ready/Busy type flow
control; in these cases, dip switch SW1-4 should
be OFF (see Figure 7-32 for DIP switch information).
Data Set Ready (DSR, Pin 6): When connected
to the communication channel and prepared to
exchange control characters to initiate data transmission, the DCE device sends the DSR signal
(EIA circuit CC) to the DTE device. If the PDIU
DIP switch SW1-2 is set ON, DSR will be ON
continuously; if the switch is set OFF, DSR
follows DTR (if DSR is ON, DTR is ON, etc.)
SW1-2 should be OFF in most cases (see Figure
7-32 for DIP switch information).
Data Carrier Detect (DCD, Pin 8): The DCE
device sends the DCD signal (DCD, Pin 8) when
receiving the carrier signal on the line side.
Before transmitting or receiving data, most DTE
devices require that the DCD be ON. If the
carrier signal is removed by the remote end or
lost due to a fault condition on the line, the DCE
notifies the DTE device by an OFF condition with
the DCD signal; PDIU DIP switch SW1-2 is set
ON to set the DCD ON continuously; if set OFF,
the DCD signal will only be ON when connection
between two DIUs is established and OFF when
a connection is not established. SW1-2 is set
OFF when the DTE/DCE uses the DTR/DSR
signals for Ready/Busy flow control (see Figure
7-32 for DIP switch information).

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
• Data Terminal Ready (DTR, Pin 20): The DTE

intervals.

device sends the DTR signal (EIA circuit CD) to
the DCE device, prompting the DCE device to
open the communication line. The line is closed
and the call disconnected when the DTE device
quits sending the DTR signal. DTR may be sent
any time to indicate that the DTE is ready to
transmit or receive data. DIP switch SW1-2
should be set OFF in most cases (see Figure 732 for DIP switch information).
• Ring Indicator (RI, Pin 22): The RI signal (EIA
circuit CE) is sent by the DCE device to the DTE
device. Whenever the DCE device receives a
ringing signal on the line side, it turns the RI
signal ON. If DIU DIP switch SW1-3 is set ON,
the RI signal will be on continuously if ringing; if
the switch is set OFF, the RI signal will be one
second ON/three seconds OFF when the DIU
detects ringing signal.

• SW1-4: This switch is placed in the ON position

10.30 DIP Switch Options

10.40 PDIU-DI to Personal Computer (PC)
Installation

if the computer does not output the RTS signal
or when connected to a modem that tracks the
DCD signal (modem set with AT&C1). Sometimes, the DTE device may use RTS/CTS for
Ready/Busy flow control, in these cases SW1-4
should be OFF. In this case the DCD signal of
the calling DTE is used as the RTS lead of the
called DTE and the DCD signal of the called DTE
is used as the RTS signal of the other DTE. In
this case a signal which stops the DTE from
transmitting data (usually the CTS lead) should
be cross-connected to the DIU’s DCD signal.
Consult the DTE device or application software
documentation to determine which type of flow
control is required. If the DIU-DS is connected to
a modem that tracks carrier detect (AT&C1)
SW1-4 should be ON.

10.31 The PDIU-DI and the PDIU-DS each have a
four-control DIP switch which can be configured for
signaling options. The switch is located on the
bottom of the PDIU-DI, and on the back panel of the
PDIU-DS (see Figure 7-32).
• SW1-1: Normally this switch is set ON to disconnect devices from DIUs automatically. The connection is maintained if data is exchanged between the device and the DIU within eight to nine
second intervals. If SW1-1 is OFF on the called
and calling DIU, data calls will remain connected
until released manually.
• SW1-2: This switch is placed in the ON position
when the PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured like
a DCE) must hold DCD and DSR ON continuously. If SW1-2 is OFF, DSR follows DTR and
DCD will be ON only when the DIU is connected
on a data call to another DIU. SW1-2 should be
OFF on a DIU when it is connected to a personal
computer that uses a communications software
program to establish data calls with AT commands; and whenever PDIU-DS is connected to
a modem.
• SW1-3: The PDIU-DI (or PDIU-DS configured
as a DCE) sends the Ring Indicate (RI) signal to
the computer to tell the computer (DTE) that the
PDIU is receiving an incoming call. SW1-3 should
be ON for the DIU to send RI steady, and OFF to
send at one second ON/three seconds OFF

10.41 The PDIU-DI always functions as a DCE
device; it transmits data on the Receive Data lead
(RD) and receives data on the Transmit Data lead
(TD). Most personal computers function as a DTE
device; PCs transmit data on the TD lead and
receive data on the RD lead. Follow the steps below
to install the PDIU-DI to a DTE, PC:

NOTES:
1. Use the steps below when installing an
ASCII terminal, personal computer, or any
other DTE device to a PDIU-DI.
2. The PDIU-DI can connect to a DCE computer or any other DCE-type device using
a specially configured RS-232 cable or
adapter; but this application is rarely required.
3. Change the PDIU-DI escape sequence
per the guidelines in paragraph 10.63.
1) Install the digital telephone that is to be
equipped with PDIU-DI per the instructions in
Section 100-816-206 and the drawing in Section 100-816-208.
2) Install the PDIU-DI under the digital telephone
per the instructions in Section 100-816-206.

7-36

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
to determine the full extent of these
requirements; so it is recommended to
turn LED 02 ON. See the Data Interface
User Guide for information regarding DIU
AT commands and result codes.
• LEDs 03 and 04: Should be OFF for
PDIU-DI ports.
• LED 05: Should be ON if the system is
installed behind a PBX or Centrex that
uses access codes to make external
calls or to insert a pause following DIU
access of an outside line.
• LEDs 17 ~ 20: Used to establish data
security groups. PDIU stations are only
allowed to make calls to PDIUs in the
same data group to which they are assigned.
Program 39
• The following data call buttons can be
assigned digital telephones equipped with
PDIU-DIs: Data Call, and Modem.
Assign SD buttons to data devices as
required. Do not assign DSS buttons to
data devices; DSS buttons are used for
voice calls only.

NOTE:
The PDIU-DI always operates as a DCE device; therefore, unlike the PDIU-DS, it has no
internal jumpers.
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the PDIU-DI’s DB-25 female connector
and the PC’s appropriate asynchronous serial
communications port connector (COM port).

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Check the PC manufacturer’s serial communication port interface documentation
for correct RS-232 pin requirements; requirements vary with each manufacturer.
The number of EIA RS-232 signals required
(8, 9, or 10 wires) depends on the application. When EIA signal requirements are not
known, connect the 10 EIA signals listed in
Paragraph 10.20. Figures 7-25 and 7-30
provide diagrams for connecting RS-232
cables between PDIU-DIs and Toshiba lap
top, and IBM, XT and AT PCs.
4) Set the PDIU-DI DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for
the desired application. Figure 7-32 shows the
DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10.30
describes switch functions.

10.50 PDIU-DS to Printer Installation
10.51 STRATA DK8 and DK16 enables serial printers (laser, dot matrix, or other types) to be connected to stand-alone data interface units (PDIUDSs). Digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs
can share access to these printers. Serial printers
operate as DCE or DTE devices, depending on the
vendor; the PDIU-DS can be connected to either
type, since it can be configured as a DTE or DCE
device. (The PDIU-DS comes from the factory
configured as a DCE device.) Follow the steps
below to install the PDIU-DS to a serial printer.

5) Access Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DI
for DTE-type connection and Program 39 for
data button assignments of the digital telephone connected to the PDIU-DI.
Program 20
• The port number entered for the PDIU-DI
in Program 20 is the port number of the
digital telephone to which the PDIU-DI is
connected.
• LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIUDI ports.
• LED 02: Should be ON for PDIU-DI ports,
unless the PC user will never use DIU AT
commands (other than ATDD, ATDT,
and ATD) and never require the PDIU-DI
to send result codes to display on the PC
display screen. Frequently, it is difficult

NOTES:
1. Only serial printers (not parallel) that conform to EIA RS-232 signaling requirements can be connected to PDIU-DSs.
2. In rare applications, it may be desired to
connect printers to PDIU-DIs. Refer to the
printer’s installation instructions.

7-37

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

NOTE:
If using Toshiba computers and printers with
X-On/X-OFF flow control, set SW1-(4) “ON”
on the DIU connected to the computer and
DIU connected to the printer.

1) Consult the serial printer’s documentation and
determine if the printer operates as a DCE or
DTE device:
• If the printer is a DCE device: Disassemble the PDIU-DS and configure it to
operate like a DTE device by placing the
jumper plugs (P1 ~ P9) in the “B-C”
(MODEM) position. Reassemble the
PDIU-DS, and mark “B-C” on the bottom
identification label for future reference.
(Paragraph 10.70 provides PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 7-31 provides jumper plug information.)
• If the printer is a DTE device: It may not
be necessary to disassemble the PDIUDS, since it comes direct from the factory
configured as a DCE device. However, if
uncertain, disassemble the PDIU-DS and
verify that jumper plugs (P1 ~ P9) are in
the “A-B” (DTE) position. Reassemble
the PDIU-DS and mark “A-B” on the
bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 10.70 provides
PDIU-DS disassembly/assembly instructions, and Figure 7-31 provides jumper
plug information.)

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Check the printer’s serial documentation
for correct RS-232 pin requirements. The
requirements vary with each manufacturer.
6) Use Program 20 to configure the PDIU-DS to
connect to a serial printer (see Programming
Section 100-816-302 for instructions and
record sheets).
• LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports.
• LED 02: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS
ports connected to printers.
• LED 03: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS
ports that connect to DTE- or DCE-type
printers.
• LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports.
• LED 05: Should be OFF for PDIU-DS
ports connected to printers.
• LEDs 17 ~ 20: Data security groups can
be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access
to PDIU-DS ports connected to a printer.
DIU stations can only make data calls to
DIUs in the same data security group.

2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate digital telephone circuit per wiring diagrams in
Section100-816-208 and information provided
in Section 100-816-206.
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the printer and the PDIU-DS (see Figure 7-27 and 7-29 for an example printer
cable connection).

7) Program 22 should be used to configure
PDIU-DSs to hunt if more than one PDIU-DS
connected to the same printer/server.
10.60 PDIU-DS to Modem Installation

4) If steps 2 and 3 are done properly, the Power
and Ready LEDs on the PDIU-DS should light
when the printer is turned on and ready.

10.61 STRATA DK16 enables asynchronous-type
(not synchronous) modems to be connected to
PDIU-DSs. This allows PDIU-DI equipped digital
telephones that are connected to personal computers, terminals, and other devices to share access to
a modem or modem pool.

5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for
the desired application. Figure 7-32 shows the
DIP switch locations and Paragraph 10.30
describes switch functions.

7-38

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

IMPORTANT NOTE!
Modems must be “smart modems” that
respond to AT commands and return result codes. Modems are customer-supplied.

IMPORTANT NOTE!
All ten PDIU-DS EIA leads (signals) should
be connected to the modem. Consult the
modem’s documentation for correct RS232 pin requirements; the requirements
may vary with each manufacturer.

10.62 A modem(s) can be accessed internally for
outgoing data calls or externally for incoming data
calls. Modems operate as DCE devices; so PDIUDSs that are connected to them must be configured
to operate like a DTE device. In the example
installation in Figure 7-24, the line side of the two
modems are connected to KSTU/PSTU/PESU ports
to establish a modem pool; however, the line side
of modems could be connected directly to a dedicated CO line. If modems are connected directly to
telephone network CO lines, automatic transfer of
CO line voice calls to system modems (data call)
will not function as described in the Data Interface
User Guide. For best operation and utilization of
CO lines and modems, it is recommended to connect modems to QSTU, PSTU or KSTU standard
station ports in a modem pool configuration. The
RS-232 side of the modem connects to the PDIUDS with standard RS-232 cables; the PDIU-DS line
side (RJ-11 connector) always connects to its own
individual digital port. Use the following instructions
to install modems to PDIU-DSs.

4) Connect the line side of the modem to a
QSTU, PSTU, KSTU or PESU standard telephone circuit or a dedicated CO line (consult
the modem’s documentation to install the it to
a CO line). Section 100-816-208 provides
QSTU, KSTU/PESU/PSTU station port wiring
information.
5) Set the PDIU-DS DIP switch (SW1-1 ~ 4) for
the desired application. Figure 7-32 shows the
DIP switch location and Paragraph 10.30 describes switch functions.

NOTE:
If the modem tracks carrier detect (DCD,
AT&C1), SW1(4) should be “ON,” and SW1(2)
should be OFF when PDIU-DS is connected
to a modem.
6) Use the programs below to configure the
PDIU-DS to connect to an asynchronous
modem (see Programming Section 100-816302 for explanations and record sheets).
Program 20
• LED 01: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports
• LED 02: Should be ON for PDIU-DS
ports connected to modems, enabling
the use of AT commands and result
codes when incoming calls are made
from outside the system to modems connected to PDIU-DSs.
• LED 03: Should be set ON for PDIU-DS
ports connected to modems.
• LED 04: Should always be ON for PDIUDS ports.
• LED 05: Should be ON if the system is
installed behind a PBX/Centrex that uses

1) Configure the PDIU-DS as a DTE device:
Disassemble the PDIU-DS and place jumper
plugs P1 ~ P9 in the “B-C” position (MODEM).
Reassemble the PDIU-DS and mark “B-C” on
the bottom identification label for future reference. (Paragraph 10.70 provides PDIU-DS
disassembly/assembly instructions and Figure 7-31 provides jumper plug information.)
2) Connect the PDIU-DS to the appropriate Digital port circuit per the wiring diagrams in Section 100-816-208.
3) Connect the appropriate RS-232 cable between the modem and the PDIU-DS. Figure 728 shows an example PDIU-DS to “smart
modem” RS-232 connection.

7-39

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
sequence is restored if the telephone or
PDIU-DI is unplugged.

access codes to place outgoing trunk
calls.
• LED 06: Should be ON for DIUs connected to modems. With this feature
turned on, the DIU will send a one-second release signal on the DTR to drop the
modem when the data user presses the
Data Release button on the telephone.
• LEDs 17 ~ 20: Data security groups can
be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU-DIs access
to the PDIU-DS ports connected to a
modem. DIU stations can only make
data calls to DIUs in the same data
security group.
Program 21
• For each PDIU-DS/modem pair, assign
the digital, QSTU, KSTU, and PSTU (or
PESU) ports that will be connected to the
PDIU-DS and modem, respectively.
Program 22/33
• If more than one modem/PDIU-DS pair is
configured as a system modem pool, the
PDIU-DSs should be set to hunt each
other in Program 22. The modem QSTU,
PSTU, KSTU, or PESU ports should be
set to hunt each other in Program 33.
Program 31
• LED 18 should be turned on for all QSTU,
KSTU, PESU or PSTU station ports that
are connected to modems. This provides
data security by preventing executive or
privacy override of modem calls.

2) Set the modem to recognize the DTR signal to
disconnect (AT&D2 command to modem).
3) When the modem tracks the DCD signal,
issue AT&C1 command to modem.
10.70 PDIU-DS Disassembly and Assembly
10.71 To set the jumper plugs (P1 ~ P9) on the PCB
inside the PDIU-DS for DCE or DTE operation, the
PDIU-DS must be disassembled. Disassemble
the PDIU-DS in accordance with the following
steps:
10.72 Disassembling the PDIU-DS
1) Remove the four screws securing the bottom
panel to the rest of the unit (see Figure 7-33).
These screws are not captive; so place together where they can be easily accessed.
2) Remove the bottom panel.
3) Remove the PCB inside the PDIU-DS by
lifting the back panel from its side grooves.
4) Turn the PCB over and set the jumper plugs
(P1 ~ P9) as follows:
• If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DTE,
set the plugs to the “A-B” position.
• If the PDIU-DS is connected to a DCE device, set the plugs to the “B-C” position.

10.63 Modem Setup Recommendations

NOTE:
Do not cut PDIU-DS PERCEPTION jumper
wire for STRATA DK8 or DK16 installations.

1) Always change the escape sequence of the
telephone PDIU-DI from default (+++) to some
other ASCII character (ATS2=XX command
to PDIU-DI). This allows placing the PDIU-DI
or modem into the command mode selectively. The ATS2=XX command should be in
the modem initialization command of the communication software of the PC connected to
the PDIU-DI (XX = new ASCII Escape character). This will ensure that the new Escape

10.73 Assembling the PDIU-DS
1) Position the back panel to the PCB (see Figure 7-33).
2) Slide the back panel down into its side grooves.
3) Attach the bottom panel, and secure with the
four non-captive screws.

7-40

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

LAPTOP, PC 1
STRATA DK16 KSU

2. PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MDF
station wiring to Digital Ports,
is in Section 100-816-208.

MDF2
RS-2321

DKT/PDIU-DI
(10)

NOTES:
1. RS-232 cable and connector
information is provided in
Figures 7-25 to 7-32.

3. Modem MDF station wiring to
QSTU, KSTU, PSTU or PESU
is in Section 100-816-205.

DIGITAL
(PORT 00)

LAPTOP, PC 2

DKT/PDIU-DI
(11 )

RS-232

SERIAL
PRINTER

DIAL-UP
COMPUTER
SERVICE

MDF2
DIGITAL
(PORT 01)
MDF2

TOSHIB

TELEPHONE
LINE X

DIGITAL
(PORT 03)

RS-2321
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

PDIU-DS
(13)

RS-2321

LINE Z
MDF3

MODEM
(18)

MODEM

MDF
QSTU
OR
KSTU
(PORT 08)

CO
LINE 1

PUBLIC
TELEPHONE
NETWORK

DIGITAL
(PORT 04)

RS-2321
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

PDIU-DS
(14)

MODEM
POOL

MDF3

MODEM 1
(19)

TELEPHONE
LINE Y
QSTU
OR
KSTU
(PORT 09)

MODEM

DIGITAL
(PORT 05)

RS-2321
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

PDIU-DS
(15)

LAPTOP,
PC 3

FIGURE 7-24
DK8 OR DK16 DATA INSTALLATION EXAMPLE BLOCK DIAGRAM

7-41

STANDARD
TELEPHONE
RS-2321

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

PDIU-DI
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)

TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT-TYPE
PERSONAL COMPUTER (DTE)
PIN DESIGNATIONS
COM PORT
PIN #
NAME

PIN DESIGNATIONS
7

PDIU-DI
PIN #

DCD RD TD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI

NAME

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

Rear view of asynchronous (serial)
communication interface connector (DB9) of
Toshiba laptop or IBM AT personal computer

22
RI

Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,
RS-232 female connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9

6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5

DB9
MALE
CONNECTOR

DB25
FEMALE
CONNECTOR
DB25
MALE
CONNECTOR

20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DB9
FEMALE
CONNECTOR

DB9
PIN #

NAME

DB25
PIN #

DCD

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

IBM PC AT modem style (serial)
DB25 to DB9, RS-232 cable.
Pin to pin connections are
confiqured as a straight cable,
not as a null modem cable
(50 ft max, 24AWG;
customer-supplied).

NOTES:
1. Some RS-232 EIA leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers.
2. The computer receives data on Pin 2 (RD) and sends data on Pin 3 (TD).

FIGURE 7-25
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM AT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS

7-42

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
PDIU-DI
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)

IBM XT PERSONAL COMPUTER
OR ASCII TERMINAL
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS
PDIU-DI
PIN #
NAME

DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS
20

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

Rear view of personal computer
or ASCII terminal DB25,
RS-232 connector

PDIU-DI
PIN #

NAME

DB25 MALE
CONNECTOR

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,
RS-232 female connector

DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

NOTE:
The PC/ASCII terminal receives
data on Pin 3 (RD) and transmits
data on Pin 2 (TD).

DB25 MALE
CONNECTOR

DB25
PIN #

NAME

DB25
PIN #

DCD

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

RS-232 CABLE

IBM PC XT modem style (serial)
DB25 to DB25 (M/F) RS-232
cable (50 ft max, 24 AWG,
customer-supplied).

FIGURE 7-26
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI TO IBM XT-TYPE COMPUTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS

7-43

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

PDIU-DS
(CONFIGURED IN THE "CONNECT TO DTE" MODE:
P1 ~ P9 = A-B SO PDIU FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)

TOSHIBA PS321SL PRINTER
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)
DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS
PRINTER
PIN #
NAME

FG TD RD RTS

N/C

DSR SG DCD DTR

Rear view of printer
or ASCII terminal DB25,
RS-232 connector.

PDIU-DS
PIN #

NAME

4 3 2 1

22
RI

DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DB25 MALE
CONNECTOR

NOTES:
1. The printer receives data on Pin 3
(RD) and transmits data on Pin 2
(TD).
2. The PDIU-DS should be in the
connect-to-DTE mode (P1 ~ P9 are
strapped A-B), so that it transmits
data on Pin 3 (RD) and receives
data on Pin 2 (TD).

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

Rear view of PDIU-DI DB25,
RS-232 female connector

DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

8 7 6
22

DB25 PIN DESIGNATIONS

DB25 MALE
CONNECTOR

DB25
PIN #

NAME

DB25
PIN #

DCD

DTR

DSR

RTS

N/C

CTS

N/C

RS-232 CABLE

(50 ft max, 24 AWG;
customer supplied).

FIGURE 7-27
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO TOSHIBA PRINTER, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS

7-44

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

PDIU-DS
(CONFIGURED IN THE "CONNECT TO MODEM"
MODE, P1 ~ P9 = B-C, SO IT FUNCTIONS LIKE A DTE)

HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM
(FUNCTIONS LIKE A DCE)

MODEM
PIN #
NAME

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

PDIU-DS
PIN #

NAME

Rear view of modem DB25 connector

FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG DCD DTR

22
RI

Rear view of PDIU-DS DB25, connector
DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

DB25 FEMALE
CONNECTOR

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DB25 MALE
CONNECTOR

DB25
PIN #

NAME

DB25
PIN #

DCD

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

RS-232 CABLE

(50 ft max, 24 AWG;
customer supplied)

NOTES:
1. Modem receives data on pin 2 (TD) and transmits data on pin 3 (RD).
2. The PDIU-DS must be in the connect to modem mode (P1 ~ P9 strapped B-C) so that it transmits
data on pin 2 (TD) and receives data on pin 3 (RD).

FIGURE 7-28
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS TO HAYES-TYPE SMART MODEM, RS-232 CONNECTOR/CABLE CONNECTIONS
7-45

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

CONNECTION EXAMPLE 1
DIGITAL TELEPHONE

TOSHIBA LAPTOP OR IBM AT TYPE
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC)

PDIU-DI BASE

TYPE 1 MODULAR ADAPTER1
1

TYPE B MODULAR CORD (CROSSED)
(50 ft max, 24AWG)
1

TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER

IMPORTANT!
Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.
CONNECTION EXAMPLE 2
IBM PC OR XT TYPE
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC)

DIGITAL TELEPHONE

PDIU-DI BASE

TYPE 3 MODULAR ADAPTER

TYPE A MODULAR CORD (STRAIGHT)
(50 ft max, 24AWG)
1

TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER

IMPORTANT!
Will not function with applications that require the RI signal to PC.
CONNECTION EXAMPLE 3
TOSHIBA P321SL OR SIMILAR
STANDARD TYPE SERIAL PRINTER

STAND-ALONE DIU

PDIU-DS

TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER
1

TYPE A MODULAR CORD
(50 ft max, 24AWG)

TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER

NOTES:
1. See Figure 7-30 for detailed pin out information of modular cords and adapters.
2. Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS to a modem.
3. Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the PDIU-DI to make calls with personal computer applications (autodialers, printer sharing, outgoing modem calls, etc). If the PC PDIU-DI must receive calls, the RI lead is normally
required; therefore, a standard RS-232 cable must be used (see Figures 7-25 and 7-28).
4. In Connection Example 3, PDIU-DS must be in the connect to DTE mode (P1 ~ P9, strapped A-B).
5. All modular cords and adapters are customer-supplied.

FIGURE 7-29
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CABLE/RJ-45 ADAPTER CONNECTIONS
7-46

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

TYPE 1
RJ45 TO DB9 (FEMALE) ADAPTER
8

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

N/C

RJ45
LEAD
NAME
DB9

DSR

RTS

DCD

GND

CTS

5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6

TYPE 2
RJ45 TO DB25 (MALE) ADAPTER
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

N/C

RJ45

CTS

DTR

DCD

RTS

DSR

LEAD
NAME
DB25

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20

TYPE 3
RJ45 TO DB25 (FEMALE) ADAPTER
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

N/C

RJ45

CTS

DTR

DCD

RTS

DSR

LEAD
NAME
DB25

8 7 6 5 4 3 2
20

RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH

FRONT

TYPE A
RJ45 FLAT MODULAR
CORD (STRAIGHT)
1

FRONT

TYPE B
RJ45 FLAT MODULAR
CORD (CROSSED)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

FRONT

RJ45 CROSS PINNING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
8
Modular Cords (50 ft max, 24AWG; customer-supplied)

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

FRONT

FIGURE 7-30
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS MODULAR CORDS AND RJ-45/RS-232 ADAPTER PIN CONNECTIONS
7-47

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW)

PDIU-DS (FRONT VIEW)

MODULAR JACK
FOR CONNECTING
1- OR 2-PAIR
TO DIGITAL CIRCUIT

DIU
READY

CONNECT
1234
DNTA

POWER

CONNECT LED
READY LED
POWER LED
B-C

A-B

MODEM

DTE

PERCEPTION

SW1: SEE FIGURE 8-36 FOR
SWITCH (1 ~ 4) OPTIONS
INFORMATION
CTS
DSR
SG
DCD

RTS
RD
TD
FG

(SEE PARAGRAPH 10.72)
13 12 11 10 9

ABC

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

RI
DTR

P1 ~ P9 LOCATED ON PCB INSIDE
OF PDIU-DS UNIT (SEE NOTES)

RS-232, DB25
(FEMALE) CONNECTOR

SIGNAL DIRECTION AND FUNCTION OF P1 ~ P9
PDIU-DS CONNECTED TO DTE

SIGNAL
ABBREVIATON

SIGNAL NAME/
FUNCTION

PDIU-DS
PIN NO.

SIGNAL
DIRECTION

FUNCTION:
A-B
(DTE MODE)

PDIU-DS CONNECTED TO DCE

SIGNAL
DIRECTION

FUNCTION:
B-C
(MODEM MODE)

FRAME GROUND

SIGNAL GROUND

TRANSMIT DATA

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

RECEIVE DATA

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

RTS

REQUEST TO SEND

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

CTS

CLEAR TO SEND

DTE

DIU

P7/P5

MODEM

DIU

P7/P5

DSR

DATA SET READY

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

DTR

DATA TERMINAL READY

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

DCD

DATA CARRIER DETECT

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

RING INDICATOR

DTE

DIU

MODEM

DIU

NOTES:
1. Mode select (P1 ~ P9) “A-B” if PDIU-DS is connected to a terminal-type device (DTE).
2. Mode select (P1 ~ P9) “B-C” if PDIU-DS is connected to a modem-type device (DCE).
3. See Figure 7-33 to disassemble/assemble PDIU-DS.
4. Some RS-232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer.
5. Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU-DS in Strata DK systems.

FIGURE 7-31
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS JUMPER PLUG OPTIONS/RS-232 CONNECTOR INFORMATION
7-48

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
DIP SWITCH
OFF

1234

PDIU-DI (BOTTOM VIEW)

ACCESS FROM BOTTOM
— OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DI

DIP SWITCH SW1 BACK VIEW
(ACCESS FROM BACK
— OUTSIDE OF PDIU-DS)

1234
DNTA

PDIU-DS (REAR VIEW)

DIRECTORY TRAY:
REMOVE FROM ORIGINAL
TELEPHONE BASE AND
INSTALL ON PDIU-DI BASE

DB25 CONNECTOR (FEMALE)
FOR DTE OR DCE RS-232
CABLE CONNECTION

PDIU-DI DIGITAL TELEPHONE BASE

MODULAR
CONNECTOR FOR
DIGITAL PORT
CONNECTION

PDIU-DI AND -DS SW1 DIP SWITCH (1 ~ 4) FUNCTIONS

SWITCH

NOTES:
1. DIU port must have
LED 02 ON in Program 20
to enable auto disconnect.
2. See Paragraphs 10.20
and 10.30 for more details
regarding SW1 option
settings.
3. When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem that tracks
the DCD signal (AT&C1)
SW1(4) must be ON.
4. If using Toshiba Personal
Computers and Toshiba
Printers using X-ON/X-OFF
flow control, set SW1(4) ON
on PDIU-DIs and -DSs.
5. SW1(2) should be off when
PDIU-DS is connected to a
modem.

FUNCTION

INITIAL
POSITION

SW1
(1)

Forced hang up when DIU does not
detect space signal on TD or RD for
about 9 minutes
ON: enable (auto-disconnect)1
OFF: disable

OFF

SW1
(2)

DCD, DSR control
ON: continuous on
OFF: DSR depends on DTR
(DCD is on during
communication state)

OFF

SW1
(3)

RI control
ON: RI is on continuously during
ringing state
OFF: RI is 1 sec ON/3 sec OFF
during ringing state

OFF

SW1
(4)

RTS control
ON: DTE doesn't have RTS signal
OFF: DTE has RTS signal (ready/busy
flow control: RTS/CTS:DCD)

OFF

FIGURE 7-32
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS SW1 DIP SWITCH INFORMATION
7-49

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

SIDE GROOVES

EX.
POWER
PERCEPTION

W1
W2
DTE/MODEM
JUMPER PLUGS
P1~P9

SW1

PDIU-DS
PCB
BOTTOM
PANEL

NOTES:
1. Do not cut the PERCEPTION jumper wire for
STRATA DK8 or DK16 installations.
Jumper wire is for PERCEPTION applications only.
2. See Table 8-D regarding external power requirements.

FIGURE 7-33
DK8 AND DK16 PDIU-DS DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
7-50

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
10.80 PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS Installation Tests

10.81 Paragraphs 10.82 ~ 10.86 provide tests for
five DIU call applications. The telephone and port
numbers used in these figures are provided for
explanation purposes only; when actually testing,
use port and telephone numbers appropriate for
the system. Each of these tests can be conducted
with manual dialing from a digital telephone’s dialpad or AT dialing from a personal computer’s
keyboard; however, only the preferred method of
dialing for application is presented.

3) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D D 1 1 and
press ENTER (AT commands must be capital letters).
• The Data Call LEDs will be lit on DKT 10
and 11
• PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX.
• PC 2 displays, RING.
• PC 1 and PC 2 are connected as shown
by the thick solid lines. PDIU-DIs are now
in the communication mode.

10.82 PC-to-PC Test Call Using AT Commands
(see Figure 7-34)
1) DIU Programming:
• Program 20: Ports 00 and 01. LEDs 01,
02, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• Program 39: Ports 00 and 01. Data
Call (56) and Data Release (54) buttons should be provided.
• Default settings for PDIU-DI S-Registers.

4) Typing from PC 1 keyboard will display on PC
2 display and vice versa.
5) To terminate the call: Press Data Release,
or;
a) Type XXX from either PC keyboard.
• The PC screen displays, OK.

LAPTOP PC 1
STRATA DK8 OR DK16
RS-232

MDF
DKT/PDIU-DI
(10)

DIGITAL
(PORT 00)

LAPTOP PC 2
RS-232
DKT/PDIU-DI
(11 )

MDF
DIGITAL
(PORT 01)

FIGURE 7-34
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS
7-51

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used
in step 5a.
• PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display,
NO CARRIER.
• The Data Call LEDs on each DKT are
off.
XXX = PDIU-DI escape sequence (see Paragraph 10.63)

normally accomplished using the DOS and
MODE commands.
3) Using the manufacturer’s documentation,
make sure the communication parameters
(data speed, parity, data bits, stop bits, etc.) of
the PC COM port match the printer’s serial
interface parameters.
4) To connect the PC to the printer, press the
DKT’s Data Call button and dial 1 3.
• The CONNECT on the PDIU-DS will be
lit.
• The connection between the PC and the
printer is completed, as shown by the
thick lines above (PDIU-DS 13 is in the
communication mode).
• If busy tone is sent to the DKT, the
connection is not complete; press Data
Release and try step 4 again.

10.83 PC to Printer Test Call Using Manual
Dialing (see Figure 7-35)
1) DIU Programming:
• Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• Program 20: Port 03. LEDs 01, 04, and
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• Program 39: Port 01. Data Call (56)
and Data Release (54) buttons should
be provided.
• Default settings for PDIU-DI, S-Registers.

5) Operate the PC to print data as required.

2) Make sure the PC is configured to print data
from its serial COM port (the PC COM port
connected to DKT/PDIU-DI port 01). This is

6) To terminate the call, press the DKT’s Data
Release button.

LAPTOP PC
STRATA DK8 OR DK16
RS-232

MDF

DKT/PDIU-DI
(11)

DIGITAL
(PORT 01)
MDF

SERIAL
PRINTER

TOSHIBA

RS-232

DIGITAL
(PORT 03)
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

PDIU-DS
(13)

FIGURE 7-35
DK8 AND DK16 PC TO PRINTER TEST CALL USING MANUAL DIALING
7-52

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
3) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D D 1 4 and
press ENTER (AT commands must be capital letters).
• The Data Call LED on DKT 14 will be lit.
• The CONNECT LED on PDIU-DS 14 will
be lit.
• The screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the data
transmission speed set by the communications software.
• At this time, PC 1 and PDIU-DS 14 are
connected as shown by the thick lines
above (PDIU-DS 14 is in the communication mode); PC 1 is now linked directly to
the RS-232 side of the internal modem;
PC 1 can issue AT commands to the
internal modem, which is now in the
command mode.
• If Digital/PDIU-DS port 04 is the only DIU
port connected to the modem (Program
20, LED 03 ON), the Modem LEDs on all
DKTs will be lit.

10.84 Internal PC to External PC Test Call Using
AT Commands (see Figure 7-36)
1) DIU Programming:
• Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01, 02, and
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03,
04, 06, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• Program 21: Digital port 04 assigned
with KSTU port 08.
• Program 39: Port 00. Data Call (56),
Data Release (54), and Modem (55)
buttons should be provided.
• Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIUDS S-Registers.
2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a
communications software package and that
the communication parameters of each PC
and communication software package are set
to the same values (data transmission rate,
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).

STRATA DK8 OR DK16

MDF

MDF
QSTU OR
KSTU
(PORT 08)

INTERNAL
MODEM
(18)

DIGITAL
(PORT 04)

RS-232
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

583-3700

PDIU-DS
(14)

PUBLIC
TELEPHONE
NETWORK

CO
LINE 1

TELEPHONE
LINE
674-4700
EXTERNAL
MODEM
(AUTO
ANSWER)

LAPTOP PC 1

MDF
RS-232

DKT/PDIU-DI
(10)

DIGITAL
(PORT 00)

LAPTOP
PC 2

FIGURE 7-36
DK8 AND DK16 INTERNAL PC TO EXTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS
7-53

RS-232

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
4) From PC 1’s keyboard, type A T D T 7 0 1
6 7 4 4 7 0 0 and press ENTER.
• The internal modem (18) goes off-hook,
dials 701 to seize the CO line, and then
dials the external modem’s telephone
number (674-4700).
• The external modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications.
• If the modems send result codes, the
screen on PC 1 displays, CONNECT
XXXX, where XXXX is the data transmission speed set by the communication
software.
• At this time PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines above,
to exchange data (file transfers, type
messages, etc.).

5) To terminate the call: Press the telephone
Data Release button and;
a) Type + + + from PC2 keyboard.
• The PC screen displays, OK.
b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used
in step 5a.
• PC 1 and PC 2 screens both display,
NO CARRIER.
• The Data Call LED on DKT 10 will be
unlit.
10.85 External PC to Internal PC Test Call Using
AT Commands (see Figure 7-37)
1) DIU Programming:
• Program 20: Port 00. LEDs 01, 02, and
17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.

STRATA DK8 OR DK16

MDF

MDF
QSTU OR
KSTU
(PORT 08)

INTERNAL
MODEM
(18)

DIGITAL
(PORT 04)

RS-232
DIU
POWER

TOSHIBA
READY

CONNECT

583-3700

PDIU-DS
(14)

PUBLIC
TELEPHONE
NETWORK

CO
LINE 1

TELEPHONE
LINE
674-4700
EXTERNAL
MODEM

LAPTOP PC 1

MDF
RS-232

DKT/PDIU-DI
(10)

DIGITAL
(PORT 00)

LAPTOP
PC 2

FIGURE 7-37
DK8 AND DK16 EXTERNAL PC TO INTERNAL PC TEST CALL USING AT COMMANDS
7-54

RS-232

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
• Program 20: Port 04. LEDs 01, 02, 03,

• The CONNECT LED on the PDIU-DS

04, 06, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
Program 21: Digital port 04 assigned
with PSTU port 08.
Program 39: Port 00. Data Call (56),
Data Release (54), and Modem (55)
buttons should be provided.
Program 81: Port 08. LED 01 ON (CO
line 01 rings QSTU/KSTU port 08).
Internal modem: set to auto answer
(S0=1).
Default settings for PDIU-DI and PDIUDS, S-Registers.

(14) will be lit; the Data Call and Modem
LEDs on DKT 10 will also be lit.
• The screens on PC 1 and PC 2 display,
CONNECT XXXX, where XXXX is the
data transmission speed set by the communication software.
• At this time, PC 1 and PC 2 are connected, as shown by the thick lines, to
exchange data (file transfers, typed messages, etc.).

•
•

•
•
•

5) To terminate the call: Press the telephone
Data Release button, and
a) Type + + + from PC2 keyboard.
• The PC screen displays, OK.
b) Type A T H from the PC keyboard used
in step 5a.
• PC 1’s and PC 2’s screens both display, NO CARRIER.
• The DATA and MODEM LEDs on
DKT 10 will turn off.

2) Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on-line with a
communications software package and that
the communication parameters of each PC
and communication software package are set
to the same values (data transmission rate,
parity, data bits, stop bits, flow control, etc.).
3) From PC 2’s keyboard, type A T D T 5 8 3
3 7 0 0 and press ENTER.
• The external modem originates the call
to STRATA DK16 CO line 01.
• CO line 01 rings incoming to the internal
modem (QSTU or KSTU port 08).
• The internal modem rings and auto answers; the modems handshake and establish communications.
• If the modems send result codes, the
PC’s screens display, CONNECT XXXX,
where XXXX is the data transmission
speed set by the communications software.
• At this time, PC 2 is connected to PDIUDS (14), as shown by the thick lines
above (PDIU-DS 14 is in the command
mode). PC 2 can now issue AT commands to PDIU-DS 14.
• If Digital/PDIU-DS port 04 is the only
PDIU port connected to a modem (Program 20, LED 03 ON), then the Modem
LEDs on all DKTs will light.

10.86 PC Auto Dial Voice Call Test (see Figure
7-38)
There are many off-the-shelf, IBM/MS-DOS compatible, desktop organizer software packages that
provide an auto dialer function. One of these is the
terminal resident SideKick. It is used in this section
for test explanation purposes only. If you choose
another auto dialer software package, the detailed
response may be different than that shown here.
1) DIU Programming:
Program 20: Port 01. LEDs 01, 02, and 17
ON; all other LEDs OFF.
Program 39: Port 01. Data Call (56) and
Data Release (54) buttons are optional; if
the PDIU-DI is only used for the PC auto dial
application, the Data Call and Data
Release buttons are unnecessary.
2) Make sure that the auto dial application software is installed on the PC root directory and
that the communication parameters of the PC
and application software are set to the same
values (in this test example, Sidekick
“SKINSTAL” program).

4) From PC 2’s keyboard, type A T D D 1 0 and
press ENTER (AT commands must be capital letters); this prompts PDIU-DS (14) to dial
and connect to PDIU-DI (10).

7-55

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993

STANDARD
TELEPHONE

DIALED LINE

LAPTOP PC 2
STRATA DK8 OR DK16
RS-232

DKT/PDIU-DI
(11)

MDF

MDF
DIGITAL
(PORT 01)

CO
LINE 1

PUBLIC
TELEPHONE
NETWORK

FIGURE 7-38
DK8 AND DK16 PC AUTO DIAL VOICE CALL TEST
3) Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of
names and telephone numbers you wish to
auto dial is installed within the application
software (include the appropriate STRATA
CO line access code prefixing each telephone
number).

5) Take the DKT’s handset off-hook at any time
after the telephone number is dialed (press
the SPACE bar to release the Data Call
button only); or, remain on-hook and use the
DKT’s speakerphone to talk when the called
party answers (LCD model only, do not press
the SPACE bar when using the speakerphone).

4) To auto dial using Sidekick from the PC keyboard:
a) Press the ALT and CTRL keys simultaneously.
• The PC screen displays the Sidekick
menu window.
b) Press F5 twice (Sidekick prompts “search
for INITials:” to display on the PC’s
screen).
c) Type the initials or name of the person or
organization you wish to auto dial.
d) Press ENTER.
• Sidekick finds and highlights the desired name/number.
e) Press ENTER again.
• DKT/PDIU-DI 11 seizes the appropriate CO line and auto dials the
selected telephone number.
• The LEDs of the DKT’s Data Call
and CO line 01 buttons will be lit (if
assigned in Program 39).
• Dial tone, DTMF tones, and ringback
or busy tones are audible from the
DKT’s speaker.

6) To terminate the call anytime:
a) If off-hook, press the SPACE bar and
place the DKT handset on-hook.
b) If talking via the speakerphone, press the
SPACE bar.

11 DK16 TWO-CO LINE EXTERNAL
AMPLIFIED CONFERENCE
11.00 General
11.01 A customer-supplied two-way amplifier can
be installed to amplify two-CO line tandem, DISA,
and conference calls. The amplifier will only support one call at a time: Any conference, two CO-line
tandem, or DISA calls originated while the amplifier
is being used for another call will be unamplified.
The amplifier is connected to two designated PEKU
or PESU station ports and will automatically be
switched into a two-CO line connection established
between any CO lines in the system.

7-56

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
SLOT 04
EXPANSION
UNIT

BASE UNIT

PESU or
PEKU

OUTSIDE
PARTY 1

PCM
CONFERENCE
SWITCH

T
CO
LINE
R

OUTSIDE
PARTY 2

CKT, X

24AWG
25-PAIR
CABLE

(CKT 6)

VT(6), P36/BK-BL

T, P51

VR(6), P11/BL-BK

R, P33

CKTA
DT(6)
NOT USED
DR(6)

T
CKT, Y

CO
LINE

(CKT 7)
ANY CO LINE
MAY BE USED FOR
CONFERENCE; SEE
PROGRAMMING NOTES
FOR TANDEM AND/OR
DISA CO LINES

ANY
STATION
CALL

NOTES (PROGRAMMING):
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments
PROGRAM 10-3
PESU/PEKU PORT PESU OR
PESU OR PESU OR
CONF. ENABLE PEKU SLOT PEKU PORT PEKU
BUTTON/LED
POSITION
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
04

A = 17
B = 18

24AWG
TWISTED
PAIR

VT(7), P38/BK-GN

T, P41

VR(7), P13/GN-BK

R, P49

PORT B

CKT6
CKT7

• Program 10-1, LED 19 and 20 ON.
• Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO lines for
tandem connection.
• Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO lines if
amplified DISA is required.
• Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19 ON.

R-TEC, VFR5050
AMPLIFIER
(see NOTES)

MDF

PORT A

PUBLIC
TELEPHONE
NETWORK

LED 02, ON

R-TEC EDGE
CONNECTOR

AMP

CKTB
DT(7)

P35

–24

NOT USED
DR(7)

P17

GND

SYSTEM
TELEPHONE
THAT SETS UP
2-CO LINE
CONFERENCE
CALL

POWER
SUPPLY

R-TEC, PS16
POWER ADAPTER
(NOTES)
+
24VDC
–

117VAC
60HZ
DUPLEX
AC-PLUG

NOTES (Amplifier):
1. All amplifier equipment is customer or dealersupplied.
2. Use a 2-way, telephone CO line amplifier that is
FCC Part 68 registered and provides automatic
gain control; the above example is with a Reliance
Electric Co., R-TEC VFR5050 (VVSG) Repeater,
with 500-X or 500-X-CT mounting assembly and a
PS16 power adapter.
3. Recommended switch settings for VFR5050 are:
• FLAT GAIN (1, 2, 4, 8): all ON
• Equalizer (1 ~ 5): all OFF
• Sensitivity: NORM
• S1 screw: down = Data DIS OFF
4. The above R-TEC options may be different for
some installations; see R-TEC VFR5050
installation Practice before installing VFR5050.

FIGURE 7-39
DK16 AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE AND/OR AMPLIFIED DISA FUNCTIONAL WIRING
DIAGRAM
7-57

INSTALLATION-PERIPHERALS
SECTION 100-816-207
MARCH 1993
following steps (see Figures 7-39 and 8-27).
11.02 Amplified Talk Path. Figure 7-39 provides a
functional diagram of a two-CO line amplified conference connection (an R-TEC VFR5050 amplifier
is used here). The talk path for the connection is as
follows: outside party 1—public telephone network—CO, CKTX—STRATA DK16—PEKU, port
A—into AMP, CKTA—Out AMP, CKT B—PEKU,
port B—STRATA DK16—CO, CKTY—public telephone network—outside party 2. This path is twoway so when outside party 2 talks, the talk level is
amplified in the reverse direction.

1) At the main distribution frame (MDF), connect
the voice pair (VT, VR, port A) of circuit 6 on
the designated PEKU or PESU PCB to one
input of the customer-supplied two-way amplifier. In the example in Figure 7-39, this is
CKTA (Central Office Side A) of the VFR5050.
2) At the MDF, connect the voice pair (VT, VR,
port B) of circuit 7 on the designated PESU or
PEKU PCB to the other input of the amplifier.
In the Figure 7-39 example, this is CKTB
(subscriber side B) of VFR5050.

NOTE:
Only the outside party 1 talk path is amplified
to/from a system telephone when it is connected into a two-CO line conference.

3) Plug the amplifier’s power cord into the 117
VAC (standard) wall outlet.
4) Set the gain and other amplifier parameters
options per the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation.

11.03 Amplifier Requirements.
• Customer-supplied.
• Must be FCC-registered, Part 68, and
provide automatic gain control.
• Requires two PEKU or PESU station
ports (17 and 18).
• Refer to the amplifier manufacturer’s installation documentation for amplifier
grounding instructions.

5) Program the STRATA DK16 system as
follows:
• Program 10-3: Enables the appropriate
PEKU or PESU PCB ports for amplifier
connection. Only enable the ports that
will be connected with the amplifier(s).
• Program 15-5: Enables appropriate CO
lines for tandem connection.
• Program 10-1: LEDs 19 and 20 must be
ON.
• Program 10-2: LED 18 and 19 must be
ON.

11.04 Installation. Connect a two-way amplifier to
the STRATA DK16 system in accordance with the

7-58

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION
CHAPTER EIGHT
WIRING DIAGRAMS

8-i

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
2.30

SUBJECT
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
WIRING DIAGRAMS ..............................................................................................
Station Wiring Diagrams .....................................................................................
CO Line Wiring Diagrams ...................................................................................
PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................

PAGE
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28

TITLE
SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM ...............................................................
DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY
CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................................
DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES (KSU AND QCDU) ...........................................
DK8/DK16 MDF WIRING DDCB AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL ...........................
DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ...............
DK8 AND DK16 CO LINE RECORD ......................................................................
DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR WIRING ...........................................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/BASE UNIT P5 AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY
CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO BASE UNIT ....................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) AND DIGITAL
DSS CONSOLE (DDSS) TO PDKU .......................................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) WITH
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 AND PDIU-DS TO PDKU, KCDU, OR BASE UNIT ..................
DK8 OR DK16 PDKU, KCDU, DK8 KSU, OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL
STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD .......................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU ................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU ..........................................................................
DK16 PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION ............................................
DK16 PEKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ..................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/STANDARD TELEPHONE, VOICE MAIL TO PSTU .............
DK16 PSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ..................................
DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................................
DK16 PESU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD ..................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO PCOU ............................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES TO KCDU ............
DK16 MDF WIRING/PIOU PERIPHERALS (25-PAIR) ...........................................
DK16 PIOUS/TTY AND SMDR WIRING ................................................................
DK16 PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS ..........................................
DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING ..................................................
DK16 MDF WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE .........................
DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION .............

8-i

PAGE
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-28
8-29
8-30
8-31
8-32

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TABLE LIST
TABLE
8-A
8-B
8-C
8-D

TITLE
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA DK8 AND DK16 ................................
STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................................
DIGITAL TELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/ADM/LOOP LIMITS ......................

8-ii

PAGE
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

1 GENERAL

• Figure 8-13 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Electronic

1.00 This chapter contains point-to-point wiring
diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supply to the DK
systems. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups
according to the PCB or unit which provides the
interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment.

• Figure 8-14 — DK16 MDF Wiring/HDSS Con-

Telephone to PEKU

•
•
•

2 WIRING DIAGRAMS

•

2.01 The following paragraphs list and identify the
wiring diagrams provided in this chapter.

•
•

2.10 Station Wiring Diagrams
• Figure 8-1 — Secondary Protector Diagram
• Figure 8-2 — DK8 MDF Wiring to KSU
Amphenol Station and Relay Connections
• Figure 8-3 — DK8 MDF Wiring to CO Lines
(KSU and QCDU)
• Figure 8-4 — DK8/DK16 MDF Wiring DDCB
and Door Lock Control
• Figure 8-6 — DK8 and DK16 CO Line Record
• Figure 8-7 — DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR Wiring
• Figure 8-8 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Base Unit
P5 Amphenol Station and Relay Connections
• Figure 8-9 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to
Base Unit
• Figure 8-10 — DK16 MDF Wiring for Digital
Telephones (DKTS) and Digital DSS Console
(DDSS) to PDKU
• Figure 8-11 — DK16 MDF Wiring for Digital
Telephones (DKTS) with PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 and
PDIU-DS to PDKU, KCDU, or Base Unit
• Figure 8-12 — DK8 or DK16 PDKU, KCDU,
DK8 KSU or DK16 Base KSU Digital Station/
MDF Cross Connect Record

•

sole and Associated Electronic Telephone Wiring to PEKU
Figure 8-15 — DK16 PEKU Background Music Connection
Figure 8-16 — DK16 PEKU Station/MDF Cross
Connect Record
Figure 8-17 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Standard
Telephone, Voice Mail to PSTU
Figure 8-18 — DK16 PSTU Station/MDF Cross
Connect Record
Figure 8-21 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines to
PCOU
Figure 8-27 — DK16 MDF Wiring/Amplified
Two-CO Line Conference
Figure 8-28 — DK16 External Power for
Digital Telephone Connection

2.20 CO Line Wiring Diagrams
• Figure 8-5 — DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU Station/MDF Cross Connect Record
• Figure 8-19 — DK16 PESU Circuit Card Wiring Diagram
• Figure 8-20 — DK16 PESU Station/MDF
Cross Connect Record
2.30 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Diagrams
• Figure 8-22 — DK16 MDF Wiring/CO Lines
and Digital Telephones to KCDU
• Figure 8-23 — DK16 MDF Wiring/PIOU Peripherals (25-Pair)
• Figure 8-24 — DK16 PIOUS/TTY and SMDR
Wiring
• Figure 8-25 — DK16 PIOUS Page/Relay/
Alarm Connections
• Figure 8-26 — DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY
Options and Wiring

TABLE 8-A
FCC REGISTRATION NUMBERS STRATA DK8 AND DK16
System

Manufacture Country

Key System

Hybrid System

DK16

Made in Singapore

CJ6 SNG-73672-KF-E

CJ6 SNG-73673-MF-E

DK8

Made in Malaysia

CJ6 MLA-74479-KF-E

CJ6 MLA-74478-MF-E

8-1

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TABLE 8-B
STATION LOOP REQUIREMENTS
Device Description

Max Loop Resistance
(Including Device)

Max Distance from
KSU to Device

Number of
Wire Pairs 1

Electronic4 telephone

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

HDSS console

20 ohms

500 ft. (152 m)

2-pair. EKTs which
receive OCA calls
need 3-pair.

300 ohms

Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m)
with 150 ohm device. See
manufacturer's product
specifications for exact
resistance of device.

1-pair

Digital telephone
or
3
DDCB

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

1-pair4

DDSS console

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

1-pair4

PDIU-DI
PDIU-DI2

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

PDIU-DS

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

ADM

40 ohms

1000 ft. (303 m)

Standard telephones,
voice mail,
auto attendant, etc.

Shares digital
telephone wire-pair.4
1-pair

Shares digital
telephone wire-pair.4

NOTES:
1. Use 24 AWG twisted pairs.
2. PESU circuits 3 and 4 are not used.
3. DDCB can connect only to Circuit 5 of the DK16 Base Unit or Circuit 1 of the PDKU or KCDU.
4. Two-pair, larger wire, or local telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range,
see Table 8-D.

8-2

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TABLE 8-C
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS
TOSHIBA
Printed Circuit Board or Interface

Facility
Interface Code

Network
Jack

Ringer
Equivalence

QCDU/KCDU/PCOU/PCOU2
(Loop Start Line)

02LS2

RJ14C

0.2B

DK8 KSU DK16 Base KSU
(Loop Slant Line)

02LS2

RJ11C

0.2B

QSTU/KSTU/PESU*/PSTU/
PSTU2 (Off-premises Station)

0L13A

RJ21X

N/A

*Circuits 1 and 2

8-3

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

TABLE 8-D
DIGITAL TELEPHONE/DIU/DDSS CONSOLE/ADM/LOOP LIMITS

MODE
DKT Ringing
(Volume Max)
DKT with
DVSU (OCA)

Maximum line length (24 AWG)
1 Pair plus
2 Pair
1 Pair
external power3

QPSU/KPSU
or
Battery Backup1
QPSU/KPSU

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup
QPSU/KPSU

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup

DKT with HHEU
or
Carbon Handset

QPSU/KPSU
Battery Backup

330 ft (100 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

DKT with PDIU-DI/
PDIU-DI2

QPSU/KPSU

495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

PDIU-DS
DKT with HHEU
and PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2

QPSU/KPSU

DKT with DVSU
and HHEU
DKT with ADM

675 ft (200 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup

675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

QPSU/KPSU

495 ft (150 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
33 ft (10 m)

Battery Backup

500 ft (151 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
500 ft (151 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup
QPSU/KPSU

330 ft (100 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup
QPSU/KPSU

DDCB

165 ft (50 m)

Battery Backup

QPSU/KPSU
DDSS2060A

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)
165 ft (50 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup

675 ft (204 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

QPSU/KPSU

165 ft (50 m) 1000 ft (303 m) 1000 ft (303 m)

Battery Backup

NOTES:
1. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively.
2. Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external
power source.
3. See Figure 8-28 for external power wiring.
4. Digital cable runs must not have the following:
§Cable splits (single or double)
§Cable bridges (of any length)
§High resistance or faulty cable splices

8-4

,,,

,,
,,,,
, ,
,, ,
,

,,,,
,

,
,,,
INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

BUILDING #1

BUILDING #2

QSTU
PESU
KSTU
PSTU

STANDARD
TELEPHONE
OR OTHER
DEVICE

DK8 KSU
DK16 KSU
BASE UNIT
QCDU
PDKU
PEKU
PESU
KCDU

209

219

229

208

218

228

239

249

238

248

NT1

217

227

237

247

206

216

226

236

246

256

205

215

225

235

245

255

207

257

204

214

224

234

244

203

213

223

233

243

253

212

222

232

242

252

211

221

231

241

251

220

230

240

250

202

201

200

210

254

DSS
CONSOLE
(DK16 only)

HESB

DIGITAL OR
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

MDFB

DDCB

Secondary protectors

DK8 KSU
DK16 KSU
BASE UNIT
KCDU
PCOU
QCDU

CO LINE

FIGURE 8-1
SECONDARY PROTECTOR DIAGRAM

IMPORTANT!
To protect against transient voltages and currents, secondary protectors must be installed if
there is outside wiring (Figure 8-1). These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in
addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication
circuits, UL 497A. As of October 1, 1990, the following manufacturers offer secondary
protectors that are UL listed.

8-5

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

1. Certron Corp; Anaheim, California 92807
• Secondary protector: Model 08450.
2. Curtis Mfg. Co. Inc; Jaffrey, New Hampshire 03452
• Secondary protector: Model Diamond Chip. For indoor use on the protected side of the
telephone circuit only.
3. Oneac Corp; Libertyville, Illinois 60048
• Secondary protector: Model OnLine 614+ and OnLine DG/S. For indoor use on the
protected side of primary telephone protector only.
4. Siemon Co.; Watertown, Connecticut 06795
• Secondary protector for communication circuits: Model PM-2305. Intended for use with
Listed Siemon 66M1 Block: Models PG-04, -25, -50, or PK-04 ground kit and Listed Type
1 enclosure. For use on the protected side of a Listed Primary Telecommunications
Protector for indoor use only.
5. Simplex Time Recorder Co.; Gardner, Massachusetts 01440
• Isolated loop circuit protectors: Models 2081-9027 and 2081-9028. Intended for use
between data communication equipment or signal lines of building system equipment.
Install and test the secondary protectors per the installation instructions of the applicable
manufacturer.

8-6

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO BASE UNIT (P5)
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

STATION CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS

(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2

T1 (VOICE/DATA)
R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1 (ADD, POWER)
PR1 (ADD. POWER)

R2
PT2
PR2
T3

CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT24
OR PDIU-DS

R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
T8
R8
PT8
PR8

CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT34
OR PDIU-DS OR
DDCB

PT1

PR1
RJ11

6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
PR

CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT55
OR PDIU-DS

MODULAR
CORD

CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT65
OR PDIU-DS

GND
PR

(-)
T

GND
R

(-)
PT

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)
(WITH OR WITHOUT ADM,
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)

CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT75
OR PDIU-DS

CIRCUIT 8 TO DKT85
OR PDIU-DS

NOTES:
1. Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)
(Reference to FG Ground
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power
wires required only for long station runs per Table 8-D.
PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
3. Standard Telephone circuits 1 ~ 2 require a QSTU to be
installed.
4. DKT circuits (1 ~ 4) are standard on the DK8 main PCB.
5. DKT circuits (5 ~ 6) require one optional QCDU circuit and
DKT circuit (7 ~ 8) require a second QCDU to be installed.

NOT USED
STD TEL3
CIRCUIT 1
NOT USED
R1
T1

R
R1

CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT44
OR PDIU-DS OR
DDCB

RELAY
CONTACTS

R1
T1

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)

STD TEL
CIRCUIT 2
OR BGM

NOT USED

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

FIGURE 8-2
DK8 MDF WIRING TO KSU AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS

8-7

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

2345

654321

2345

654321

4
3

1-6

R
T

1-6

CO11
R
T

4
3

1-6

CO4

R
T

NOTES:
1. PFT, CO1, and CO2 modular
jacks are equipped on the main
circuit card of the DK8.
2. CO3 requires one optional
QCDU and CO4 requires a
second QCDU to be installed.

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

4
3

2345

CO32

CO3
654321

1-6

CO21

654321

4
3

CO2

CO42

CO1

MODULAR
CORDS

T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

RJ11 MODULAR JACKS

BRIDGING
CLIPS

TO
NETWORK

4
3

1-6

PFT1
(BOTTOM)

POWER FAILURE
STANDARD TELEPHONE
NETWORK JACK: RJ11
FIC: 02LS2

FIGURE 8-3
DK8 MDF WIRING TO CO LINES (KSU AND QCDU)
8-8

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993
TO KCDU OR PDKU IN DK16 EXPANSION
UNIT OR AMPHENOL CONNCECTOR OF
DK8 OR DK16 KSU. W/FEMALE
CONNECTOR
BRIDGINGCLIPS

25 PAIR CABLE W/MAIL AMP CONNECTOR

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

CONNECT
DDCB TO
R1
PT1 CIRCUIT 1
PR1 OF KCDU
OR PDKU

SCREW
TERMINALS

CIRCUIT 2

9
10

DOOR PHONE A
MDFB (REAR VIEW)

3 4

CIRCUIT 3
(DK8 DDCB)

NOT
USED

6 5 4 3 2 1

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

DDCB
DOOR PHONE
MDFB
MODULAR
CORD

CIRCUIT 4
(DK8 DDCB)

- T5 (VOICE/DATA)
(GND) R5 (VOICE/DATA)
PT 5
(SEE TABLE 8-D)
PR 5

CIRCUIT 6

HKSU

2-PAIR
MODULAR
CORDS

MDFB
DOOR
PHONE B
OR DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

CIRCUIT 7

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUIT 8

AB C

2 3 4 5

MODULAR
CORD

MDFB
DOOR
PHONE C

See Note 3 & 4
MDFB (DOOR PHONE) STATION NUMBERS
DK8 PORT # DK16 PORT #

551

552

553

554

555

556

NOTES:
1. This figure shows DDCB connected to CKT5 of Base Unit
2. DDCB "B" output options:
SW1: Always in DOOR position.
SW2: DOOR position; “B” connects to door phone.
LOCK position; “B” connects to door lock.
3. DDCB may be connected to DK8 circuit 3 (Port 02) and/or
circuit 4 (Port 03)
4. DDCB may be connected to circuit 5, Port 4, of DK16 Base Unit
or circuit 1 (Port 12) of KCDU or PDKU of DK16 Expansion
Unit.
5. See Table 8-D for cable lengths.

FIGURE 8-4
DK8/DK16 MDF WIRING DDCB AND DOOR LOCK CONTROL
8-9

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993
MDF BLOCK NO.
COLOR
CODE
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-GN
GN-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V

KSTU/QSTU

CKT
PORT
DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER
T
R
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
23
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
31
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
41,2
NOT USED
NOT USED

INTERCOM
NUMBER

STANDARD TELEPHONE/
DEVICE LOCATION

NOTE:
1. Circuit 3 and 4 are available on DK16 KSTU only.
2. Circuit 4 can support a Background Music (BGM) source, KSTU or PSTU, DK16 only.
3. Circuit 2 can support a Background Music (BGM) source, QSTU Port 19, DK8 only.

FIGURE 8-5
DK8 QSTU/DK16 KSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD
CO LINE CROSS-CONNECT RECORD
MDF PAIR
NUMBERS
RJ11C/RJ14C
RJ11C
RJ11C
RJ11C
RJ11C
RJ14C
RJ14C

CO LINE
NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

BASE UNIT
(KCDU/PCOU)
DK8 KSU
DK16 BASE UNIT,
FIXED SLOT 02
KCDU/PCOU
SLOT 04, 05
(DK16 ONLY)

FIGURE 8-6
DK8 AND DK16 CO LINE RECORD

8-10

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

DB-25 RS-232
(MALE)

TO:
PDIU-DS,
ASCII
TERMINAL,
EXTERNAL
20
MODEM,
SMDR PRINTER,
OR ACCOUNTING
DEVICE

TD
RD
DSR
SG
CD
DTR

Y
W

G
BL
R
BK

6 (W)

6-PIN MODULAR
JACK

TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR
2
3
4-5
6
7
8
20
5
6
N/A
4
1
2
3
Y W
BR
G BL BK R

NOTE: QSMU TTY/SMDR
PROGRAM OPTION:

QSMU TTY/SMDR
6-PIN MODULAR
JACK
QSMU PCB

PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT
PIN NO.
TTY
1
TYRD
2
TYTD
3
TYDSR
4
5
6

PROGRAM 10-3
LED04 ON
LED04 OFF

1
6-WIRE
MODULAR CORD

PPTC PIN-OUT
LEAD NAME
DB25 PINS
MODULAR PINS
WIRE COLOR

TTY
(6-PIN
MODULAR
JACK)

6-1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

NOTE 1: If connected to an external Hayes compatible
modem, interchange pin 2 and pin 3, and pin 20
and 8. Send AT&C1 ATSO = 1
command to external modem to track status of
carrier detect signal.
1 (BL)
NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other
types of modular adaptors.

TYDTR
TYCD
TYSG

SMDR
SMRD
SMTD
SMDSR
SMDTR
SMCD
SMSG

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS:
OPTION
TTY
SMDR

DATA
BITS
7
8

STOP
BITS PARITY
EVEN
1
NONE
1

TTY/SMDR SPEED: 1200 BPS

TTY
SMDR

FIGURE 8-7
DK8 QSMU TTY/SMDR WIRING

8-11

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO BASE UNIT (P5)
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

STATION CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)

T1 (VOICE/DATA)
R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1 (ADD, POWER)
PR1 (ADD. POWER)

CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2
OR PDIU-DS

CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3
OR PDIU-DS

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)

PT1

PR1

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4
OR PDIU-DS
CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5
OR PDIU-DS
OR DDCB

RJ11

2 3 4 5
PR

GND
PR

MODULAR
CORD

(-)
T

GND
R

(-)
PT

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)
(WITH OR WITHOUT
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)

CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6
OR PDIU-DS
(SEE
NOTE 2)
CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7
OR PDIU-DS
T8 (VOICE/DATA)
R8 (VOICE/DATA)
PT (ADD, POWER)
PR (ADD. POWER)
RELAY CONTACT
NOT USED

R1
T1

STD TEL
CIRCUIT 1

PT8

NOT USED
R1
T1

R
R8

PR8

STD TEL
CIRCUIT 2

6 5 4 3 2 1

NOT USED
R3
T3

2 3 4 5
PR

STD TEL
CIRCUIT 3

GND
PR

MODULAR
CORD

NOT USED
R4
T4

RJ11

STD TEL CIRCUIT 4
OR OPTIONAL BGM
SOURCE

NOTES:
1. Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)
(Reference to FG ground)
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for
long station runs per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
3. Standard Telephone circuits 1 ~ 4 require a KSTU in the base unit.

209

219

229

239

249

Night 1

208

218

228

238

248

All Call

207

217

227

237

247

257

206

216

226

236

246

256

205

215

225

235

245

255

204

214

224

234

244

254

203

213

223

233

243

253

202

212

222

232

242

252

201

211

221

231

241

251

200

210

220

230

240

250

GND
R

DDSS/BLF CONSOLE
(CIRCUIT 8 0NLY)
— OR —
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 8)
— OR —
PDIU-DS

FIGURE 8-8
DK16 MDF WIRING/BASE UNIT P5 AMPHENOL STATION AND RELAY CONNECTIONS
8-12

(-)
T

(-)
PT

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

2345

654321

2345

654321

4
3

1-6

R
T

4
3

1-6

2345

CO1
R
T

4
3

1-6

CO4
2345

CO3

CO3
654321

1-6

CO2

654321

13
BK

4
3

CO2

DK16 BASE UNIT
MAIN CIRCUIT
BOARD MODULAR
JACKS (TOP)
CO4

MODULAR
CORDS

CO1

T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
T4
R4

RJ11 MODULAR JACKS

BRIDGING
CLIPS

TO
NETWORK

R
T

4
3

1-6

PFT
(BOTTOM)

POWER FAILURE
STANDARD TELEPHONE
NETWORK JACK: RJ11
FIC: 02LS2

FIGURE 8-9
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO BASE UNIT
8-13

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PDKU
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

STATION CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS

(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)

T1 (VOICE/DATA)
R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1 (ADD, POWER)
PR1 (ADD. POWER)

CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2
OR PDIU-DS

CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3
OR PDIU-DS

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)

PT1

PR1

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4
OR PDIU-DS

2 3 4 5
PR

CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5
OR PDIU-DS

RJ11

GND
PR

MODULAR
CORD

CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6
OR PDIU-DS

(-)
T

GND
R

(-)
PT

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)

CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT7
OR PDIU-DS
T8 (VOICE/DATA)
R8 (VOICE/DATA)
PT (ADD, POWER)
PR (ADD. POWER)

(SEE NOTE 2)

PT8

PR8

NOT USED

RJ11

6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 4 5
PR

MODULAR
CORD

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

209

219

229

239

249

Night 1

208

218

228

238

248

All Call

207

217

227

237

247

257

206

216

226

236

246

256

205

215

225

235

245

255

204

214

224

234

244

254

203

213

223

233

243

253

202

212

222

232

242

252

201

211

221

231

241

251

200

210

220

230

240

250

GND

(-)

GND

(-)

DDSS/BLF CONSOLE
(CIRCUIT 8 0NLY)
— OR —
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 8)
— OR —
PDIU-DS (WITH PDKU2)

FIGURE 8-10
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) AND DIGITAL DSS CONSOLE (DDSS) TO PDKU
8-14

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PDKU/KCDU/BASE UNIT
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR BRIDGING
CLIPS
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)

STATION CABLING

(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T8
R8
PT8
PR8

T1 (VOICE/DATA)
R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1 (ADD, POWER)
PR1 (ADD. POWER)

CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2
OR PDIU-DS

PT1

CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3
OR PDIU-DS

PR1
W

RJ11

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4
OR PDIU-DS

2- OR 4-WIRE
MODULAR CORD DB-25
FEMALE
TO RJ11 JACK
CONNECTOR
ON BOTTOM
OF PDIU-DI/
PDIU-DI2

CIRCUIT 5 TO DKT5
OR PDIU-DS

CIRCUIT 6 TO DKT6
OR PDIU-DS

R
R1

GND
PR

(-)
T

GND (-)
R
PT
TO PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OR ASCII
TERMINAL, ETC.

RS-232
3
CABLE
(SEE SECTION 100-016-207)

(SEE NOTE 2)

T7 (VOICE/DATA)
R7 (VOICE/DATA)
PT (ADD, POWER)
PR (ADD. POWER)

DIGITAL
TELEPHONE (DKT 1)
(WITH OR WITHOUT
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2)

CIRCUIT 8 TO DKT8
OR DDSS

T8
PR8

PT8
W
NOT USED

RJ11

6 5 4 3 2 1

GND (-)
PR
T

(-)
PT

DB-25
FEMALE CONNECTOR

2- OR 4-WIRE
MODULAR CORD
TO RJ11 JACK ON
THE BACK SIDE
OF PDIU-DS

DIU

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

GND
R

TOSHIBA

TO MODEM, PRINTER,
OR HOST COMPUTER
ETC.

RS-232
NOTES:
3
CABLE
1. Voltage levels:
(SEE SECTION 100-016-207)
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
PDIU-DS
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)
(Reference to SG ground)
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating on
reserve power per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
RS-232 cable length is max 50 ft with 24 AWG wire.
DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 7 with PDKU1; all Base Unit, KCDU, and PDKU2 digital circuits support DIUs.
3
4. Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIU.
5. KCDU provides circuits 1 ~ 4 only.
POWER

READY

CONNECT

FIGURE 8-11
DK16 MDF WIRING FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONES (DKTS) WITH PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 AND PDIU-DS TO
PDKU, KCDU, OR BASE UNIT
8-15

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993
MDF BLOCK NO.
COLOR
CODE
W-Bl
Bl-W
W-O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-Br
Br-W
W-S
S-W
R- Bl
Bl-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-Br
Br-R
R-S
S-R
Bk-Bl
Bl-Bk
Bk-O
O-Bk
Bk-G
G-Bk
Bk-Br
Br-Bk
Bk-S
S-Bk
Y-Bl
Bl-Y

SLOT NO.

CKT
PORT
DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER
T
R
1
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
2
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
3
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
4
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
5
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
6
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
7
PWR T
PWR R
T
R
8
PWR T
PWR R

DIGITAL TELEPHONE/
DEVICE LOCATION

INTERCOM
NUMBER
6

NOTES:
1. Indicate if PDIU-DS, digital telephone (with or without PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 or ADM) or DDSS console
(number 1 or 2) is connected.
2. PDIU-DS and PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2 can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 7 only on PDKU1; all Base Unit,
KCDU, and PDKU2 digital circuits support DIUs.
3. Expansion Unit slots 04 and 05 only can support DIUs.
4. For KCDU, only ckt number 1 thru 4 apply.
5. Make copies as necessary.
6. PDKU and KCDU Circuit 1 can support DDCB. Base Unit Circuit 5 can support DDCB.
7. DK8 circuit 3 and or circuit 4 can support DDCB.

FIGURE 8-12
DK8 OR DK16 PDKU, KCDU, DK8 KSU OR DK16 BASE KSU DIGITAL STATION/MDF
CROSS CONNECT RECORD

8-16

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PEKU W/FEMALE
CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

STATION CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS
1

VOICE T1 (VT)
VOICE R1 (VR)
DATA T1 (DT)
DATA R1 (DR)

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24 AWG

VR
DT

OCAT

OCAR

CIRCUIT 2

DR
VT
VR
DT

CIRCUIT 3

DR
VT
VR
DT

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUIT 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

VT
VR
DT

CIRCUIT 5

MODULAR
CORD

VT
VR
DT

STATION

CIRCUIT 6

DR
VT
VR
DT

CIRCUIT 7

DR
VT
VR
DT

CIRCUIT 8

ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (OR)

ONLY IF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
RECEIVES "OFF-HOOK" CALLS

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 2

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 3

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 4

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 5

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 6

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 7

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 8
NOT USED

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

FIGURE 8-13
DK16 MDF WIRING/ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO PEKU

8-17

NOTES:
1. To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone
must have HVSU2 subassembly or combined
HVSU/HVSI subassemblies installed.
2. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be “on” for
electronic telephone to receive OCA.
3. An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series
electronic telephones for headset or HESB,
loud bell option.
4. All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from
PEKU to electronic telephone (1000 ft).

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25 PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PEKU W/FEMALE
CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

BRIDGING
CLIPS
1

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK
NOTE: See Program 29 to assign DSS buttons.

VOICE T1
VOICE R1
DATA T1
DATA R1

CIRCUIT 2

CIRCUIT 3

JACKETED
STATION CABLE
TWISTED PAIR
24 AWG

CIRCUIT 4

TO
OCA
T1

Y
TO
OCA
R1

6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6

CIRCUIT 5

MODULAR
CORD

STATION

NOTE: See Program 28
for electronic telephone
to DSS assignments.

CIRCUIT 6

VOICE PAIR-NOT USED
CIRCUIT 7
DATA TIP 7
DATA RING 7

ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
ASSOCIATED
WITH HDSS

VOICE PAIR-NOT USED
CIRCUIT 8
DATA TIP 8
DATA RING 8
OCA T1
X
OCA R1
Y

T7
ONLY IF
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
RECEIVES
OFF-HOOK CALLS

CIRCUIT 4
CIRCUIT 5

NOTE: Place
PEKU SW1 to DSS.

CIRCUIT 7

6 5 4 3 2 1

CIRCUITS 7&8 T/R
PAIR ORDER MUST BE
WIRED AS SHOWN

CIRCUIT 6

GN
T8

CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 3

2 3 4 5

MODULAR
CORD

DSS

CIRCUIT 8

EKT
NOT USED

SW1

NOTE: All cable 24 AWG max
loop resistance: 20 ohms
from PEKU to DSS (500 ft).

HDSS/BLF CONSOLE

FIGURE 8-14
DK16 MDF WIRING/HDSS CONSOLE AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WIRING TO PEKU
8-18

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PEKU W/FEMALE
CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

STATION CABLING (24 AWG, TWISTED PAIRS)

BRIDGING
CLIPS

VOICE T1 (VT)
VOICE R1 (VR)
DATA T1 (DT)
DATA R1 (DR)

TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE

VT2
VR2
DT2

CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

DR2
VT3

BACKGROUND MUSIC
SOURCE OUTPUT
(600 OHMS; 1V RMS MAX)

VR3
DT3
DR3

NOT USED

VT
VR
DT
DR

CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

VT
VR
DT

CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

DR
VT
VR
DT
DR

CIRCUIT 6 TO
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE

VT
VR
DT
DR
VT
VR
DT
DR

CIRCUIT 7 TO
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
OR HDSS

NOTES:
1. Program 10-2, button/LED 09 "on", for
BGM connection to port 02. See Program 19 for
slot assignment.
2. Cut W5 jumper on PEKU.
3. Provide BGM to electronic telephone speakers
and external page.
4. Volume is adjusted at BGM source
only (not at PEKU).

CIRCUIT 8 TO
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
OR HDSS
OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (OR) TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 2 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 3 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 4 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 5 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 6 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 7 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA

OT
OR

CIRCUIT 8 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA
NOT USED

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

FIGURE 8-15
DK16 PEKU BACKGROUND MUSIC CONNECTION

8-19

SLOT NO.

CKT
PORT
INTERCOM
DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
VT
VR
1
DT
DR
VT
VR
2
DT
DR
VT
VR
3
DT
DR
VT
VR
4
DT
DR
VT
VR
5
DT
DR
VT
VR
6
DT
DR
VT
VR
7
DT
DR
VT
VR
8
DT
DR

ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE/
DEVICE LOCATION

NOTES:
1. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected (see Program 10-2 and 19); BGM connects to VT
and VR, circuit 3 only (DT and DR not used).
2. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS console.
3. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring.

FIGURE 8-16
DK16 PEKU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD

8-20

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PSTU
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

BRIDGING
CLIPS

JACKETED TWISTED STATION CABLE
24 AWG

TIP 1
RING 1
NOT USED
T2
R2

NOT USED
T3
(ckt 3 CAN SUPPORT BGM)
R3
NOT USED
T4
R4

6 5 4 3 2 1

NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6

T5
R5
NOT USED
MODULAR
CORD

T6
R6

TIP

NOT USED

STANDARD TELEPHONE,
VOICE MAIL PORT, OR
SIMILAR DEVICE

T7
R7
NOT USED
T8 (ckt 8 CAN
R8 SUPPORT BGM)

NOT USED

RING

NOTES:
1. All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance 300 ohms from PSTU to standard
telephone/VM port.
2. Standard telephones may be on- or
off-premises. Off-premises connection
is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack.
3. Connect up to two telephone ringers
to each Tip and Ring pair.
4. W1, ring voltage option;
L = 130V P-P
H = 190V P-P
5. Two ringers maximum per port, "H" or "L"
position.
DPFT
POWER FAILURE
TRANSFER BOX
(J1)
DG
(J1, 50)

DG
-24 V

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

FIGURE 8-17
DK16 MDF WIRING/STANDARD TELEPHONE, VOICE MAIL TO PSTU

8-21

-24 VOLTS
(J1, 25)

DKSU SLOT NO.

CKT
PORT
DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER
T
R
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
2
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
3
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
4
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
5
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
6
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
7
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
8
NOT USED
NOT USED

STANDARD TELEPHONE/
DEVICE LOCATION

INTERCOM
NUMBER

NOTES:
1. Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc.
2. Circuit 3 or 8 can support a Background Music (BGM) source.

FIGURE 8-18
DK16 PSTU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD

8-22

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PESU W/FEMALE
STATION CABLING JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS (24 AWG)
CONNECTOR
BRIDGING CLIPS
TIP 1
W-BL
26
BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

RJ11

RING 1
NOT USED
TIP 2
RJ11

RING 2
R
BK

CIRCUIT 3
NOT USED

Y
BL

24
AWG

STANDARD TELEPHONE 1
VOICE MAIL PORT OR
SIMILAR DEVICE

RING

TIP

DT
DR
VT
VR
DT
DR

RJ11

CIRCUIT 6
TO ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE 2

VT
VR

RING

VOICE MAIL PORT OR
SIMILAR DEVICE

STANDARD TELEPHONE 2

VOICE T1 (VT) 5
VOICE R1 (VR) 5
DATA T1 (DT) 5
DATA R1 (DR) 5

TIP

654321

CIRCUIT 4
NOT USED

654321

NOT USED

(PORTS COUNT
IN SOFTWARE)

R
DT
OCAT

BK
W

CIRCUIT 7 TO
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE 3
CIRCUIT 8 TO
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE 4
OR BGM
(NOTE 5)

NOTE:
Two-ringers max may be
connected (high or low)
to Tip/Ring.

GN
Y

OCAR

654321
123456

MODULAR
CORD

STATION

OT AND OR:
ONLY IF
ELECTRONIC
TELEPHONE
RECEIVES
OFF-HOOK CALL
ANNOUNCE CALLS

ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
(NOTE 5)
NOT USED
STRAP OPTION:
P90 - RING VOLTAGE OPTION (CIRCUIT 1 & 2):
L = LOW LEVEL (130V P-P)
H = HIGH LEVEL (190V P-P)
OCA T1 (OT) 5
OCA R1 (OR) 5
OT
OR CIRCUIT 6
OT
OR CIRCUIT 7
OT
OR CIRCUIT 8

NOTES: (Electronic telephone Circuits 5~8)
1. To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone must
have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed.
2. Program 31, button/LED 03 must be “on” for electronic
telephone to receive OCA.
3. An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series electronic
telephones for headset or HESB; Loud Ringing Bell option.
4. All cable 24 AWG, max 40 ohm loop resistance from PESU
to electronic telephone (1000 ft).
5. HDSS connection is not available with PESU.

NOT USED

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

NOTES: (Standard telephone circuits 1 & 2)
1. All cable 24 AWG; max loop resistance - 300 ohms from PESU to standard telephone/VM port.
2. Standard telephones may be on- or off-premises. Off-premises connection is made via OL13A FIC, and RJ21X jack.
3. Two ringers max per port.
4. Circuit 6 and 7 can provide interface for an external conference amplifier (Prog 10-3).

FIGURE 8-19
DK16 PESU CIRCUIT CARD WIRING DIAGRAM
8-23

CKT
PORT
INTERCOM
DEVICE/STANDARD TELEPHONE/
DESIGNATION NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE LOCATION
T
R
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
T
R
2
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
N/A
N/A
3
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
N/A
4
N/A
NOT USED
NOT USED
VT
VR
5
DT
DR
2
VT
VR
6
DT
DR
1, 2
VT
VR
7
DT
DR
1, 3
VT
VR
8
DT
DR

NOTES:
1. HDSS is not allowed.
2. Indicate if external amplifier is connected.
3. Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected; BGM connects to VT and VR,
circuit 8 only (DT and DR not used).
4. OCA wiring not shown, see MDF-to-electronic telephone wiring.

FIGURE 8-20
DK16 PESU STATION/MDF CROSS CONNECT RECORD

8-24

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

GN
T1

R2
TELCO-PROVIDED
MODULAR BLOCK,
625-TYPE OR
EQUIVALENT

6 5 4 3 2 1
PCOU
#4
#3
#2
#1

2 3 4 5

MODULAR
CORD
5
4
SAME 3
2

R4
R3
T3
T4

CO3+4

5
4
3
2

R2
R1
T1
T2

6 543 21

9
10

R
R1

6 543 21

9
10

T1
R1
T2
R2

1-6

T1
R1
T2
R2

BRIDGING
CLIPS

1-6

TO
NETWORK

CO1+2

PCOU
PIN-OUT

NETWORK JACK: RJ14C
FIC: 02LS2

FIGURE 8-21
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES TO PCOU
8-25

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

T1
R1
T2
R2

CO LINE CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS
1

T1
R1
T2
R2
R

T1
BK

6 5 4 3 2 1
KCDU
2 3 4 5

CO2 LED
CO1 LED

MODULAR
CORD
5
4
3
2

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

R2
R1
T1
T2

CO1+2
MODULAR
JACK

KCDU
PIN-OUT

NETWORK JACK: RJ14C
FIC: 02LS2

TO KCDU
W/FEMALE CONNECTOR

6 543 21

1-6

TO
NETWORK

STATION CABLING
BRIDGING
CLIPS

(-)
(GND)
(-)
(GND)
T2
R2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4

T1 (VOICE/DATA)
R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1 (ADD, POWER)
PR1 (ADD. POWER)

CIRCUIT 2 TO DKT2
OR PDIU-DS

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 OR 2 PAIR, SEE NOTE 2)

PT1
CIRCUIT 3 TO DKT3
OR PDIU-DS

PR1
RJ11

6 5 4 3 2 1
CIRCUIT 4 TO DKT4
OR PDIU-DS
2- OR 4-WIRE
MODULAR CORD
TO RJ11 JACK
ON BOTTOM
OF PDIU-DI

GND
PR (5)

(-)
T (4)

GND
R (3)

NOT USED
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE
(WITH OR WITHOUT
PDIU-DI/PDIU-DI2) OR
PDIU-DS
- or DDCB

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

NOTES:
1. Voltage levels:
T, PT = -26.3 ~ 27.8 VDC
R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND)
(Reference to SG ground)
2. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs or when operating
on reserve power per Table 8-D. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also.
3. ADMs and/or DIUs can be connected to circuits 1 ~ 4, DDCB can be connected to Circuit 1.

FIGURE 8-22
DK16 MDF WIRING/CO LINES AND DIGITAL TELEPHONES TO KCDU
8-26

(-)
PT (2)

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

PIOU PCB

PG.OUT 1
PG.IN 1

PIOU
ONLY

PIOU 25PR.
CONNECTIONS

MDF 66M
BLOCK

PIN
COLOR
15 . S-Bk
40 . Bk-S

PIN
30
29

PG.OUT 2

PG.IN 2

O-Y
Y-O

34
33

PG.OUT 3
PG.IN 3

Br-Y

Y-Br

PG.OUT 4

Bl-V
V-Bl

PG.IN 4

32
7

.
.

R-O
O-R

13
14

MULTI-ZONE PAGE
30W MAX./COMPOSITE IMPEDANCE
300 OHMS
ZONE (35)

ZONE (36)

ZONE (37)

ALL
ZONE
PAGE
(39)

ZONE (38)

SELECT RELAY FUNCTION
WITH PROGRAM 77-1
DOOR LOCK OR
AMP. CONTROL
BREAK
PI0

DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

MAKE
RCA JACK

MUTE

BASE UNIT
600Ω (DUPLEX)

MUTE CONTROL ALSO
PROVIDED BY BASE
UNIT PAGE RELAY
(PIN 42 AND 17 OF
P5 AMPHENOL)

AMPLIFIER
MULTI-ZONE

J7
23

Gn-V

Bk-Bl

Bl-Bk

COMMON
N.C.
P12
N.O.

ALARM
SENSOR

ALARM
SYSTEM

TAPE
PLAYER

BREAK P11
34
9

.
.

R-Br
Br-R

17
18

CONTROL

MAKE

SELECT RELAY FUNCTION
WITH PROGRAM 77-1:
NIGHT RELAY OR
MOH CONTROL

AMP.

EXTERNAL
BACKGROUND
MUSIC
SOURCE

MDF
CONNECTIONS
ALL WIRES SHOULD
BE JACKETED 24 AWG.
TWISTED PAIRS

NIGHT
BELL

NOTE:
This figure shows PIOU relay callouts. See Chapter 5 for PIOUS relay callouts.

FIGURE 8-23
DK16 MDF WIRING/PIOU PERIPHERALS (25-PAIR)

8-27

TO MUSIC-ON-HOLD
INPUT ON P6 CONNECTOR
ON BASE UNIT.

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993
NOTE 1: If connected to external modem, interchange pin 2 and pin 3,
and pin 20 and 8. Send AT&C1 command to external modem
to track status of carrier detect signal.

DSR
SG
CD
DTR

Y
W

1 (BL)

G
BL
R
BK

14
TO PRINTER
PDIU-DS,
OR CALL
ACCOUNTING
20
DEVICE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

• 8–BIT
• NO–PARITY
• 1–STOP BIT

TD
RD
DSR
SG
CD
DTR

Y
W

3-PAIR
MODULAR
CORD MAX.
50 FT WITH
24 AWG

TTY
(IMDU)
(6-PIN
MODULAR
JACK)
SMDR
(6-PIN
MODULAR
JACK)

6
1

STATION MESSAGE
DETAIL RECORDING
PORT

G
BL
BK
R

PIOUS
CARD

SMSG
SMCD
SMDTR
SMDSR
SMTD
SMRD

1 (BL)

SW2
LED
CD4

6 (W)
25

TYSG
TYCD
TYDTR
TYDSR
TYTD
TYRD

6-PIN MODULAR
JACK

TOSHIBA RS-232/MODULAR
ADAPTOR PART NO. PPTC

DB-25 RS-232
(MALE)

MAINTENANCE
PORT

6 (W)
25

NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other
types of modular adaptors.

1-6

• 7–BIT
• EVEN PARITY
• 1–STOP

TD
RD

6-1

PDIU-DS,
TO ASCII
TERMINAL,
OR
EXTERNAL
MODEM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

6-1

1-6

DB-25 RS-232
(MALE)

6-PIN MODULAR
JACK

NOTE 3: PIOUS option settings:
SW1 – Sets the SMDR baud rate
to be 300 or 1200 BPS.
SW2 – Sets the PIOU programming speed to be
300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack).
LED CO4 “On” = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”.
LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”.
SW3 – Sets the PIOUS to operate with the
IMDU or an external device
connected to the TTY modular jack.
MODEM – For IMDU operation (7, even, 1)
– For ASCII terminal (8, none, 1)
TTY
or external modem (8, none, 1).
W4 – Sets the IMDU and TTY jack
for bell or CCITT specification.
BELL - "W4 not installed".
NOTE 4: PDIU-DS jumpers should be set to
the B-C position when connected
to the PIOUS TTY or SMDR port.

TB1 TO MDF:

NOTE: 600 ohm Page
is not functional
on DK16

600 OHM
PAGE
DOOR LOCK/
AMP, MUTE

PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT
PIN NO.
TTY
1
TYRD
2
TYTD
3
TYDSR
4
TYDTR
5
TYCD
6
TYSG

SMDR
SMRD
SMTD
SMDSR
SMDTR
SMCD
SMSG

NIGHT
RELAY/ MOH
CONTROL
ALARM

PPTC PIN-OUT
LEAD NAME

TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR

DB25 PINS
MODULAR PINS

2
5

3
6

4-5
N/A

6
4

WIRE COLOR

FIGURE 8-24
DK16 PIOUS/TTY AND SMDR WIRING

8-28

7
1

8
2

BL BK

20
3
R

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

BASE UNIT

KSU BACKPLANE

MDF
PAGE
AND
BGM

RCA PAGE JACK J7

BREAK

DER

BREAK

DOOR
LOCK
CONTROL

MOH
SOURCE
UNIT

NHT

W2 MAKE

NHR

MUTE
CONTROL

DET

W1 MAKE
K1

600Ω

HESB
OR
PAGE
AMPLIFIER

Amplifier mute
control can also
be provided by
Page relay in
Base Units (Pin 42
and 17 of P5
amphenol
connector).

NIGHT BELL
NORMAL OPEN
ALMT
ALARM
SENSOR

ALM
ALMR
NORMAL
CLOSE

PIOUS
• All wiring connections must be 24 AWG twisted pairs.
• Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed.

RELAY OPTIONS:
• K1 (DE): DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 07
• K2 (NH): NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC-ON-HOLD CONTROL; PROGRAM 77-1, LED 05
• K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 AMP MAXIMUM

FIGURE 8-25
DK16 PIOUS PAGE/RELAY/ALARM CONNECTIONS

8-29

FACILITY
ALARM
UNIT

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

NOTE 1: If connected to an external Hayes compatible modem, interchange pin 2
and pin 3, and pin 20 and 8. Send AT&C1 8D2SO = 6AW
command to external modem

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

• 7–BIT
• EVEN PARITY
• 1–STOP BIT

TD
RD
DSR
SG
CD
DTR

Y
W

G
BL
R
BK

3-PAIR
MODULAR
CORD MAX.
50 FT WITH
24 AWG

DB-25 RS-232
(MALE)

• 8–BIT
• NO PARITY
• 1–STOP BIT

TD
RD
DSR
SG
CD
DTR

Y
W

1 (BL)

6-PIN MODULAR
JACK

NOTE 3: PIOU option settings:
SW1 – Sets the SMDR baud rate
to be 300 or 1200 BPS.
SW2 – Sets the PIOU programming speed to be
300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack).
LED CO4 “On” = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”.
LED CO4 “Off” = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”.
SW3 – Sets the PIOU to operate with the
IMDU or an external device
connected to the TTY modular jack.
MODEM – For IMDU operation (7, even, 1)
– For ASCII terminal (8, none, 1)
TTY
or external modem (8, none, 1).
P13 – Sets the IMDU and TTY jack
for bell or CCITT specification.
NOTE 4: PDIU-DS jumpers should be set to
the B-C position when connected t
o the PIOU TTY or SMDR port.

SMDR
(6-PIN
MODULAR
JACK)

6 (W)
25

TTY
(6-PIN
MODULAR
JACK)

STATION MESSAGE
DETAIL RECORDING
PORT

G
BL
BK
R

PIOU
CARD

SMSG
SMCD
SMDTR
SMDSR
SMTD
SMRD

6-1

TO PRINTER
PDIU-DS,
OR CALL
ACCOUNTING
DEVICE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TYSG
TYCD
TYDTR
TYDSR
TYTD
TYRD

6-PIN MODULAR
JACK

TOSHIBA RS-232/MODULAR
ADAPTOR PART NO. PPTC

MAINTENANCE
PORT

6 (W)
25

NOTE 2: Wire colors may vary with other
types of modular adaptors.

1 (BL)

1-6

6-1

PDIU-DS,
TO ASCII
TERMINAL,
OR
EXTERNAL
MODEM

1-6

DB-25 RS-232
(MALE)

SW2
LED
CD4

(25-PAIR
FEMALE
AMP.
JACK)
PIOU MODULAR PIN-OUT
PIN NO.

TTY

SMDR

1
2
3
4
5
6

TYRD
TYTD
TYDSR
TYDTR
TYCD
TYSG

SMRD
SMTD
SMDSR
SMDTR
SMCD
SMSG

SEE
PIOU/MDF
DRAWING
IN THIS
SECTION

PPTC PIN-OUT
LEAD NAME
DB25 PINS
MODULAR PINS
WIRE COLOR

FIGURE 8-26
DK16 PIOU SMDR/TTY OPTIONS AND WIRING

8-30

TD RD JUMPER DSR SG CD DTR
2
3
4-5
6
7
8
20
5
6
N/A
4
1
2
3
Y W
BR
G BL BK R

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

TO PEKU W/FEMALE
CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

Y-O

O-Y

Y-GN

GN-Y

Y-BR

BR-Y

Y-S

S-Y

V-BL

BL-V

V-O

O-V

V-GN

GN-V

V-BR

BR-V

V-S

S-V

BRIDGING
CLIPS
1

VT1

NOTES:
1. Amplifier or Repeater must have
Automatic Gain Control and be
FCC Registered from Part 68.
2. Refer to Manufacturer’s Installation
Documentation for Amplifier or
Line Repeater Pin numbering.
3. Connect to PEKU or PESU.

VR1
DT1

CIRCUIT 1 TO EKT

DR1
VT2
VR2
DT2

CIRCUIT 2 TO EKT

DR2
VT3
VR3
DT3

CIRCUIT 3 TO EKT

DR3
VT4
VR4
DT4

CIRCUIT 4 TO EKT

DR4

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
TWO-WAY AMPLIFIER
OR
LINE REPEATERS (SEE NOTE 1)

VT5
VR5
DT5

CIRCUIT 5 TO EKT

DR5
VT6
VR6

PEKU (OR PESU) CIRCUIT 6
VOICE PAIR

PORT A (CENTRAL OFFICE SIDE)

DT6
DR6
VT7
VR7

NOT USED
PEKU (OR PESU) CIRCUIT 7
VOICE PAIR

PORT B (SUBSCRIBER SIDE)

NOT USED

(SEE NOTE 2)

DT7
DR7
VT8

TO 117VAC

VR8
DT8

CIRCUIT 8 TO EKT

DR8

OCA T1 (OT)
OCA R1 (OR)
OT2
OR2

CIRCUIT 2

OT3
OR3

CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 4

PROGRAM 10-3
LED

SLOT
POSITION

CIRCUIT 5

LED 02, ON

OT4
OR4

SYSTEM PROGRAMS
• Program 10-3, circuit assignments:

OT5
OR5
OT6
OR6

CIRCUIT 6

OT7
OR7

CIRCUIT 7

OT8
OR8

CIRCUIT 8

A = 17
B = 18

CKT6
CKT7

• Program 10-1, LED 19 and 20 ON.
• Program 15-5, enable appropriate CO
lines for tandem connection.
• Program 78-2, enable appropriate CO
lines if amplified DISA is required.
• Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19 ON.

NOT USED

66M150 SPLIT BLOCK

FIGURE 8-27
DK16 MDF WIRING/AMPLIFIED TWO-CO LINE CONFERENCE
8-31

PEKU
PEKU OR
PESU PORT OR PESU
CIRCUIT
NUMBER

INSTALLATION-WIRING DIAGRAMS
SECTION 100-816-208
MARCH 1993

25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR

PDKU CONNECTOR
W-BL

BL-W

W-O

O-W

W-GN

GN-W

W-BR

BR-W

W-S

S-W

R-BL

BL-R

R-O

O-R

R-GN

GN-R

R-BR

BR-R

R-S

S-R

BK-BL

BL-BK

BK-O

O-BK

BK-GN

GN-BK

BK-BR

BR-BK

BK-S

S-BK

Y-BL

BL-Y

JACKETED TWISTED PAIRS
24AWG (1 PAIR)

STATION CABLING

BRIDGING
CLIPS

(-)
T1 (VOICE/DATA)
(GND) R1 (VOICE/DATA)
PT1
(NOT USED)
RT2
T2
DC OUTPUT
R2
CKT 2
PT2
PR2
T3
R3
PT3
PR3
T4
R4
PT4
PR4
T5
R5
PT5
PR5
T6
R6
PT6
PR6
T7
R7
PT7
PR7
T8
R8
PT8
PR8

R1
AC/DC EXTERNAL
POWER SOURCE
CKT 3

AC INPUT
6 5 4 3 2 1
CKT 4

TO 120 VAC
COMMERCIAL POWER
OUTLET

2 3 4 5
TR
2-PAIR
MOD CORD
REQUIRED

CKT 5
RJ11
CKT 6

CKT 7

(-)
T

GND
R

CKT 8

DIGITAL (1000 OR 2000 SERIES)
TELEPHONE
(WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU-DI/
PDIU-DI2)
-ORDDSS, DDCB, PDIU-DS

AC/DC EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS:
AC IN:
120 VDC ± 10%
DC OUT: 24 VDC ± 10%
160 MA (MIN.) DC CURRENT
200 MV P-P (MAX) AC RIPPLE ON DC OUTPUT

AC/DC power supplies that meet the above
requirements are available from most telephone
equipment supply houses.

EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS:
If the external power is installed, cut the
external power straps located inside the
digital telephone, DDSS, DDCB, or PDIUDS.
See Table 8-D at the front of this section for
external power requirements.

FIGURE 8-28
DK16 EXTERNAL POWER FOR DIGITAL TELEPHONE CONNECTION

8-32

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

FAULT FINDING PROCEDURES

STRATA DK FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.01
8.10
8.20
9

SUBJECT
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................
FAULT CLASSIFICATION ......................................................................................
FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES ......................................................................
DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS ..................................................................
FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDURES ...........................
DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION ..................................................................
DK16 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION ................................................................
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK...............................................................
Voltmeter Test ....................................................................................................
Ohmmeter Test ...................................................................................................
Cable Installation ................................................................................................
FAULT ISOLATION FLOWCHARTS ......................................................................
FLOWCHARTS ......................................................................................................
CHART NO. 1 — FAULT CLASSIFICATION ...................................................
CHART NO. 2 — CATASTROPHIC FAULTS ..................................................
CHART NO. 3 — STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS ...........................................
CHART NO. 4 — CO DIAL TONE FAULTS .....................................................
CHART NO. 5 — DSS CONSOLE FAULTS ....................................................
CHART NO. 6 — VOICE MAIL/(EXTERNAL) AUTO ATTENDANT
FAULTS ...............................................................................
CHART NO. 7 — STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
FAULTS ...............................................................................
CHART NO. 8 — REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS ....................................

PAGE
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
5
5
5
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

TABLE LIST
TABLE
A
B
C
D
E

TITLE
PAGE
FLOWCHARTS ...................................................................................................... 1
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER ........................... 6
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER ............................ 6
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING VOLTMETER ........................... 6
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMMETER ............................ 6

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
1
2
3

TITLE
PAGE
FLOWCHART SYMBOLS ...................................................................................... 1
QPSU8 DC VOLTAGE TEST ................................................................................. 3
KPSU16 DC VOLTAGE TEST ............................................................................... 3

-i-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

as described in Programming Procedures.
It is very important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware.

1 GENERAL
1.01 This section describes the maintenance procedures used to diagnose faults in the STRATA
DK8 and DK16 digital key telephone system. Faults
are classified and then cleared by replacing the
malfunctioning unit and performing operational
tests in the sequences prescribed by the fault
clearing flowcharts in Paragraph 9.

3.02 Initialize the system (Program 90, 92, and
03) before testing new systems or when in DK16
cases,, changing the KFCU, Feature cartridge (if
instructions specify).

2 FAULT CLASSIFICATION

3.03 Faults in the DK8 and DK16 are cleared by
replacing PCBs, telephones (digital or electronic)
or the power supply, as instructed in the flowcharts.

2.01 A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to
ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical
sequence (Chart No. 1).

3.04 Five symbols are used in the flowcharts,
which are identified in Figure 1.

2.02 An assumption is made in the flowcharts that
the fault was discovered and reported by a digital
or electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore,
are classified according to the way they would
appear at the digital or electronic telephone.

3.05 The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to
permit rapid fault localization within the system. All
fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classification Flowchart, which is arranged in the correct

2.03 Faults and associated flowcharts in Table A
are organized into the following categories:

Marking points of a
flowchart sequence.

TABLE A
FLOWCHARTS
Flowchart
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Important notes affecting the
fault clearing procedure.

Title
Fault Classification
Catastrophic Faults
Station Dial Tone Faults
CO Line Dial Tone Faults
DSS Console Faults
Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant
(VM/AA) Faults
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) Faults
Remote Maintenance Faults

Question to be answered
YES or NO.
Progression TO or FROM
another flowchart location.
Letters and numbers denote
the exact entrance or exit
points.
Statement of a required
action.

3 FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES
3.01 Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure
that it is in the system and not caused by associated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH
source, etc.
IMPORTANT!
Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries

FIGURE 1
FLOWCHART SYMBOLS
fault locating sequence.

-1-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993
3.06 The following precautions must be observed
when handling PCBs:

6 DK8 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION
6.01 If a DK8 hardware fault is suspected, check
the hardware using the following procedure:

DO NOT:
• Drop a PCB.
• Stack one PCB on top of another.
• Handle a PCB without discharging any

1) Make sure the BATT jumper plug (SW1 on the
KSU motherboard) is in the ON position to
save the system’s customer data base.

static electricity from your person by
touching the grounded cabinet.
• Touch PCB contacts with your fingers.

2) Unplug HPFB battery cable from BATT connector on QPSU8 Power Supply (see Figure
2).

Important!
If the fault is not cleared by substituting a
PCB, the original PCB must be reinstalled
in the KSU before trying another PCB.

3) Remove all piggy-back PCBs from the DK8
motherboard one at a time. Retest to check if
the problem is cleared each time a PCB is
removed. If it is found that a particular PCB is
causing the problem, replace that PCB and
retest (piggy-back PCBs include QSTU,
QCDU, QRCU, QCNU, and QSMU).

4 DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS
4.01 When a defective system apparatus is
shipped for repair, the apparatus must be packed
in a suitable container (the original box is highly
recommended), as follows:
a) Anti-static containers for all other PCBs and
Feature cartridge.
b) Plastic bags for digital or electronic telephones, KSU, etc.

4) Test power supply as follows (refer to Figure
2):
a) Plug the AC power cable into an outlet.
• The “AC” LED on the power supply
should light green.
b) Turn the power supply switch to the ON
position.
• The “DC” LED on the power supply
should light green.
c) Using the voltmeter, measure the voltages referenced to frame ground (FG) at
the power supply connector CN3 pins
(test points) and pin 42 of IC5 located on
the motherboard (Figure 2). The voltages should fall within the ranges below.
If the voltages do not fall within the
range, unplug the DC power pins from
power supply connector CN3 and measure +24V again at the same location; if
the voltages remain unacceptable, replace the power supply (see Section
100-816-204).
• J19 Green Wires: 0V
• J19 Yellow Wires: +24V
§ Range: +26.3V ~ +27.8V
• IC5, Pin 42, +5V
§ Range: +4.5V ~ +5.5V
d) If the +24V tests within range but +5V is
not with-in specification, the KSU must
be replaced.

4.02 NEVER WRITE ON THE APPARATUS
ITSELF! Describe the nature of the defect on an
information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the
unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain
attached during the testing and repair process.
Return tags are available from Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc., TSD Division.

5 FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND
ELIMINATION PROCEDURES
5.01 The DK8 or DK16, KSU common control
circuits or DK16 KFCU may contain a “soft” fault
due to an extremely high level of static electricity.
If it is found defective during the fault finding
procedures, attempt to clear a soft fault prior to
returning the KSU or KFCU for repair. The
correct procedure for this is to perform the
initialization procedure, and then re-program
the system as necessary to test for the fault. If
the fault returns after these procedures are
performed, tag the defective KSU or KFCU and
return it for repair.

-2-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

RAM STORAGE
BATTERY

IC5, PIN 42, +5V
TEST POINT (+4.5 ~ +5.5)

RAM STORAGE BATTERY JUMPER PLUG
J20-CONNECTOR FOR QSMU
PCB INSTALLATION
POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREW

QPSU8 POWER SUPPLY

CN4, BATTERY
CONNECTOR PLUG
POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREW
WARNING

HPFB
GROUND WIRE

Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.

F.G. SCREW FOR
THIRD WIRE GROUND
CONNECTION

BATTERY
CONNECTOR
FOR HPFB
CN4

CN3

CN1, AC
POWER CORD
CONNECTOR

FG
J19

SW1
J20

J16

J18
CONF

42
QMA
ROM

AC AND DC
POWER
INDICATOR LEDs
F201, 3 AMP FUSE

ON OFF
J17
CONF

POWER SUPPLY
MOUNTING SCREW

DC POWER
ON/OFF SWITCH

IC5

YELLOW WIRES:
+26.3V ~ +27,8V
GREEN WIRES:
(FG) OV

FIGURE 2
QPSU8 DC VOLTAGE TEST
DK16 KSU
KPSU 16A POWER SUPPLY

BATT
±
PULL
LOCK
PUSH
UNLOCK

AC
DC
DC POWER

–24 VOLT
CIRCUIT BREAKER

(FG) SCREW
DK16 BASE UNIT
MOTHERBOARD

DC OUT (P9)
CONNECTOR
(VOLTAGE
TEST POINTS)

RESERVE
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
FOR PBTC CABLE

GREEN/YELLOW: 0V
BLACK: 0V
YELLOW: –26.3V ~ –27.8V
RED: +4.5 ~ +5.5
BLUE: –4.5 ~ –5.5
GREEN: 0V

FIGURE 3
KPSU16 DC VOLTAGE TEST
-3-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993
Using a voltmeter or other device which checks
voltage, measure the voltages referenced to
frame ground (FG) at the DC OUT connector
pins (test points) located on the motherboard
(Figure 2). The voltages should fall within the
ranges below. If the voltages do not fall within
the ranges, unplug the DC power pins from
the DC OUT connector and measure again at
the same location; if the ranges remain unacceptable, replace the Power Supply.
§ (FG) Yellow-Green Wire: 0V
§ Yellow Wire: – 24V
• Range: –26.3V ~ –27.8V
§ Red Wire: 5V
• Range: 4.5V ~ 5.5V
§ Blue Wire: –5V
• Range: –4.5V ~ –5.5V

Important Note:
Do not attempt to replace Fuse F201

7 DK16 HARDWARE FAULT ISOLATION
7.01 If a DK16 hardware fault is suspected, check
the hardware using the following procedure:
1) Make sure the BATT jumper plug (SW1 on
the base unit motherboard) is in the ON
position to save the system’s customer data
base.
2) Unplug the PBTC battery cable from BATT
connector on KPSU16 Power Supply (see
Figure 2).
3) Lightly press the -24V circuit breaker to ensure it has not opened (Figure 3). If the circuit
breaker has opened and will not rest, remove
assemblies (KSTU, KCOU, Expansion Unit
PCBs, Expansion Unit) one at a time and try
to reset -24V circuit breaker. If it is found lthat
one of the removable assemblies causes the
circuit breaker to open, replace that assembly. (See Section 100-816-205 for PCB removal and Expansion Unit installation and
removal.)
a) If the -24V circuit breaker cannot be
reset with all removable assemblies disconnected, disconnect the DC OUT connect (P9) from the Base unit motherboard
and try to reset the -24V breaker.
b) If the circuit breaker resets when the DC
OUT connector is removed, the Base
Unit or Power Supply may be defective.
Replace the Power Supply first (per Section 100-816-205) to avoid reprogramming the system.
c) If the -24V breaker continues to open
;after the power Supply is replaced, install the original Power supply onto the
DK16 Key Service Unit (KSU) and replace the KSU with another KSU.

4) Check system third wire ground per Section
100-816-202.
5) If the –24V circuit breaker, DC power, and
third wire ground are within required limits,
remove all hardware assemblies, one at a
time, and test to see if the fault is cleared
(remove KSTU, KCOU, K4RCU and Expansion Unit PCBs and remove Expansion Unit
per Section 100-816-205).
6) If the above hardware check did not clear the
fault, call your Technical Support Group.

8 STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK
8.01 Voltmeter Test
8.02 The continuity of the cable run between the
DK16 KSU and the digital or electronic telephone
is checked with a voltmeter as follows:
NOTE:
Perform the following at the locations indicated:
1. Modular block: Check all stations cables.
2. MDF: Check cable from KSU to MDF.
3. These tests also apply for troubleshooting
cable problems with DDCB and PDIU-DS
devices.
4. Refer to Section 100-816-208 for appropriate
MDF wiring diagrams.

4) If the –24V circuit breaker is not open (Step 3)
check the Power Supply DC voltages as
follows:

-4-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993
eliminate all cable splits.
1) Disconnect the digital or electronic telephone.
2) Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will
not operate if cable runs contain any type
(short or long) of cable bridge. Test for and
eliminate all cable bridges.

2) Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the
wires of the two pairs to verify the readings
shown in Table B for electronic telephone
ports (PEKU or PESU). Refer to Table D for
digital telephone ports. The reading will be a
plus or minus depending on meter lead placement.

3) When installing the station cable, do not run
parallel to and within 3 feet of an AC power
line. AC power lines should be crossed at
right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid
running station wire pairs near devices that
generate electrical noise, such as neon or
fluorescent light fixtures.

3) An improper reading indicates an open,
crossed or shorted wire.
4) For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or electronic) cable, a more precise check is made
using an ohmmeter.

4) Check Table 8-D, in Section 100-816-208.
Verify that your telephone is wired correctly
(2-pair or External power) for the options it
supports (ADM, PDIU-DI, HHEU, DVSU,
etc.).

8.10 Ohmmeter Test
8.11 The continuity of the cable run between the
KSU and digital or electronic telephone is checked
with an ohmmeter as follows:

9 FAULT ISOLATION FLOW CHARTS
9.01 The following troubleshooting flow charts are
available to aid in fault isolation. It is recommended
to read paragraph 1~5 of this section and then
proceed to CHART 1, page 7, to begin fault isolation.

1) Disconnect the electronic or digital telephone.
2) At the MDF, remove the bridging clips.
3) At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires
between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red),
the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the
T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for
PEKU/PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers,
see Section 100-816-208.)
4) At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The
proper readings are shown in Table C for
electronic telephones and HDSSs, and Table
E for digital telephones, DDSSs and DDCBs.
8.20 Cable Installation
8.21 If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are
within limits, digital telephones may not operate
because of the following:
1) Digital telephone cable runs must be free of
cable splits (single or double). Test for and

-5-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

TABLE B
(ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES)
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY
CHECK USING VOLTMETER

TABLE C
(ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE CABLES)
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY
CHECK USING OHMMETER

TO
FROM
3
VOLTAGE
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color
1
24 3
T
Green 2
T
Black
1
24 3
R
Red
2
T
Black
1
24 3
T
Green 2
R Yellow
1
24 3
R
Red
2
R Yellow
1
0
T
Green 1
R
Red
2
0
T
Black 2
R Yellow
3
0
T
White 3
R
Blue
3
0
T
White 1
R
Red
3
0
R
Blue
1
R
Red
3
0
T
White 1
T
Green
3
0
R
Blue
1
T
Green
3
0
T
White 2
T
Black
3
0
R
Blue
2
T
Black
3
0
T
White 2
R Yellow
3
0
R
Blue
2
R Yellow

TO
FROM
Resistance
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color
1
T
Green 2
T
Black
open
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
open
1
T
Green 2
R Yellow
open
1
R
Red
2
R Yellow
open
1
T
Green 1
R
Red
40 ohms 1
2
T
Black 2
R Yellow
40 ohms 1
3
T
White 3
R
Blue
40 ohms 1
3
T
White 1
R
Red
open
3
R
Blue
1
R
Red
open
3
T
White 1
T
Green
open
3
R
Blue
1
T
Green
open
3
T
White 2
T
Black
open
3
R
Blue
2
T
Black
open
3
T
White 2
R Yellow
open

TABLE D
(DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES)
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY
CHECK USING VOLTMETER

TABLE E
(DIGITAL TELEPHONE CABLES)
STATION CABLE CONTINUITY
CHECK USING OHMMETER

FROM

TO
Pair Wire Color Pair Wire
1
T
Green 2
T
1
R
Red
2
T
1
T
Green 2
R
1
R
Red
2
R
1
T
Green 1
R
2
T
Black 2
R

Color
Black
Black
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Yellow

FROM

VOLTAGE

Pair Wire Color Pair Wire Color
1
T
Green 2
T
Black
1
R
Red
2
T
Black
1
T
Green 2
R Yellow
1
R
Red
2
R Yellow
1
T
Green 1
R
Red
2
T
Black 2
R Yellow

0
24 3
24 3
0
24 3
24 3

Resistance
open
open
open
open
40 ohms1
40 ohms1

NOTES:
1. This is the maximum allowable reading for all Digital and Electronic telephone cable runs except if connecting an HDSS
console to Circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU—then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms.
2. The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other.
3. Nominal voltage—within the limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8 VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead
placements.

-6-

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO. 1
FAULT CLASSIFICATION

START

Please read
Chapters 1~5 of
this section
before
proceeding.

Is the
system completely
non-operational?

1-1

YES

Is it a
remote
maintenance
fault?

Go to
Chart 2

YES

Is the fault
classified on
this page?

Go to
Chart 3

NO
Is it a CO
line no dial
tone fault?

YES

Go to
Chart 4

YES

Go to
Chart 5

Call your
technical support
group.

NO
Is a DSS
console nonoperational?

NO
Is it a
voice mail/auto
attd fault?

YES

Go to
Chart 6

NO
Is it
an SMDR
fault?

YES

Go to
Chart 8

Is it a station
no dial tone
fault?

YES

Go to
Chart 7

NO
1-1

-7-

YES

Go to
appropriate
Chart 1~12

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO. 2
CATASTROPHIC FAULTS
START

Go to
Chart 1

Is the system
completely
non-operational?

YES
2-1

Check system
hardware per
paragraph 6.01 for DK8
or 7.01 for DK16
of this section.

2-2

Was the fault
isolated by completing
the system hardware
check?

YES
2-3

Tag the defective
unit(s) and return
for repair.

END

2-5

Re-initialize the system
(Programs 90, 92, and
03) and re-check fault
using default program
data (do not enter
customer data base).

2-4

Reprogram customer
data base, one program
at a time, and check
to see if fault re-occurs.

2-6

YES

2-7

Does the fault
re-occur after
entering customer
data base?
NO
END

Was the
fault cleared
after re-initializing
the system?

NO
YES

2-8

Call your
technical support
group.

-8-

NOTE:
Program 03 is not used for DK8.

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO. 3
STATION DIAL TONE FAULTS

START

Check station wiring
per paragraph 8
of this section.

3-1

Repair if necessary.

Is the fault
cleared?

YES

END

NO
3-2

Replaceable Station
PCBs
DK8: QCDU and
QSTU
DK16 Base: KSTU
DK16 Expansion:
KCDU, PDKU,
PEKU, PESU

Is
the
faulty station on a
replaceable station
PCB?

YES

Replace the PCB
and retest
3-8

NO
NO

3-3

Are the
faulty station(s) only
in the DK16 expansion
unit?

YES
3-5

Is the fault
cleared?

YES
3-4

Change the expansion
unit and retest.

Replace the defective
unit and return it to the
repair center

3-6

END

3-7

Is the
fault
cleared?

Replace the DK8 or
DK16 Base KSU and
initialize the system
(Prog: 90, 92, 03).
Retest.

Is the
fault
cleared?

Call your technical
support group.

YES

Go to
3-4

-9-

YES

Go to
3-4

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO. 4
CO LINE DIAL TONE FAULTS
START

1. Check CO line wiring
per section 100-816-008.
2. Test central office line
using a standard telephone
or butt set at the
TELCO block.
Repair as necessary.

4-1

Is the fault
cleared?

YES

END
Replaceable CO Line
PCBs

YES

Change the PCB
and retest.

4-3

4-2

DK8: QCDU
DK16 Base: KCOU
DK16 Expansion:
KCDU, PCOU

4-4

Are all
faulty CO lines
on a replaceable PCB
(not including KSU
Main PCB )?

Is the
fault
cleared?

NO
NO
4-7

YES
4-5

Replace the defective
unit and return it to the
repair center.

END
Are the
faulty CO lines
only in the DK16
expansion
unit?

YES
4-9

Change the expansion
unit and retest.

4-6

4-10
Is the
fault
cleared?

Change the DK8 or
DK16 Base KSU and
initialize the system
(Prog: 90, 92, 03).
Retest.

Is the
fault
cleared?

NOTE:
Program 03 is not used on DK8.

YES
Go to
4-5

-10-

Call your technical
support group.

YES

Go to
4-5

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO.5
DSS CONSOLE FAULTS (DK16 ONLY)

START

DSS
console
type?

DDSS
5-0

Is the correct
PCB slot code entered
in Program 03?

HDSS
On PEKU connected
to HDSS, set SW1
to the DSS position.

Go to
5-0

Enter correct PCB slot
code using Program 03;
then turn power OFF
(for 5 seconds) and
then ON.

NO
5-1

YES
5-2

5-3

Refer to section 100-816-008 and
verify wiring:
• For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base
unit or PDKU (KCDU does not
support DDSS).
• For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of
PEKU (PESU does not support
HDSS).

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

Correct as necessary.

5-4

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

NO
Test DSS cable with
cable continuity. Check
in paragraph 8 of
this section.
Correct as necessary.

5-5

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

NO
Call your technical
support group.

-11-

Go to
5-3

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO.6
VOICE MAIL/(EXTERNAL) AUTO ATTENDANT (VM/AA) FAULTS
START
6-1

This chart assumes
the VM/AA device
has no faults.

Is VM/AA
integration completely
non-operational?

Check that QRCU (DK8) or
K4RCU (DK16) is installed
correctly and programmed with
Code 92 in Prog. 03.
(Prog. 03 is not required for DK8,
QRCU).
YES
Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

NO
NO

6-2

Check that the VM/AA ports are
connected to the standard
telephone station ports correctly.
(Refer to QSTU, KSTU, PSTU, or
PESU wiring diagrams in Section
100-816-208.)

Read “Voice Mail Options” in paragraph 9 of
Section 100-816-207. Also read programming
instructs (in Chapter 2 of Section 100-816302) for the following programs: 03 (Code 92,
slot 00 for K4RCU DK16 only), 15-0 and 15-3
(Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09, 15 ~
20). This information explains System
Hardware and Programming options related to
Voice Mail and external auto attendant.

Correct if necessary.

6-4

Correct Hardware and/or System
Programming as necessary.
Is the
fault
cleared?

6-3

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

NO
YES
END

Using a standard DTMF
telephone, check all standard
telephone circuits (QSTU, KSTU,
PSTU, or PESU).
Replace defective PCB if
necessary.

Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and
657) are stored correctly in users’ Digital
or Electronic telephones. Use operating
procedures in the manual for instructions.

6-5

Is the
fault
cleared?
Other VM/AA related programs:
• 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones
• 13 – Message center
• 33 – Station hunting
• 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing
• 36 – Fixed call forward
• 37 – Ring transfer recall time

NO
6-6

Call your technical
support group.

-12-

YES
END

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO.7
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) FAULTS

START
7-4

Read the SMDR
installation
instructions in
paragraph 7 of
Section 100-816-207
before proceeding
with this chart.

This chart assumes
the SMDR device
has no faults.

No
SMDR data or
garbled data is
detected at the QSMU,
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR
port.

7-8

On DK8 only, verify that the
QSMU is installed and
programmed for SMDR: Prog.
10-3, LED 04 is off for SMDR.
(QSMU is 1200 bps only)
YES

Is the
fault
cleared?

On DK16 only, Verify that the
PIOU/PIOUS baud rate switch
(SW1) is in the correct position
(300 bps or 1200 bps) to match
the SMDR device baud rate.
(Refer to PIOU/PIOUS
installation instructions in
Section 100-816-205.)

Change the QSMU,
PIOU or PIOUS PCB.

7-9

Change as required.

SMDR
data records are
sent correctly but not
when the customer
requires.

YES
7-2

Is the
fault
cleared?

7-5

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END

NO
Set SMDR options in
Program 60: Threshold
time, long distance
calls only, etc.

Verify that the SMDR device
communication parameters are
set for: 8-data bits, no-parity,
1-stop bit.
1200 bps on KD8,
300 or 1200 bps on DK16

7-3
Change as required.

Call your technical
support group.

Is the
fault
cleared?
YES
END

7-6

Is the
fault
cleared?

YES

NO
7-7
• On DK16, the SMDR
port is the bottom
modular jack (TTY is on
top) of PIOU/PIOUS.
• On DK8 & DK16, the
modular cord connecting
to the SMDR port must
be 6-wires.

Check that the SMDR device
is wired correctly to the QSMU,
PIOU/PIOUS SMDR port.
(Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring
in Section 100-816-208.)
Fix as required.

-13-

END

7-1

No other faults are
classified. Call your
technical support
group for assistance.

YES

END

Call your technical
support group.

YES
END

FAULT FINDING
SECTION 100-816-500
MARCH 1993

CHART NO.8
REMOTE MAINTENANCE FAULTS
START

Read the Remote Maintenance Section
100-816-600, Paragraphs 1 to 7. This chart
assumes that the remote terminal and
modem have no fault and that Remote
Maintenance does not operate.

If a Digital or Electronic telephone
is in the programming mode, it is
not possible to enter the Remote
Maintenance mode.

On DK16, check that the IMDU, PIOU, or
PIOUS is installed correctly per Section 100816-205.
On DK16, check that the baud rate switch
(SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS)
is set to the correct position (300 bps LED
ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) to match the
remote terminal baud rate.
QSMU, TTY Port is 1200 bps only.
Correct as necessary.

8-1

External modem
connected to QSMU,
PIOU, PIOUS TTY port

8-2

Is Remote
Maintenance connection
via external modem on TTY
port or IMDU
modem?

IMDU modem installed on
PIOU or PIOUS (DK16 only)

8-4

Check that the communication parameters of
the remote terminal are set to match the
IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit).

On DK8, check that Prog. 10-3, LED 04 is on
for QSMU TTY operation. Check that the
communication parameters of the remote
terminal are set to match the TTY port (7-data
bits, even-parity, 1-stop bit).

Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3
switch is in the MODEM position.
• Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in
Program 77-1.
• If required, assign CO lines for DISA or to
ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code
51~53.
• When calling IMDU via DISA or ring
transfer, dial 619.

On DK16, check that PIOU/PIOUS SW3
switch
is in the TTY position.
Correct as necessary.

Correct above if necessary or
replace IMDU or PIOU(S).

8-3

8-5
Is the
fault
cleared?

YES
END
Is the
fault
cleared?

NO
Check that the modem or terminal connected
to the TTY port is wired correctly per the
Remote Maintenance Section 200-816-600
and QSMU, PIOU/PIOUS MDF wiring in
Section 100-816-208.
Correct above if necessary or
replace QSMU, PIOU or PIOUS.

• On DK16, the TTY port is the top
modular jack (SMDR is bottom) of
the PIOU/PIOUS.
• On DK8 & DK16 the modular cord
connecting the TTY port to the
terminal or external modem must be
6-wires.

-14-

Call your technical
support group.

TOSHIBA SYSTEM PRACTICES
DIGITAL KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION
AND
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE LIST
PARAGRAPH
1
2
3
4
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40
4.50
5
5.00
5.10
5.20
6
6.00
6.10
6.20
6.30
7
7.00
8
8.00
8.10
8.20
8.30
8.40
9
9.00
10
10.00
10.10
11
11.00
11.10
11.20
12
12.00
13
14
14.00
14.10
15

SUBJECT
USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE ............................................
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................
TERMINAL/MODEM INSTALLATION ...............................................................................
Maintenance Terminal/External Modem Option System Hardware Requirements ......
DK8 and DK16 Local Maintenance Terminal Installation ..............................................
Remote Maintenance Option Installation ......................................................................
Programming ................................................................................................................
DK16 IMDU On-site Testing ..........................................................................................
LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION .....................................................................................
Requirements ................................................................................................................
Set-up ...........................................................................................................................
Local Operation .............................................................................................................
REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION ..................................................................................
Requirements ................................................................................................................
Set-up ...........................................................................................................................
Remote Operation .........................................................................................................
Operation ......................................................................................................................
MODE SELECTION ..........................................................................................................
Selecting a Mode ..........................................................................................................
PROGRAM MODE ............................................................................................................
General .........................................................................................................................
System Record Sheets .................................................................................................
Program Types .............................................................................................................
Multiple Station (Range) Programming .........................................................................
Programming Procedures .............................................................................................
DATA DUMP MODE .........................................................................................................
General .........................................................................................................................
TEST MODE .....................................................................................................................
General .........................................................................................................................
CO Line Testing ............................................................................................................
LCD MESSAGE MODE .....................................................................................................
General .........................................................................................................................
Remote Called Station Message Mode .........................................................................
Remote Calling Station Message Mode ........................................................................
SPEED DIAL MODE .........................................................................................................
General .........................................................................................................................
MODE EXIT .......................................................................................................................
DISCONTINUE OPERATION ............................................................................................
Local Terminal ..............................................................................................................
Remote Terminal ..........................................................................................................
EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY .........................................................................................

-i-

PAGE
1
2
2
5
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE LIST
TABLE
RM-A
RM-B
RM-C
RM-D
RM-E
RM-F
RM-G
RM-H
RM-I
RM-J
RM-K
RM-L
RM-M
RM-N
RM-O
RM-P
RM-Q
RM-R
RM-S
RM-T
RM-U
RM-V
RM-W
RM-X
RM-Y
RM-Z
RM-AA
RM-AB
RM-AC
RM-AD
RM-AE
RM-AF
RM-AG
RM-AH
RM-AI
RM-AJ

SUBJECT
PPTC MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION ...............
PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO
TTY CONNECTION ...........................................................................................................
PROGRAMMING PROMPTS .............................................................................................
PROGRAM 90: INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 .........................................................
PROGRAM 92: STATION SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO, VM ID CODES
INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): SYSTEM SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO
INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY
INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION ............................
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL
INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................
PROGRAM 92 (CONTINUED): CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION .........
PROGRAM 03: SLOT ASSIGNMENTS .............................................................................
PROGRAM 00: SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE
MAINTENANCE—SECURITY CODE ................................................................................
PROGRAM 01: LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY .......................................................................
PROGRAM 02: PHYSICAL PORT DISPLAY .....................................................................
PROGRAM 04: PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT ..............................................
PROGRAM 05: FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING ...............................................
TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE (PROGRAMS: 10-1, 10-2, 10-3,
15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 77-2) .....................................................................................................
TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE (PROGRAMS: 20, 30, 31, 35, 40,
41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89) ............................................................................................................
PROGRAM 12: SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS—BASIC TIMING ............................................
PROGRAM 13: DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER ......................................................
PROGRAM 19: BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION ....................................
PROGRAM 21: MODEM POOLING ...................................................................................
PROGRAM 22: DATA STATION HUNTING (DATA CALL ONLY) .....................................
PROGRAM 28: DSS CONSOLE/ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS ................
PROGRAM 29: DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS .............................................
PROGRAM 32: AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE ...................................................................
PROGRAM 33: STATION HUNTING .................................................................................
PROGRAM 34: HOLD RECALL TIMING ...........................................................................
PROGRAM 36: FIXED CALL FORWARD ..........................................................................
PROGRAM 37: RING TRANSFER (CAMP-ON) RECALL TIME ........................................
PROGRAM 38: DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE ........
PROGRAM 39: FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT .........................................................
PROGRAM 42-1~8: PBX ACCESS CODE ........................................................................
PROGRAM 60: SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH ................................
PROGRAM 69: VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY ..................................................
PROGRAM 70: VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE/TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT ...........

-ii-

PAGE
4
5
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
24
25
25
26
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
32
32
33
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE LIST (Continued)
TABLE
RM-AK
RM-AL
RM-AM
RM-AN
RM-AO
RM-AP
RM-AQ
RM-AR
RM-AS
RM-AT
RM-AU
RM-AV
RM-AW
RM-AX
RM-AY
RM-AZ
RM-BA
RM-BB
RM-BC
RM-BD
RM-BE
RM-BF
RM-BG
RM-BH
RM-BI
RM-BJ
RM-BK
RM-BL
RM-BM
RM-BN
RM-BO
RM-BP
RM-BQ
RM-BR
RM-BS
RM-BT
RM-BU
RM-BV
RM-BW

SUBJECT
PROGRAM 78: CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
DISA/IMDU/NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE ..................................................
PROGRAM 80: DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES ...............
PROGRAM 93: CO LINE IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................
PROGRAM 44 (A OR B): TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS
OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY ................................................................................................
PROGRAM 45-1: TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN .........................................................
PROGRAM 45-2: TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE ............................................................
PROGRAM 45-3 ~ 6: EQUAL ACCESS, SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS,
AND AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT LENGTH ................................................................
PROGRAM 45-8 ~ 9: TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE .......................................
PROGRAM 46-2 ~ 4: TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED
AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS ..............................................................................
PROGRAM 46-6 ~ 8: TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED
OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS ..........................................................................
PROGRAM 46-10 ~ 40: TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS ............................
PROGRAM 47: TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES
ASSIGNED BY AREA CODE .............................................................................................
PROGRAM 48: STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION .................................
PROGRAM 50-1: LCR PARAMETERS ..............................................................................
PROGRAM 50-2: LCR HOME AREA CODE ......................................................................
PROGRAM 50-31 ~ 35: LCR SPECIAL CODES ................................................................
PROGRAM 50-4: LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER ......................................................................
PROGRAM 50-5: LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER ......................................................
PROGRAM 50-6: LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT...................................................................
PROGRAM 51: LCR AREA CODES ..................................................................................
PROGRAM 52: LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE .......
PROGRAM 53: LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT ..............................................................
PROGRAM 54: LCR ROUTE DEFINITION ........................................................................
PROGRAM 55-0: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-DELETE .........................................................
PROGRAM 55-1: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-ADD ...............................................................
PROGRAM 55-2: LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-END ...............................................................
PROGRAM 56: LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT ...................................................
PROGRAM DATA DUMP ...................................................................................................
SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP ..........................................................................................
LCD MESSAGING DATA DUMP .......................................................................................
MODE 95: REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE) .........
MODE 97: REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE) ........................
MODE 94: REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE) ..........
MODE 96: REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE) .........................
STATION/CO LINE STATUS CHECK ................................................................................
GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION ...........................................
CO LINE TEST ...................................................................................................................
SYSTEM DATE/DAY/TIME SETTING PROCEDURE ........................................................
SPEED DIAL MODE (CHANGE/REVIEW) .........................................................................

-iii-

PAGE
41
42
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
60
61
61
62
63
64
65
66
66
67
68
69

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

SUBJECT

PAGE

SECTION FLOWCHART ....................................................................................................
1
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8/16
(METHOD ONE OF ONE) ..................................................................................................
3
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8/16
(METHOD TWO OF TWO) .................................................................................................
3
REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM (DK16 ONLY) ..................................... 4
LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER ........... 5
DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE ................................................................................. 12
SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES ............................................................... 12
TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................. 13

INDEX
PAGE
INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................

MESSAGE RECORD SHEET
PAGE
MESSAGE RECORD SHEET ...................................................................................................................

-iv-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

1 USING REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE
1.01 Figure 1 is provided as a quick reference aid in using this section.

General Description: The functions available on
STRATA DK systems via a Local or Remote Terminal
are explained in Paragraph 2
2.

The hardware and installation requirements are
explained in Paragraphs 3 and 44.

To set-up and operate a Local
Terminal, see Paragraph 5
5.

To set-up and operate a Remote
Terminal, see Paragraph 6
6.

To enter Operation Modes from a Local or Remote
Terminal:
• Program
• Data Printout
• Test
• LCD Message Entry
• Speed Dial Entry
See Paragraph 7.
7

Programming via
a terminal;
Paragraph 8
8.

To output data
to a printer via
a terminal;
Paragraph 9
9.

To test via a
terminal;
Paragraph 10
10.

To set messages
via a terminal;
Paragraph 11
11.

To exit and/or change modes; Paragraph 13
12.

To terminate Local and Remote Terminal operation;
Paragraph 14
13.

Paragraph 15
14 provides an equipment compatibility list.

FIGURE 1
SECTION FLOWCHART

-1-

To change or
review speed dial
via a terminal;
Paragraph 12
12.

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

data base programs, including Speed Dial numbers and LCD messages.

2.01 With the STRATA DK8, Remote Administration and Maintenance is accomplished with a
remote terminal/modem communicating over the
public telephone network, but only via an external modem connected to a dedicated CO line or
standard telephone port. See Figures 2 and 3.
With STRATA DK16 Remote Administration and
Maintenance is accomplished with a remote terminal/modem communicating over the public
telephone network via either an external modem
(connected to a dedicated CO line or a standard
telephone port); or, a modem unit (IMDU) installed on a PIOU or PIOUS PCB in the Expansion Unit. See Figures 2, 3 and 4.

Message Mode: Provides for sending, adding, or
changing digital and electronic telephone LCD
messages.
Speed Dial Mode: Allows Station and System
Speed Dial numbers to be programmed remotely.

NOTE:
All the functions in the preceding paragraphs
are also available via an on-site terminal connected directly to an optional PIOU(S) PCB
with DK16, or the optional QSMU PCB with
DK8. These functions are also available to a
terminal with a modem connected to a standard telephone port (Paragraph 5 and Figure
5).

2.02 Remote Administration and Maintenance calls
with the STRATA DK16 may connect to the IMDU
automatically via programmable CO line ringing
assignments (Program 81 ~ 89) or Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) CO lines (Program 78), or
manually via the standard call transfer feature to
intercom number 619. Automatic connection and
DISA allow remote programming to be accomplished after business hours without on-site assistance. Remote Administration calls with the DK8 or
the DK16 via an external modem connected directly to a CO line (instead of an IMDU) connect to
the external modem automatically without any special station or CO line ringing assignments. When
the external modem is connected to a standard
telephone port, the call transfer feature, DISA, and
ringing assignments can be utilized to access the
Remote Administration.

2.04 There are two levels of Remote Administration and Maintenance.
Level 1: Allows access to all programs.
Level 2: Allows access to Programs 30 ~ 39 and
77 ~ 89, which pertain only to individual station
options such as button assignments, class of
service, etc.
2.05 Each Remote Administration and Maintenance level has a different programmable password for customer data base protection. This allows a customer to make certain station moves,
adds, and changes in Level 2; while protecting the
critical system assignments in Level 1 (refer to
Program 00).

3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

2.03 Remote Administration and Maintenance allows the following functions to be accomplished
remotely:
Program Mode: Provides for complete programming of all STRATA DK8 or DK16 programs.

3.01 For Remote Administration and Maintenance
operation, the STRATA DK16 system must be
configured with either an IMDU-equipped PIOU(S)
PCB in the optional Expansion Unit or an external
modem connected to a PIOUS(S) and a dedicated
CO line or standard telephone circuit. (See Figures
2, 3, and 4.) The STRATA DK8 must be configured
with a QSMU PCB and an external modem connected to a dedicated CO line or standard telephone circuit. (See Figures 2 and 3.)

Test Mode: Provides for testing of STRATA DK8 or
DK16 CO lines and stations.
Data Dump Mode: Provides a complete printout of
all or individual STRATA DK8 or DK16 customer

-2-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OR
ASCII TERMINAL
CO LINE

REMOTE
MODEM

PPTC: ADAPTOR, MODIFIED FOR
EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION
AS SHOWN IN TABLE RM-A OF
THIS SECTION
DEDICATED
CO LINE

QSMU (DK8)
— OR —
EXTERNAL
MODEM

TELEPHONE
NETWORK

RS232

RS-232
CABLE

PIOU
DK16
OR
PIOUS

ROM
AND
RAM

DK8 OR DK16
MODEM LINE JACK
3-PAIR MODULAR CORD
TTY MODULAR JACK
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP BIT)

FIGURE 2
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 & DK16 METHOD ONE
TTY MODULAR JACK
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP BIT)
PPTC: ADAPTOR, MODIFIED FOR EXTERNAL
MODEM CONNECTION AS SHOWN IN
TABLE RM-A OF THIS SECTION
QSMU (DK8)
— OR —

MODEM LINE JACK
EXTERNAL
MODEM

RS232

PIOU
DK16
OR
PIOUS

ROM
AND
RAM

3-PAIR MODULAR CORD

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OR
ASCII TERMINAL
CO LINE

REMOTE
MODEM

STANDARD TELEPHONE CIRCUIT

QSTU
— OR —
PSTU
— OR —
PESU

TIME
SWITCH

DK8 OR DK16
CO LINE
CIRCUIT

TELEPHONE
NETWORK

DK8 OR DK16
RS-232
CABLE
CO line connects to modem station port
via: DISA, Ring Transfer, or ringing
assignments (Programs 81 ~ 89)

FIGURE 3
REMOTE MAINTENANCE EXTERNAL MODEM CONNECTION FOR DK8 & DK16 METHOD TWO
-3-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-A
PPTC MODIFIED WIRING FOR EXTERNAL MODEM TO TTY CONNECTION
PPCT (Modular to DB25) ADAPTOR, MODIFIED WIRING FOR
CONNECTING TTY JACK TO AN EXTERNAL MODEM:
QSMU OR PIOU/PIOUS,
TTY JACK
MODULAR PIN NO.

PPTC1A-5M ADAPTOR
MODULAR PIN NO.

MODEM
RS-232
LEAD NAME

DB25 PIN NO.

RD,

6 to

TD,

5 to

DSR

DSR, 4 to

DSR

DTR

DTR, 3 to

20*

DTR

DCD

DCD, 2 to

DCD

SG,

4 Jumper to 5

RTS to CTS

IMPORTANT:

1 to

PPTC1A-5M, pins 2 & 3 and pins 8 & 20 must
be reversed in the field, as shown, for modem
connection. Set Hayes modem to track status of
carrier detect signal (AT & C1) and to answer
(ATS0 = 1).

PIOU OR PIOUS

ROM
AND

IMDU

REMOTE
MODEM

CO LINE

TELEPHONE
NETWORK

CO LINE

RAM
TIME
SWITCH

DK16
CO LINE
CIRCUIT

DK16
RS-232
CABLE
CO line connects to IMDU port (619)
via: DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing
assignments in Program 78

FIGURE 4
REMOTE MAINTENANCE USING IMDU MODEM (DK16 ONLY)

-4-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

QSMU (DK8)
— OR —

PPTC ADAPTER
SEE WIRING GUIDE BELOW (TABLE B)

PIOU
OR
DK16
PIOUS

TTY MODULAR JACK
(7-BITS, EVEN PARITY, 1-STOP)

ROM
AND
RAM

DK8 OR DK16

3-PAIR MODULAR CORD

FIGURE 5
LOCAL MAINTENANCE USING ASCII TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER
TABLE RM-B
PPTC WIRING FOR LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER TO TTY CONNECTION
PPTC (MODULAR TO DB25) ADAPTOR WIRING FOR CONNECTING TTY JACK TO A
LOCAL TERMINAL OR PERSONAL COMPUTER SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT.
QSMU OR PIOU/PIOUS,
TTY JACK
MODULAR PIN NO.

PPTC1A-5M ADAPTOR
MODULAR PIN NO.

DB25 PIN NO.

DTE
RS-232
LEAD NAME

DSR

DSR 4

DSR

DTR

DTR 3

DTR

DCD

DCD 2

DCD

4 Jumper to 5

RTS to CTS

PIOU/PIOUS (DK16) so that maintenance and
programming can be administered internally or
externally from desktop personal computers or
terminals connected to Integrated Data Interface Units (PDIU-DIs).

4 TERMINAL/MODEM INSTALLATION
4.01 DK8 and DK16 provide customers with a
number of Remote Administration and Maintenance configuration options:
• A customer-supplied maintenance terminal can
be connected to the system TTY port (DK8
QSMU, or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS) via an external modem either locally (Figure 5) or remotely
(Figures 2 and 3).
• With the DK16, the IMDU modem (300 or 1200
baud full-duplex) can be connected to the DK16
PIOU or PIOUS to allow system programming
and testing to be accomplished from a remote
location (Figure 4).
• Instead of a modem or terminal, a Stand-alone
Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) can be connected to the TTY port on the QSMU (DK8) or

NOTES:
1. An external modem is required for Remote
Maintenance if a QSMU is installed on
DK8, or if an IMDU is not installed on DK16
PIOU or PIOUS. The IMDU has a built-in
maintenance channel for remote
connection; however, an external modem
requires a CO line or standard telephone
port (Figures 2 and 3).
2. The DK16 PIOU or PIOUS can only be
installed in the Expansion Unit.
-5-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
6) For DK8 and DK16, set terminal communication parameters to seven bits, even parity,
one-stop bit (300, or 1200 bps. See step 3
above).

4.10 Maintenance Terminal/External Modem
Option System Hardware Requirements
4.11 The STRATA DK8 must be equipped with a
QSMU PCB and the DK16 with a PIOU or PIOUS
PCB to support the maintenance terminal/external
modem options. Connecting the maintenance terminal or external maintenance modem to the QSMU,
PIOU, or PIOUS PCB is accomplished with a
standard three-pair modular cord and a PPTC
adaptor connected to the PCB TTY jack.

NOTE:
If a digital or electronic telephone is in the
program mode, programming from the maintenance terminal is not allowed.
4.30 Remote Maintenance Option Installation
4.31 DK16 IMDU Maintenance Modem (Figure
4). The IMDU mounts on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB
and provides 300 or 1200 bps, full-duplex communication for remote maintenance (seven bits, even
parity, one-stop bit). If the IMDU is employed, a
dedicated CO line or standard telephone port is not
required. Connection of the remote maintenance
terminal is through existing system CO lines via
intercom number 619. Refer to the PIOU or PIOUS
portion of Section 200-816-205 for hardware installation and programming requirements.

4.20 DK8 and DK16 Local Maintenance
Terminal Installation
4.21 Install the ASCII terminal in accordance with
the following steps (Figure 5):
1) Connect the three-pair modular cable (24 AWG
twisted pairs) and the PPTC adaptor from the
DK8 QSMU or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS TTY port
to the remote maintenance terminal DB25
connector.

4.32 DK8 and DK16 External Maintenance Modem Installation. Refer to Figure 2 or 3, as applicable, and install the external modem in accordance with the following steps:

2) For the DK8 QSMU, set Program 10-3, LED
04 ON for TTY operation.
3) For the DK16, set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2
switch to match the modem or terminal baud
rate as follows:
• Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator
CD4 is lit); let out (by pushing again) for
1200 bps (CD4 is not lit).

NOTE:
The Toshiba PPTC RS-232 modular-to-DB25
adaptor is factory configured for ASCII terminal connection. Pins 2 and 3 and Pins 8 and 20
of the adaptor must be reversed for external
modem connection (see Table RM-A).

NOTE:
The DK8 QSMU baud rate is always 1200 bps.

1) Connect the modular cord from the DK8 QSMU
or DK16 PIOU or PIOUS TTY port to the PPTC
adaptor and then to the external maintenance
modem RS-232 25-pin connector.

4) For DK16, set the PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch
to the TTY position.

NOTE:
The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to
MODEM position for IMDU operation only.

2) Connect the external maintenance modem
line-side to a dedicated CO line (tip and ring)
or to a dedicated standard telephone port, tip
and ring (QSTU with DK8; KSTU, PSTU, or
PESU with DK16). Refer to Wiring Diagrams,
Section 200-816-208, for wiring/interconnecting details.

5) For DK16, set the P13 jumper plug on the
PIOU to the BELL configuration, or cut the W4
jumper on the PIOUS (also for BELL configuration).

NOTE:
The P13 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT
configurations are not normally used in the
USA.

3) For DK16, set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch
to match the modem or terminal baud rate:
• Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator

-6-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
CD4 is lit); let out (by pushing again) for
1200 bps (CD4 is not lit).

modem with STRATA DK16 or DK8, skip LED 14 in
Program 77-1.

NOTE:
The DK8 QSMU baud rate is always 1200 bps.

4.42 For DK8 only, turn LED 04 “ON” in Program
10-3 to activate the QSMU for external modem
operation.

4) For DK16, set the PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch
to the TTY position.

4.43 For DK16 only, if Remote Administration and
Maintenance calls are to connect to the IMDU
automatically, assign the designated CO lines to
ring the IMDU intercom number (619) in Program
78 as required (use standard STRATA DK16 programming procedures).

NOTE:
The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to the
MODEM position for IMDU operation only.
5) For DK16, set the P13 jumper plug on the
PIOU to the BELL configuration, or cut the W4
jumper on the PIOUS (also for BELL configuration).

4.44 For all cases of Remote/Local Maintenance
with a PC or ASCII terminal for either STRATA DK8
or STRATA DK16 program the security codes for
Levels 1 and 2 as in the Programming Procedures,
Section 200-816-300. Reference Program 00.

NOTE:
The P13 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT
configurations are not normally used in the
USA.
6) The communication parameters for the terminal that will be used to communicate through
the external modem connected to the TTY
port should be set to seven-bits, even parity,
one-stop bit. (300 or 1200 bps, see step 3
above).

NOTE:
The security codes are initialized as “0000”.
These codes may also be changed via a local
or remote terminal.
4.50 DK16 IMDU On-site Testing

7) Programming and system testing, via the external maintenance modem, is described later
in this section. Access to the external maintenance modem is accomplished as follows:
• If the modem is connected to a dedicated
CO line, call the CO line number to establish modem communication.
• If the modem is connected to a standard
telephone port, call a STRATA DK CO
line that can be transferred to (or programmed to ring) the standard telephone
modem port to establish modem communication. It is also possible to establish
communications by calling in on a
STRATA DK DISA CO line and dialing the
intercom number of the modem connected
to the standard telephone port.

4.51 From any working station, test the functioning
of the IMDU for DK16.
1) Press the Intercom button.
• Receive intercom dial tone.
2) Dial 6 1 9.
• Receive modem tone from the IMDU after
a two-second delay.
3) Press the Speaker button to release.
4) Make an incoming call over each CO line that
is programmed to ring the IMDU (station 619).
• Receive modem tone from the IMDU after
a two-second delay with each call.

4.40 Programming

NOTE:
This test checks basic programming and IMDU
operation, and should be completed before

4.41 If an IMDU is used on DK16, enable the IMDU
in Program 77-1 (LED 14). If using an external
-7-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

continuing with Remote Administration and
Maintenance installation.

4) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on.
5) Set the parameters of the terminal (or modem)
connected to the TTY to:
Word length: Seven bits
Stop bits: One
Parity: Even

5) If a terminal is to be utilized on-site, refer to
Paragraph 5. For off-site programming refer to
Paragraph 6.

5 LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION
5.20 Local Operation
5.00 Requirements
5.21 Use the procedure below to establish communications between the local terminal and the
PIOU(S) or the QSMU so that programming may be
accomplished via the terminal.

5.01 For DK16, the optional Expansion Unit must
have a PIOU or PIOUS PCB installed to perform
on-site Remote Administration from a local terminal. For DK8, a QSMU PCB is required. Paragraph
4 and Figure 5 provide installation details on local
terminal installation.

NOTE:
Hereafter, whenever the term CR is used, it
means the return or enter key, depending on
the keyboard being used. SPACE means the
space bar. An empty square indicates one of
several characters will appear in that location
(either on the terminal screen or in a printout).

5.02 The local terminal for either the STRATA
DK16 or the DK8 must have an EIA RS-232 interface, communicate in ASCII code at 300 or 1200
bps (1200 bps only for DK8), have a standard
typewriter-type keyboard, and display data via a
CRT display or printer. A personal computer (PC)
capable of emulating the described terminal with a
communications software package (such as
PROCOMM) may also be used (Figure 5).

1) Set-up the terminal as described in Paragraph
5.10.
2) Set the terminal to on-line.
3) Set “Caps Lock” on (upper case).
4) Press CR key.
• The system responds, and the terminal
displays:

5.03 Operating the PC or terminals, local or remote, is identical. The only difference is the physical connection and the method used to establish
initial communications.
5.10 Set-up

DK CONNECT
> CODE

5) Type the four-digit security code, and press
CR. (Default code = 0000.)
• The system responds, and the terminal
displays:

5.11 Refer to Figure 2 and verify that the local
terminal is connected and set-up as follows:
1) Connect the RS-232 cable to the terminal
connector and the PIOU(S) or QSMU TTY
connector.

OK
MODE

NOTE:
The security code can be entered any time the
CODE prompt appears.

NOTE:
If a personal computer is being used, connect
the cable to the serial “COM” port.

6) To continue, go to Paragraph 7.

6 REMOTE TERMINAL OPERATION

2) Set the PC or terminal baud rate to match the
DK16 SW2 PIOU(S) setting (300 or 1200 bps)
or the DK8 QSMU setting (1200 bps).

6.00 Requirements
6.01 Terminal: For the STRATA DK8 or the
STRATA DK16, the terminal must interface with an

3) Set the terminal for “Full Duplex” operation.
-8-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
asynchronous modem, communicate in ASCII code
at 300 or 1200 bps (1200 only for DK8), have a
standard typewriter-type keyboard, and display
data via a CRT display or printer. A personal
computer capable of emulating the described terminal with a communications software package
(such as PROCOMM) may also be used. (See
Paragraph 15 for compatible personal computers).

remote terminal and the IMDU or an external
modem connected to a dedicated CO line, call the
number of the system CO line assigned to ring the
IMDU or the external modem via the remote terminal/modem set-up:
1) Observe the following:
• When the CO line rings-in, it will connect
to the IMDU or the external modem and
the IMDU or external modem will respond
by returning modem answer tone to the
remote modem.
• The remote modem will return modem
tone to the IMDU or external modem and
communication will be established.
• When communication is established, the
terminal will display: CONNECTED or
COMMUNICATIONS (see Note in Paragraph 6.22).

6.02 Modem: For either system, the modem must
be full-duplex asynchronous, operate at 300 or
1200 bps (1200 only for DK8) and have an RS-232
interface to connect with a terminal or PC (as
described in Paragraph 6.01). It must interface with
the public telephone network and be compatible
with Bell 103 or 212 modem specifications.
6.10 Set-up
6.11 Refer to Figures 2, 3, and 4, and verify that the
remote terminal is connected and set-up as follows:

2) To continue, Press CR and enter the security
code per Paragraph 6.30.

1) Connect the terminal and modem together
with the RS-232 cable.

6.22 Manual connection via call transfer:

NOTE:
If a personal computer is being used, connect
the cable to the serial “COM” port.

1) Using a telephone (at the remote location) that
can switch to the terminal/modem, dial the
number of a system CO line.

2) Connect the modem line input to a CO/PBX
line for access to the public telephone network.

2) When the call is answered, request that it be
transferred to station 619 if an IMDU is being
used. For applications where an external modem is connected to a dedicated standard
telephone port, ask to be transferred to the
intercom number assigned to the modem.

3) Set the terminal and modem baud rate to
match the DK16 PIOU(S) setting (300 or 1200
bps) or DK8 QSMU setting (1200 bps).
4) Set the terminal and modem for “Full Duplex”
operation.

3) After the call is transferred and you hear
modem tone from the IMDU or external modem, switch the call from the telephone to the
terminal/modem.

5) Set the terminal parameters to:
Word length: Seven bits
Stop bits: One
Parity: Even

4) Observe the following:
• When the CO line is transferred, it will
connect to the IMDU or external modem.
• The IMDU or the external modem and the
remote modem will respond to each other
with modem tone and communication is
established.

6.20 Remote Operation
6.21 Automatic connection via ringing assignments: To establish communication between the
-9-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
• When communication is established, the

the terminal, enter the security code, and press the
CR key to receive the MODE prompt.

terminal will display: CONNECTED or
COMMUNICATIONS (see Note).

NOTE:
Refer to Paragraphs 5.20 or 6.20 to accomplish the above.

NOTE:
If the connection is not completed or communication is unsuccessful, the remote terminal
will display: NO CARRIER. If this is the case,
check that the equipment is installed per Paragraph 5.10 or 6.10 of this section and try
again.

1) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on (the
mode name must be entered in capital letters).
2) At the MODE prompt, enter the desired mode
name (Table RM-C).

6.30 Operation

TABLE RM-C—PROGRAMMING PROMPTS

6.31 Once communication is established between
the remote terminal and the IMDU or external
modem, follow the steps below to enter the security
code and receive the MODE prompt.

Mode Function

Mode Name

Prompt Return

Program

PROG

Data Dump

DUMP

Test

TEST

LCD Messages

MESG

(NONE)

Speed Dial No.

REPT

3) Press the CR key.
4) Verify the correct prompt return (Table RM-C).

8 PROGRAM MODE

1) Set the keyboard for “Caps Lock” on.

8.00 General

2) Press the CR key.
• The system responds, and the terminal
displays:

8.01 Data governing overall system operation and
feature execution for the systems are stored in
read-only memory (ROM) and cannot be altered in
the field. However, the data controlling operation of
the various options, both system and station, are
stored in random-access memory (RAM) and can
easily be changed according to individual installation requirements.

DK CONNECT
>CODE

3) Enter the four-digit security code and press
the CR key. (Default code is “0000”.)
• The system responds, and the terminal
displays:

8.02 All options are controlled by selections made
in the System Record Sheet. An initialization process is provided for verifying predetermined system
assignments. The installer can then proceed with
any necessary changes.

OK
MODE

7 MODE SELECTION

8.03 Internal battery power is provided to prevent
loss of system data memory in the event of a power
failure.

7.00 Selecting a Mode
7.01 To enter an operating mode for either the
DK8 or the DK16, establish communication with
-10-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
dialed group: Y = button/LED "ON"; N = button/
LED "OFF."
U: If DATA is not the same for all ports, U indicates
that the button/LED is "ON" for at least one, but
not all ports, in that group.
8.40 Programming Procedures

8.10 System Record Sheets
8.11 Before system data can be programmed, the
System Record Sheets which contain the customer
data base must be available (see Programming,
Section 200-816-302).
8.20 Program Types

1) Refer to a completed System Record Sheet.

8.21 There are three types of programs:

2) Place the terminal into the program mode per
Paragraph 7.

Type 1: All Type 1 programs use the same procedure; however, each button/LED has a different
meaning, depending on the program number.
The status of this data is reviewed, changed,
and stored in system memory using Type 1
program procedures.

3) Program procedures are categorized and presented in the following order. Use these procedures to store System Record Sheet data in
working memory.
a) Initialization procedures:
These procedures must be completed
whenever a system is first installed (see
Type 3 programs).
b) Type 1 programs:
10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 772.
c) Type 2 programs:
Station Class of Service;
20, 30, 31, 35, 40, 41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89.
d) Type 3 programs:
• Initialization; 90, 92
• General; 00, 01, 02 03, 04, 05, 12, 13,
21, 22, 19, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37,
38, 39, 42-1 ~ 8, 44, 60, 69, 70, 78,
80, 93.
• Toll Restriction; 45 ~ 48.
• Least Cost Routing; 50 ~ 56.

Type 2: All Type 2 programs follow the same entry
procedure; however, they require port number
and button/LED entries. Each button/LED has a
different meaning, depending on the program
number.
Type 3: In this type program, the information shown
in the System Record Sheet indicates the data to
be stored in system memory. Each program has
a different meaning, and the data is reviewed,
changed or stored in memory using an individual
procedure for each program.
8.30 Multiple Station (Range) Programming
8.31 Some programs select options for individual
stations (where ■ ■ represents the port number
being programmed). To save time, it is possible to
program all ports or a range of ports simultaneously.

9 DATA DUMP MODE
9.00 General
9.01 This mode allows three types of data to be
displayed or output to a printer: Programs (Customer Data Base), Speed Dialing Numbers (Station/System), and LCD Messages (Station/System).

8.32 Multiple station programming is accomplished
by substituting a range of ports (■
■ ■ * ■ ■)
■ for the
port number part (■
■ ■)
■ of the program.
Example, all ports: 0 0 * 0 9 (DK8) or 0 0 * 1
9
(DK16)

9.02 The three procedures for the Data Dump
mode are called: Program Dump, Speed Dialing
Dump, and LCD Messages Dump.

8.33 When the multiple station range is entered,
the terminal displays existing data as follows:

9.03 Program Dump: While in the dump mode
(see Paragraph 7), enter "PRG" and up to three
characters and press CR. The alphanumeric char-

Y or N: Y or N indicates if a button LED is ON or
OFF; if DATA is the same for all ports in the
-11-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
and CO line circuits from an off-site location.
10.02 This testing function is accomplished by
accessing stations from the remote terminal, and
activating various buttons on digital and electronic telephones to make telephone calls, set
function buttons, change the system time and
date, etc. (see Figure 8 and Tables RM-BS ~ BV).
IMPORTANT!
Any digital or electronic telephone button
can be activated from the remote terminal
at any time while in the Test Mode (even
while the end user is using the telephone).
Therefore, caution must be used to prevent
service interruption or interference. The
Test Mode provides status tests to check
whether or not a station or CO line is in use.
The status checks should always be made
before performing other tests (see Table
RM-BS).

acters represent a program group or a particular
program, i.e., ALL, 03, 04, 10, 39, etc. For a printout
example, see Figure 6.

NOTE:
Programs are output only in the groups indicated. To print out or review a program not
included above, use Program Mode procedures.
9.04 Speed Dialing Dump: While in the dump
mode (see Paragraph 7), enter “REP” and two or
three characters and press CR. The characters
represent the speed dialing codes for either an
individual station, A L L (all stations and system
data) S Y S (system data only).
9.05 LCD Messages Dump: While in the dump
mode (see Paragraph 7), enter “MSG” and two or
three characters and press CR. The characters
represent stored messages for either an individual
station, A L L (all stations and system data) or
S Y S (system data only). For a printout example,
see Figure 7.

10.10 CO Line Testing
10.11 To test CO line transmission, two or three
CO lines must be available at the remote site (see
Figure 8 and Table RM-BU).

9.06 Tables provide a quick reference to the stepby-step procedures to output the appropriate data.

10.12 CO line testing is accomplished by using all
of the following two methods:

10 TEST MODE

1) Establish a talk path between the two remote
stations (B & C) via a CO-to-CO connection
through STRATA DK8 or DK16.

10.00 General
10.01 The remote test mode (see paragraph 7)
can be used to test STRATA DK8 or DK16 stations
CO LINE
NUMBERS
81
81
81
81
81
81
81

>MODE DUMP
D MSG SYS

1:SELECT(LED ON)

8
1
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
CO LINE 08

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
D

CO LINE 01

STATION PORT NUMBER
PROGRAM NUMBER

FIGURE 6
DATA DUMP PRINTOUT EXAMPLE

M60
M61
M62
M63
M64
M65
M66
M67
M68
M69

OUT TO LUNCH
IN A MEETING
CALL
BACK AT
RETURN ON

FIGURE 7
SAMPLE PRINTOUT OF SYSTEM MESSAGES
-12-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

PUBLIC TELEPHONE
NETWORK

REMOTE SITE

STRATA DK16/DK8

PC OR
TERMINAL

RS-232

MODEM

CO LINE

CO LINE A

T S1

(DK16: 300 or 1200 BPS)

IMDU OR EXT. MODEM

(DK8: 1200 BPS)

DATA
BUS
CPU

TOSHIBA

STATION
CKT
REMOTE
STATION B

CO LINE

CO LINE B

CO LINE B
Digital Telephone XX

REMOTE
STATION C

CO LINE

CO LINE C

CO-to-CO
CONNECTION

TIME OR
WEATHER

FIGURE 8
TEST MODE FUNCTION DIAGRAM
stations.
11.12 When the message is set, the Msg LED(s)
on the destination station(s) flash.

2) Establish a talk path between a remote station
and the time or weather service via a CO-toCO connection through STRATA DK8 or DK16.
10.13 The procedures in the tables provide examples of the types of tests and functions that can
be accomplished with the Test Mode. These procedures do not cover all the possible tests that can be
performed remotely; however, by using the principles given, other tests are possible.

11.00 General

11.13 When a destination station calls the originating station, the message is displayed on the destination station’s LCD.
Mode 94: To edit and/or review a Called Station
Message before setting it, use this mode. It will
print out the existing message and allow additions to it (such as a time or a date) before it is set.
(The message cannot be changed with this
mode—just added to.)

11.01 This mode allows a local or remote terminal
to set Called and Calling Station LCD messages for
station users (see Table RM-BO ~ BR). The messages may be system or station type and are stored
in their respective memory locations when set.

Mode 96: To add or change a Called Station
Message before setting it, use this mode. It does
not display the existing message, but allows a
completely new message to be entered before it
is set.

11 LCD MESSAGE MODE

11.10 Remote Called Station Message Mode

11.20 Remote Calling Station Message Mode

11.11 Allows the terminal to set a Called Station
Message for an originating station with the destination of the message being a station or group of

11.21 Allows the terminal to set a Calling Station
Message for a station. The message will be set on

-13-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
• At the P, D, T or R prompt, enter Q U I T CR and

the station’s LCD and is automatically displayed on
other stations’ LCDs whenever they call that station.

observe:
>MODE

13.03 To exit the LCD Message (MESG) mode:
• At anytime while in the message mode, enter: m
0 q and observe:

Mode 95: To edit and/or review a Calling Station
Message before setting it, use this mode. It will
display the existing message and allow additions
to it (such as a time or a date) before it is set. (The
message cannot be changed with this mode—
just added to.)

>MODE

NOTE:
To exit the Message Mode, the terminal keyboard must be in lower case.

14 DISCONTINUE OPERATION

Mode 97: To add or change a Calling Station
Message before setting it, use this mode. It does
not display the existing message, but allows a
completely new message to be entered before it
is set.

14.00 Local Terminal
14.01 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph
13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed
on the terminal.

11.22 Use the procedures in the tables to set
messages via Modes 94/96 and 95/97.

14.10 Remote Terminal
14.11 Exit current operating mode via Paragraph
13 and observe that the MODE prompt is displayed
on the terminal.

12 SPEED DIAL MODE
12.00 General

14.12 To discontinue remote operation:

12.01 The Speed Dial Mode (see Table RM-BW)
can be used to add or change speed dial numbers
to any of the System Speed Dial memory locations
(60 ~ 99) and Station Speed Dial memory locations
(10 ~ 49).

1) Take the terminal off-line.
2) Verify that the modem drops the line.

15 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY

12.02 Chain Speed Dial numbers can also be
programmed using the Speed Dial Mode. See the
Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for
more information regarding chain Speed Dialing.

15.01 Equipment that is known to be compatible
with STRATA DK8 and DK16 Remote Administration and Maintenance is listed as follows. This list
does not show all of the equipment that will work,
only the equipment that has been proven compatible in the field or lab.
Terminals
• Texas Instruments: Silent 700
• Panasonic: KXD-4920
• Personal Computers with the PROCOMM communications software package.
Modems
• Hayes compatible

12.03 To program Speed Dial numbers, enter the
REPT mode per Paragraph 7 of this section. Then
use the Speed Dial Mode Procedure at the end of
this section.

13 MODE EXIT
13.01 Exit the current mode per Paragraph 13.02
and select the desired mode via Paragraph 7.
13.02 To exit the Program (PROG), Data Dump
(DUMP), Test (TEST) or Speed Dial (REPT) mode:

-14-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-D
PROGRAM 90
INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 90
Press CR.

P 90
P90

To Initialize All Programs Enter 0 0
97
NOTE: Single programs can be initialized by entering a single
program number plus #. Group numbers are separated by an .

P90 00*97

Enter button/LED number 0 1.

P90 00*97 01 N

Change 01 button/LED to “ON” by entering Y.

P90 00*97 01 N Y

Press SPACE.

P90 00*97 01 N Y
02 N

Change LED 02 to “ON” by entering Y.

P90 00*97 01 N Y
02 N Y

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

P90 00*97 01 N
02 N Y
P90

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, then CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR.
Exit Program 90
Press # # CR.

P90 #
P

For DK16, Enter Program 77
Press 7 7 CR.

P77

Press 1 1 4.
then: Y CR.

P77 1 14 N
P77 1 14 N Y
P77

To Exit this Program:

Press # # CR.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
For DK16 only: If all programs are initialized, the "IMDU enabled" has also been turned off in
Program 77-1, LED 14. If using the IMDU for remote programming, go into Program 77-1 and turn
button/LED 14 on as shown in steps 9, 10, and 11. If this is not completed, remote programming
must be reactivated locally from the programming digital or electronic telephone.

-15-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-E
PROGRAM 92
STATION SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO, VM ID CODES INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 1.

P92
P92 1

Enter button/LED number: 0 1.

P92
P92 1 01 N

Change LED 01 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92
P92 1 01 N Y

Press SPACE two times.

P92
P92 1 01 N Y
02 N
03 N

Change LED 03 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92
P92 1 01 N Y
02 N
03 N Y

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

P92
P92 1 01 N Y
02 N
03 N Y
P92

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.
9

Clear system speed dial using the procedure on the next page.

-16-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-F
PROGRAM 92 (continued)
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL, SPEED DIAL MEMO INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 2.

P92
P92 2

Enter button/LED number 0 1.

P92
P92 2 01 N

Change LED 01 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92
P92 2 01 N Y

Press SPACE three times.

P92
P92 2 01
02
03
04

N Y
N
N
N

P92
P92 2 01
02
03
04

N Y
N
N
N Y

Change LED 04 to “ON” by entering Y.

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.

Clear LCD message memory, using the procedure on the
next page.

-17-

P92
P92 2 01
02
03
04
P92

N Y
N
N
N Y

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-G
PROGRAM 92 (continued)
LCD CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 3.

P92
P92 3

Enter button/LED number 0 2.

P92
P92 3 02 N

Change LED 02 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92
P92 3 02 N Y

Press SPACE.

P92
P92 3 02 N Y
03 N

Change LED 03 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92
P92 3 02 N Y
03 N Y

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

P92
P92 3 02 N Y
03 N Y
P92

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.
9

Clear the timed reminders using the procedure on the next page.

-18-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-H
PROGRAM 92 (continued)
TIMED REMINDERS INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 4.

P92
P92 4

Enter button/LED number 0 2.

P92
P92 4 02 N

Change LED 02 to "ON" by
entering Y.

P92
P92 4 02 N Y

Press SPACE two times.

P92
P92 4 02 N Y
03 N
04 N

Change key 04 to "ON" by
entering Y.

P92
P92 4 02 N Y
03 N
04 N Y

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

P92
P92 4 02 N Y
03 N
04 N Y
P92

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.
9

To exit this program, press # # CR.

-19-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-I
PROGRAM 92 (continued)
DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME LEVEL INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 5.

P92 5

Enter 0 1; change button/LED 01 to "ON" by entering Y.

P92 5 01 N Y

Press SPACE four times.

P92 5 01
02
03
04
05

N Y
N
N
N
N

Change LED 05 to “ON” by entering Y.

P92 5 01
02
03
04
05

N Y
N
N
N
N Y

P92 5 01
02
03
04
05
P92

N Y
N
N
N
N

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will not
respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.
7

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

To exit this program, press # # CR.

-20-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-J
PROGRAM 92 (continued)
CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM INITIALIZATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 92
Press CR.

P 92
P92

Enter 9.

P92
P92 9

Enter button/LED number 0 3.

P92
P92 9 03 N

Change LED 03 to "ON" by
entering Y.

P92
P92 9 03 N Y

Press SPACE.

P92
P92 9 03 N Y
04 N

Change LED 04 to "ON" by
entering Y.

P92
P92 9 03 N Y
04 N Y

Press CR.
Initialization complete.

P92
P92 9 03 N Y
04 N Y
P92

NOTE: If program data is not entered correctly, CR will
not respond. To retry, press DELETE CR at the same time.
9

To exit this program, press # # CR.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
This program clears Call Forward memory for all stations, but does not reset the Call Forward
indication on the station (Call Forward LCD information and/or Call Forward button/LED). To
clear station Call Forward indications, system power must be turned OFF for five seconds, then
ON. Fixed Call Forward is not cleared by this program.

-21-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-K
PROGRAM 03
SLOT ASSIGNMENTS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 03
Press CR.

P 03
P03

Enter the Slot Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired
slot number.
Example: Slot number 00, enter 0 0.

P03
P03 00 91

Enter the PCB Code Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired
PCB code number.
Example: PCB code 92, enter 9 2.

P03
P03 00 91 92

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 03
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # #, press CR.

P03
P03 00 91 92
P03 ##
P

Turn system power "OFF" for 5 seconds and then turn
power "ON" to store data in working memory (see Notes).

Remote maintenance is disconnected.

IMPORTANT NOTES:
1. This program only applies to DK16 and must be completed with on-site assistance (after
installing PCBs, if any) because the system must be powered down momentarily after PCB
code entry.
2. Even though PCB codes display as being changed, they are not entered into working
memory until the system DC power is cycled OFF and ON.
3. If PCB codes are not entered into working memory by cycling DC power, PCB options will
not function.
4. Only Program 03 requires the system power to be turned OFF and ON to store data into
working memory.

-22-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-L
PROGRAM 00
SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE MAINTENANCE—SECURITY CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 00
Press CR.

P 00
P00

To Check Software Version
Enter Action Code 0. System will display the system's software
version.
Press CR.

P00 0 Version = PSSA
P00

•

Version = QMA
Software version
For DK16, PSSA. For DK8, QMA

To Change Level 1 Security Code
Enter Action Code 1. The system will display the present
level 1, four-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet
and change if required. Press CR.

P00 1 0000
P00

To Change Level 2 Security Code
Enter Action Code 2. The system will display the present
level 2, four-digit code. Refer to the System Record Sheet
and change if required. Press CR.

P00 2 0000
P00

To Exit This Program
Press # # CR.

P00 ##
P

-23-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-M
PROGRAM 01
LOGICAL PORT DISPLAY
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 01
Press CR.

P 01
P01

Enter the Physical Port Number
Enter the desired physical port number.
Example: Port number 01, enter 0 1.

P01
P01 01
Logical Port Displays
Physical Port

Verify Physical Port's Associated Logical Port

P01 01

To Display More Ports/Exit Program
A) To display more logical ports, press CR and go to Step 3.
B) To exit this program, enter # # CR (twice).

P01 01
P01 ##
P (after exit)

(

= Logical Port)

TABLE RM-N
PROGRAM 02
PHYSICAL PORT DISPLAY
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 02
Press CR.

P 02
P02

Enter the Logical Port Number
Enter the desired logical port number.
Example: Port number 02, enter 0 2.

P02
P02 02
Physical Port Displays
Logical Port

Verify Logical Ports Associated Physical Port

P02 02

To Display More Ports/Exit Program
A) To display more physical ports, press CR and go to Step 3.
B) To exit this program, enter # # CR (twice).

P02 02
P02 ##
P (after exit)

-24-

(

= Physical Port)

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-O
PROGRAM 04
PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 04
Press CR.

P 04
P04

Enter the Logical Port Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired
logical port number.
Example: Port number 01, enter 0 1.

P04
P04 01

Press # button.
System displays present station number. Refer to the
System Record Sheet and enter the desired station number.
Example: Station number 16, enter 1 6.

P04
P04 01# 11 06

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data; press CR.
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 04
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P04
P04 01# 11 06
P04 ##
P

NOTE:
A blank is displayed by "N".

TABLE RM-P
PROGRAM 05
FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG

Enter Program Number 05
Press CR.

P 05
P05

Enter Access Code number that you wish to change (0 ~ 9)
Example: 4 (if it was not previously changed, the system
will print another 4. If it has been previously changed,
the system will print the number to which it was changed).

P05 4 4

Change the number if required (one or two digits)
Example: Change to 6, press CR.

P05 4 4 6

Continue returning to Step 3 until all required access
codes have been changed.

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

NOTE:
Programs 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3 use Type 1 procedure.

-25-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-Q
TYPE 1 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE
(PROGRAMS: 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 15, 16, 42-0, 77-1, 77-2)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number
Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number.
Example: Program 10-1, enter 1 0, press CR.

P 10
P10

Enter Program Code or Digit(s) Per Record Sheet
1 or other digit required.
NOTE: Most programs do not require a second digit.

P10 1

Enter Button/LED Number
Enter the desired button/LED number.
Example: Button/LED 01, enter 0 1.

P10 1 01 N

To Change Button/LED Status
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button/LED
status, if required (Y or N).
Example: Enter Y.

P10 1 01 N Y

To Advance to Next Button/LED
Press SPACE. Repeat step 5 if necessary.

P10 1 01 Y
02 N

To Review Button/LED Status Change
Enter CR.
Re-enter Steps 3 and 4.
NOTE: This step is optional and not required to save data.

P10 1 01 Y-

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # #, then press CR.
C) Continue returning to step 2 until all Type 1 programs
are completed.

P10
P10 ##
P

To Exit the Program Mode
Press # # CR.

> MODE

D U M P CR (data dump)

T E S T CR

(test)

M E S G CR

(LCD messages)

(no prompt)

R E P T CR

(speed dial)

-26-

Button LED "ON"
Button LED Number
Program Code
Program Number

To Enter Another Mode
Press

NOTE:
Y = button/LED "ON", N = button/LED "OFF"

(see note)

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-R
TYPE 2 PROGRAM PROCEDURE EXAMPLE
(PROGRAMS: 20, 30, 31, 35, 40, 41, 43, 79, 81 ~ 89)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number
Refer to the record sheet and enter the desired program number.
Example: Program 30, enter 3 0, press CR.

P 30

Enter Port Number
or Port Range
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the desired
port number(s). Example: 0 4.

P30
P30 04

Press # button.

P30 04#

Enter the Desired Button/LED Number
Example: Button/LED 01, enter: 0 1.

P30 04# 01 N

To Change Button/LED Status
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button/LED
status, if required (Y or N).
Example: Enter Y.

P30 04# 01 N Y

To Advance to Next Button/LED
Press SPACE (repeat Step 6 if necessary).

To Review Button/LED Status Change
Press CR.
Re-enter Steps 3, 4, and 5.

P30 04# 01 Y-

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # #, then press CR.
C) Continue returning to Step 2 until all Type 2 programs
are completed.

P10
P10 ##
P

To Exit the Program Mode
Press # # CR.

>MODE

To Enter Another Mode,
Press

D U M P CR

(data dump)

T E S T CR

(test)

M E S G CR

(LCD messages)

(no prompt)

R E P T CR

(speed dial)

(Note)

LED "ON"
Button LED Number
Port Number
Program Number

NOTE:
Y = button/LED(s) "ON", N = button/LED(s) "OFF"; U = button/LED(s) "ON" some ports and "OFF" other ports.

-27-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-S
PROGRAM 12
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS – BASIC TIMING
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 12
Press CR.

P 12
P12

Check the record sheet and enter the program code that is
required.
As an example, feature 3, enter 3.
The present selection will be displayed.

P12 3 1

Refer to the record sheet and change if required.
As an example, change it to 2.
Enter 2.

P12 3 1 2

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 12 data is
entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P12 3 1 2
P12 ##
P

TABLE RM-T
PROGRAM 13
DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 13
Press CR.

P 13
P13

Enter the number 1. The present port number will be displayed.

P13
P13 1 NN

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number.
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0 CR.

P13 1 NN 00
P13

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

P13 1 NN 00
P13 ##
P

NOTES:
1. A blank is displayed by "N".
2. Programs 15 and 16 use Type 1 procedure.

-28-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-U
PROGRAM 19
BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 19
Press CR.

P 19
P19

Enter the number 1.
The present slot number will be displayed.

P19
P19 1 NN

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required slot number.
Example: Slot 04, enter 0 4 CR.

P19 1 NN 04
P19

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

P1 19 ##
P

NOTE:
Program 20 uses Type 2 procedure.

TABLE RM-V
PROGRAM 21
MODEM POOLING
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 21
Press CR.

P 21
P21

Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required port
number for the PDIU-DS.
Example: port 04; Enter: 0 4.

P21 04

Press #.
The system will display the presently selected standard telephone
port number.

P21 04 # NN

Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required
standard telephone port number.
Example: Port 08; Enter: 0 8.

P21 04 # NN 08

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all Program 21 data
is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P21 04 # NN 08
P21 ##
P

-29-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-W
PROGRAM 22
DATA STATION HUNTING (DATA CALL ONLY)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 22
Press CR.

P 22
P22

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required
port number.
Example: Port 03, enter 0 3.

P22 03

Enter #. The present data will be displayed.

P22 03# NN

Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number
that will be the hunt point.
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P22 03# NN 00

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 22
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P22 03# NN 00
P22 ##
P

TABLE RM-X
PROGRAM 28
DSS CONSOLE/ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 28
Press CR.

P 28
P28

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required DSS
console number (1 ~ 2).
The system will display the telephone to which the
DSS console is assigned.
Example: DSS console number 1 is assigned to telephone
number 1.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.
Example: Assign DSS console 1 to electronic telephone 2.
Enter: 2.

P28 1 1 2

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to Step 3 until all data has
been entered for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P28 1 1 2
P28 ##
P

NOTE:
This program applies to digital and electronic DSS consoles and digital and electronic telephones.

-30-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-Y
PROGRAM 29
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number
Press 2 9 CR.

P 29
P29

Enter Console Number and Buttonstrip Group Number
Press

P29

Button Group Number (1 ~ 3)
Console Number (1 ~ 2)

4
5

Enter the 2-digit Button Number to be Programmed (01 ~ 20):
(current feature code displays
after button entry).

P29

Enter New (2- or 3-digit) Feature Code
Press
or

P29

Key code

Button
Console
No.
Button group

3-digit code
2-digit code

Press SPACE to go to next button.
or
Press CR to store data.

Continue with Step 3 until allProgram 29 data is entered.

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

P29

NOTE:
Programs 30 and 31, use Type 1 procedure.

-31-

Old
code

New
code

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-Z
PROGRAM 32
AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter the Program Number 32
Press CR.

P 32
P32

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required port number.
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.

P32 01

Enter #. The present status for this port will be displayed.

P32 01# 100

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required
ringing code. Example: Code 0, enter 0.

P32 01 # 100 0

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required
automatic off-hook code. Example: Code 11, enter 1 1.

P32 01# 100 011

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 32 data
is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P32 01# 100 011
P32 ##
P

TABLE RM-AA
PROGRAM 33
STATION HUNTING
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 33
Press CR.

P 33
P33

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required
port number.
Example: Port 03, enter 0 3.

P33 03

Enter #. The present data will be displayed.

P33 03# NN

Refer to the record sheet and enter the port number
that will be the hunt point.
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P33 03# NN 00

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 33
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P33 03# NN 00
P33 ##
P

-32-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AB
PROGRAM 34
HOLD RECALL TIMING
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 34
Press CR.

P 34
P34

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required
port number.
Example: Port 05, enter 0 5.

P34 05

Press #. The present data will be displayed.

P34 05# 032

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required timing.
Example: 160 seconds, enter 1 6 0.

P34 05# 032 160

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 34
data has been entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P34 05# 032 160
P34 ##
P

NOTE:
Program 35 , use Type 2 procedure.

TABLE RM-AC
PROGRAM 36
FIXED CALL FORWARD
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 36
Press CR.

P 36
P36

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
port number for the station that will have a Fixed
Call Forward button. Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P36 00

Press #. The present data will be displayed.

P36 00# NN

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
the port to be forwarded to when the Fixed
Call Forward button is pressed. Example: Port 04, enter 0 4.

P36 00# NN 04

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 36
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P36 00# NN 04
P36 ##
P

-33-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AD
PROGRAM 37
RING TRANSFER (CAMP-ON) RECALL TIME
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter the Program Number 37
Press CR.

P 37
P37

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
required port number. Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.

P37 01

Press #. System will display the present ring transfer
recall time.

P37 01# 064

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
the required ring transfer timeout.
Example: 70 seconds. Enter 0 7 0.

P37 01# 064 070

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 37
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P37 01# 064 070
P37 ##
P

-34-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AE
PROGRAM 38
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BUTTONSTRIP TYPE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter the Program Number 38
Press CR.

P 38
P38

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
required port number. Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P38 00

Press #. The system will display the present
telephone code.

P38 00# 31

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
the required telephone code number.
Example: Code 21, enter 2 1.

P38 00# 31 21

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 38
data is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P38 00# 31 21
P38 ##
P

-35-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AF
PROGRAM 39
FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
STEP
1

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter the Program Number 39
Press CR.

P 39
P39

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
the required port number.
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P39 00

Press #.

P39 00#

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
the button number.
Example: Button 01, enter 0 1.
The system will display the feature code presently
assigned to this button.

P39 00# 01 00

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
feature code (2 or 3 digits).
Example: Code 01, enter 0 1.

P39 00# 01 00 01

To select the next button number, press SPACE.
Continue returning to step 6 until all port
00 features are programmed.

P39 00# 01 00 01
02 02

Press CR to store data.

P39

A) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 39
data has been entered.
B) To exit this program and store data, press # # CR.

P39 00# 01 00 01
02 02
P39 ##
P

NOTES:
1. Program 40, 41: use Type 2 procedure.
2. Program 42-0: use Type 1 procedure.

-36-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AG
PROGRAM 42-1 ~ 8
PBX ACCESS CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 42
Press CR.

P 42
P42

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
PBX group number (1 ~ 8).
System will display present PBX access code.

P42 1 NN

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
access code.
N = Space
# = Don't care
Example: 9, enter 9 N.

P42 1 NN 9N

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data press CR.
B) Return to step 3 to continue in this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P42 1 NN 9N
P42 ##
P

-37-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993
TABLE RM-AH
PROGRAM 60
SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH
STEP
1
2

ACTION
Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter PROGCR

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT
>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 60
Press CR .

P 60
P60

SMDR Threshold Time
Enter: Item code 2.
The system will display either "0" or "1". "0" indicates that the
threshold time is set at 0.1 seconds. "1" indicates 10 seconds.
The default is "1".
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the correct digit—
if it is not already being displayed—and then CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 21

Allow SMDR printout.
Enter: Action code 3.
System will print out "1" if incoming and outgoing calls will be
printed on SMDR. A "0" will be printed out if only outgoing calls
will be printed.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change (to 1 or 0), if
required, and press CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 3 1
P60

Set Account Code Digit Length
Enter: Item code 4.
The system will display the number of digits allowed in the
account code. The default is 06.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number
of digits (04 ~ 15) and press CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 4 06

SMDR Toll Calls Only
Enter: Action code 5.
The system will display the presently selected feature (0 ~ 5).
The default is 0. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
required feature code and press CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 5 0

Enter DISA ID Code
Enter: Item code 6.
System will display last entered ID code number. Default = Blank.
Refer to the System Record Sheets, and enter a new code if
desired, and then press CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 6 NNNN

Credit Card Call Digit Length
Enter: Item code 7.
The system will display the current digit length.
Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the desired length,
01 ~ 30 digits, and then CR. Example: 13 digits; enter 1 3 CR.
If you wish to change another parameter within this program,
enter its associated item code. To exit this program, go to step 4.

P60 7 13

To Exit Program/Store Data
Press # # CR.

P60 6 NNNN
P60 ##
P

-38-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AI
PROGRAM 69
VERIFIABLE ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 69
Press CR.

P 69
P69

Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code
number (000 ~ 299).
Example: code number 001; Enter: 0 0 1.
The system will display the present account code number
assigned to 001.
Note:
The number of digits will be as defined in Program 60-4.

P69 001 NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

A) Refer to the System Record Sheets, and enter the required
account code number.
Example: number 987654; Enter: 9 8 7 6 5 4.
B) To clear and erase all data enter (all caps)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN.

P69 001 NNNNNN 987654

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 69 data
is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P69 001 NNNNNN 987654
P69 ##
P

-39-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AJ
PROGRAM 70
VERIFY ACCOUNT CODE/TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 70
Press CR.

P 70
P70

Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required code
number (000 ~ 299).
Example: code number 002; Enter: 0 0 2.
The system will display the present digit Restrict (Y) and Toll
Restriction Status (Z) for entered code number.

P70 002 YZ

Refer to the System Record Sheet, and enter the required
digit Restrict and Toll Restriction data.
Example: digit Restrict (1) and Toll Restriction (3);
Enter: 1 3.

P70 002 YZ 13

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 70 data
is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P70 002 YZ 13
P70 ##
P

NOTE:
Programs 77-1 and 77-2, use Type 1 procedure.

-40-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AK
PROGRAM 78
CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS-DISA/IMDU/
NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 78
Press CR.

P 78
P78

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the feature number
for the feature to be programmed.
Example: Feature code 1, enter 1.

P78 1

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the code number
for the area of the feature being programmed.
Example: Code 3, enter 3.

P78 13

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line buttons
that will be associated with this feature.
Example: CO button 01, enter 0 1.
The system will designate whether the CO button/LED is on/off.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.
Press SPACE to display next CO button/LED.

P78 13 01 N
02 N Y

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P78 13 01 N
02 N Y
P78 ##
P

NOTE:
Program 79 uses Type 2 procedure.

-41-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AL
PROGRAM 80
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RINGING TONES
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode.
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 80
Press CR.

P 80
P80

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
port number.
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.

P80 01

Press # key.
The system will display 1 or 2 corresponding to tone 1 or tone 2.

P80 01# 1

Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.
Example: Tone 2, enter 2.

P80 01# 1 2

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P80 01# 1 2
P80 ##
P

NOTE:
Programs 81 ~ 89 use Type 2 procedure.

-42-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AM
PROGRAM 93
CO LINE IDENTIFICATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 93
Press CR.

P 93
P93

Enter Action Code 1
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the appropriate
CO line number.
Example: CO line 2, enter 0 2.
The system will display previously entered identification
characters (up to 16 characters).

P93 1 02

Refer to the System Record Sheet and change identification
if required:
..........
(16 characters maximum).
Example: OVERSEAS.

P93 1 02

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P93 1 02

NOTE:
Use SPACE to clear characters.

-43-

(up to 16)
Current I.D.

(up to 16)

OVERSEAS
(up to 16)

OVERSEAS
P93 ##
P

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AN
PROGRAM 44 (A OR B)
TOLL RESTRICTION TRAVELING CLASS OVERRIDE CODE ENTRY
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 44 (Do not enter A or B)
Press CR.

P 44
P44

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required Toll
Restriction Class number (1 ~ 4).
Example: Class 1; Enter: 1.
The system will display the present override code assigned to
that class number.

P44 1 NNNN

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required override
code number.
Example: 3456; Enter 3 4 5 6.

P44 1 NNNN 3456

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all Program 44 data
is entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P44 1 NNNN 3456
P44 ##
P

TABLE RM-AO
PROGRAM 45-1
TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 45
Press CR.

P 45
P45

Enter the number 1.
The system will display the present dial plan code number (1 ~ 5).

P45 1 1

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required code number.
Example: Code 2, enter 2.

P45 1 1 2

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P45 1 1 2
P45 ##
P

-44-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AP
PROGRAM 45-2
TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 45
Press CR.

P 45
P45

Enter the number 2.

P45 2

Refer to the record sheet and enter the required CO line number.
Example: CO line 01, enter 0 1. The system will display
N or Y to define if the LED is on or off.

P45 2 01 N

Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the CO line
status as required (Y or N).
Press SPACE to step to next CO line number.

P45 2 01 N Y
02 N

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P45 2 01 N Y
02 N
P45 ##
P

TABLE RM-AQ
PROGRAM 45-3 ~ 6
EQUAL ACCESS, SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER NUMBERS, and AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT LENGTH
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 45
Press CR.

P 45
P45

Refer to the record sheet and enter the item number (3 ~ 6).
Example: Item 3, enter 3. The system will display
the present equal access number or EA1 Code.

P45 3 NNNNN

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required number.
Example: 12345, enter 1 2 3 4 5 CR.

P45 3 NNNNN 12345
P45

Enter code number 4. The system will display present authorization P45 4 00 12
code digit length. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
P45
the required authorization code number digit length.
Example: 12, enter: 1 2 CR.

To exit this program, press # # CR.

P45 ##
P

NOTE:
Items 5 and 6 are entered the same way as 3 and 4, respectively.

-45-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AR
PROGRAM 45-8 ~ 9
TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter the Program Number 45
Press CR.

P 45
P45

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 8 or 9 for the
desired code number. The system will display the present
override code number.

P45 8 NNNN

Refer to the record sheet and enter a new number if required.
Example: 1234. Enter: 1 2 3 4.

P45 8 NNNN 1234

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P45 8 NNNN 1234
P45 ##
P

TABLE RM-AS
PROGRAM 46–2 ~ 4
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 46
Press CR.

P 46
P46

Enter class number (1 ~ 4).

P46
Class Number

Enter 2, 3, or 4 SPACE
• 2 — to add codes to memory (allow).
• 3 — to delete codes from memory (deny).
• 4 SPACE — to display codes in memory (allowed codes).

P46

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the area code or
.
area code group. Single
. Group
*
Press SPACE to enter more codes.

P46 X Y
ALLOW
or DENY

Press SPACE to temporarily store data. Press CR when
completed.

P46

Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for
this program.

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

2, 3 or 4

ALLOW? or DENY?

P46 ##
P

-46-

–

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AT
PROGRAM 46-6 ~ 8
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 46
Press CR.

P 46
P46

Enter class number (1 ~ 4).

P46
Class Number (X)

Enter 6, 7, or 8 SPACE.
• 6 — to add codes to memory (allowed).
• 7 — to delete codes from memory (deny).
• 8 SPACE — to display codes in memory (allowed codes).

P46

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the office code or
.
office code group. Single
. Group
*
Press SPACE to enter more codes.

P46 X Y
ALLOW
or DENY

Press SPACE to temporarily store data. Press SPACE when
completed.

P46

Continue returning to step 3 until all data input is completed for
this program.

To Exit this Program
Press # # CR.

6, 7, or 8 (Y)

P46 ##
P

-47-

–

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AU
PROGRAM 46-10 ~ 40
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS PARAMETERS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 46
Press CR.

P 46
P46

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the Toll Restriction
class number (1 ~ 4). Then enter the number 0.
Example: Class 1, enter 1 0.

P46 10

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
button/LED number.
Example: Button number 11, enter 1 1. The system will display
the status of the button/LED.

P46 10 11 TABLE 1N

Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required (Y or N). P46 10 11 TABLE1 N Y
To access next button number, press SPACE.
12 TABLE2 N

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P46 10 11 TABLE1 N Y
12 TABLE2 N
P46 ##
P

-48-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AV
PROGRAM 47
TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY AREA CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 47
Press CR.

P 47
P47

Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 1.

P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required area
code and press CR.
Example: AC 714, enter 7 1 4 CR.

P47 Y 1 AREA CODE NNN 714
P47

To Add Exception Office Codes to Table
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 2.
• Enter exception codes
or
*
• Press SPACE to add more codes.
• Press SPACE CR to store codes.

P47

Except
Except

To Delete Exception Office Codes from Table
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 3.
.
• Enter exception codes
or
*
• Press SPACE to delete more codes.
• Press SPACE CR to store codes.

P47

To Display Exception Office Codes in Table
• Enter exception table (1 ~ 8) and press 4 SPACE.
• Press SPACE to display more codes.
• Press CR to exit display.

P47

To Exit Program/Store Data: # # CR.

P47 Y 2
Except
P47 ##
P

-49-

Delete
Delete
4

Except

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AW
PROGRAM 48
STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 48
Press CR.

P 48
P48

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required port
number.
Example: Port 00, enter 0 0.

P48 00

Press # key. The system will display the present data as a
two-digit code: The first digit designates digit free or digit restrict.
The second digit is the station restriction code. Refer to the
System Record Sheet and change if required.

P48 00# 13

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is recorded for this
program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P48 00# 13
P48 ##
P

TABLE RM-AX
PROGRAM 50-1
LCR PARAMETERS
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50.
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Enter 1. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
button/LED number.
Example: Button 01, enter 0 1.

P50 1 01 N

Refer to the System Record Sheet and change button/LED status,
if required.
Press SPACE to move to next button/LED.

P50 1 01 N
02 N

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 1 01 N
02 N
P50 ##
P

-50-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-AY
PROGRAM 50-2
LCR HOME AREA CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Enter the number 2. The system will display the last area code
programmed. Refer to the System Record Sheet and change
if required.

P50 2 NNN

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 2 NNN
P50 ##
P

TABLE RM-AZ
PROGRAM 50-31 ~ 35
LCR SPECIAL CODES
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter 31 ~ 35 as required.
Example: 31, enter 3 1.
System will display previously programmed number. Refer to the
System Record Sheet and change if required.

P50 31 NNNN

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data for this program has
been entered.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 31 NNNN
P50 ##
P

-51-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BA
PROGRAM 50-4
LCR LDI PLAN NUMBER
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Enter the number 4
The system will display the present LDI route number.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.

P50 4 1

Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 4 1
P50 ##
P

TABLE RM-BB
PROGRAM 50-5
LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Enter the number 5
The system will display the present local route plan number.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.
Example: 2, enter 2.

P50 5 1 2

Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 5 1 2
P50 ##
P

-52-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BC
PROGRAM 50-6
LCR DIAL ZERO TIMEOUT
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 50
Press CR.

P 50
P50

Enter the number 6
The system will display the present dial zero timeout.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required.
Example: 10, enter 1 0.

P50 6 06 10

Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P50 6 06 10
P50 ##
P

TABLE RM-BD
PROGRAM 51
LCR AREA CODES
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 51
Press CR.

P 51
P51

Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
route plan number (1 ~ 8).
Example: Route plan 1, enter 1.

P51 1

Enter 2, 3, or 4 SPACE
• 2 — To add area codes to table.
• 3 — To delete area codes from table.
• 4 SPACE — to display area codes in table,
continue to press SPACE to display more codes.
Press CR to exit display.

P51

2, 3 or 4
Plan No.

P51
<— CODES

and
Enter codes
or
press SPACE after each code entry.

P51

Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been
entered for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P51 12
212
or
P51 ##
P

-53-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BE
PROGRAM 52
LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 52
Press CR.

P 52
P52

Define Route Plan Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
exception table number (1 ~ 8).
Example: Table 1, enter 1.
Enter Action code 0.
The system will print out the currently defined route
plan number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter
new plan number if required. Example: Change to 3.

P52 10

Define Area Code Number
Press CR.
Enter exception table number (1 ~ 8) defined in step 3.
Enter Action code 1.
The system will print out the currently defined area
code number. Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
new area code number if required.
Example: Change to 212, enter 2 1 2.
Press CR.

P52 11
P52

Display Office Codes
Enter exception table number defined in step 3.
Enter Action code 4.
Press SPACE to display previously selected office codes.
Continually press SPACE until all previously selected
codes have been displayed, then press CR.

P52 14

To Add (2) or Delete (3) Office Codes
Press CR.
Enter exception table number defined in step 3.
Refer to the System Record Sheets and enter 2
to add office codes or 3 to delete office codes.
Example: Add office codes 300-325
Enter 2 (or 3) 3 0 0 * 3 2 5 CR.

P52 12
300-325
P52

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) Data was stored when CR was pressed in step 6.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program.
Press # # CR.

P52 ##
P

-54-

3
LCR Plan No.
Action Code
Exception Table No.

212
Area Code
Action Code
Exception Table No.

Office Codes

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BF
PROGRAM 53
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENT
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 53
Press CR.

P 53
P53

Define Route Plan Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the route
plan number (1 ~ 8).
Example: Route Plan 1, enter 1.

P53 1

Define Schedule Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
schedule number (1 ~ 3).
Example: Schedule 1, enter 1.

P53 11

P53 110 0000 0800
Enter Code Number 0
P53
The system will display the previously selected time for
the route plan number (step 3) and the schedule number (step 4).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the time if required.
Example: Change to 0800. Enter 0 8 0 0.
Press CR and repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for all plans/schedules.
NOTE: Enter time using 24-hour format: H H M M.

Priority Class Assignment
Enter the route plan number as defined in step 3.
Enter the schedule number as defined in step 4.
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
station group number (1 ~ 4).
Example: Group 1, enter 1.
The system will display the previously entered route definition
numbers (reference Program 54 ).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter required
route definition numbers (1 ~ 4) and press CR.
Example: Enter 1 and 2 CR.
Continue to repeat steps 3, 4, and 6 until all plans/schedules
are entered.

P53 111 NNNN 12
P53

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) Data was stored when pressing CR in step 6.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data is entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program.
Press # # CR.

P53 ##
P

-55-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BG
PROGRAM 54
LCR ROUTE DEFINITION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 54
Press CR.

P 54
P54

Enter Route Plan Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
route plan number (1 ~ 8).
Example: Route plan 1, enter 1.

P54 1

Enter Route Definition Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
route definition number (1 ~ 4).
Example: Enter route definition number 2, enter 2.
The system will display the previously entered CO line
group number (1 ~ 8) and the modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the CO line
group and modified digit numbers as required, then press CR.
Example: Change the CO line group number to 3 and the
modified digits table to 2. Enter: 3 2 CR.

P54 12 11 32

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P54 12 11 32
P54 ##
P

-56-

Modified Digit Table No.
CO Line Group No.
Route Definition No.
Plan No.

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BH
PROGRAM 55-0
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-DELETE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 55
Press CR.

P 55
P55

Enter Modified Digits Table Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the modified
digits table number (1 ~ 6).
Example: Enter modified digits table number 1, enter 1.

P55 1

Enter Code 0
P55 10 05 10
The system will display any previously entered number of
digits to be deleted (01 ~ 10).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change number if required.
Example: Change to 10, enter: 1 0.

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

-57-

P55 10 05 10
P55 ##
P

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BI
PROGRAM 55-1
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-ADD
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 55
Press CR.

P 55
P55

Enter Modified Digits Table Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).
Example: Enter table number 1, enter 1.

P55 1

Enter Code 1
The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers,
if required.
Example: Enter 1 2 3 4 P 3.
NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses,
press "P" plus the pause number (1 ~ 8).
Special Code Input
Pause = P 1 ~ P 8.
Tone = T at beginning of digits to convert.
Clear = C as first digit, then CR.

P55 11

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P55 11

-58-

(up to 22 digits)

1 2 3 4 P3

1 2 3 4 P3
P55 ##
P

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BJ
PROGRAM 55-2
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS-END
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 55
Press CR.

P 55
P55

Enter Modified Digits Table Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the required
modified digits table number (1 ~ 6).
Example: Enter table number 1, enter 1.

P55 1

Enter Code 2
The system will display any previously entered digits (up to 22).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter new numbers,
if required.
Example: Enter 1 2 3 4 P 3.
NOTE: Pause codes may also be entered. To enter pauses,
press "P" plus the pause number (1 ~ 8).
Special Code Input
Pause =
P 1 ~ P 8.
Tone =
T at beginning of digits to convert.
Clear =
C as first digit, then CR.

P55 12

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P55 12

-59-

(up to 22 digits)

1 2 3 4 P3

(up to 22 digits)

1 2 3 4 P3
P55 ##
P

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BK
PROGRAM 56
LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter Program Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter P R O G CR.

>MODE PROG
P

Enter Program Number 56
Press CR.

P 56
P56

Enter Port Number
Refer to the System Record Sheet and enter the
required port number,
or
.
Example: Port 01, enter 0 1.

P56 01

Press # Key (if single port
entry in step 3).
The system will display any previously entered group number (1 ~ 4).
Refer to the System Record Sheet and change as required.
Example: Change to 4, enter 4.

P56 01# 1 4

To Exit Program/Store Data
A) To store data, press CR.
B) Continue returning to step 3 until all data has been entered
for this program.
C) To exit this program, press # # CR.

P56 01# 1 4
P56 ##
P

TABLE RM-BL
PROGRAM DATA DUMP
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Data Dump Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.

>MODE DUMP
D

To Output Program Data
Enter P R G
CR
= Program number or A L L for all programs.

D PROG

To Stop Printout at Any Time
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.

To Exit the Dump Mode
Enter Q U I T CR.

>MODE

-60-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BM
SPEED DIALING DATA DUMP
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Data Dump Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.

To Output Speed Dialing Data
Enter R E P
CR ---or--- R E P
CR
= A L L or S Y S
= Port number for individual station speed dial.

To Stop Printout at Any Time
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.

To Exit the Dump Mode
Enter Q U I T CR.

>MODE DUMP
D

TABLE RM-BN
LCD MESSAGING DATA DUMP
STEP

ACTION

Enter the Data Dump Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter D U M P CR.

To Output Message Data
Enter M S G
CR ---or--- M S G
= A L L or S Y S
= Port number of individual station.

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT
>MODE DUMP
D MSG
CR

To Stop Printout at Any Time
Enter DELETE CR at the same time.

To Exit the Dump Mode
Enter Q U I T CR.

>MODE

-61-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BO
MODE 95
REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Message Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.

>MODE MESG

To Add Or Review a Calling Station Message
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and
enter m 9 5.

m 95

NOTE:
Enter “m” anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure.
3

Enter X X X (XXX = station number where the message will be
set and stored).

m95 XXX

Enter p
(p = page command and
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system message).

m95 XXX p

[M]

NOTES:
1. To store system messages permanently, DKT or EKT XXX
must be the station at port 00.
2. After p
is entered, the previously stored message is
displayed. If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed.
5

To Change Previous Message
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message
(alphanumeric, 32 characters max.).

m95 XXX p

[M+]

To Set the Message on DKT or EKT XXX’s LCD
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0.

m95 XXX p
m 0

[M+] p

Zero

To Exit the Message Mode
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).

m 0
q
> MODE

NOTES:
1. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 procedure.
2. [M] represents the message entered.
3. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.

-62-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BP
MODE 97
REMOTE CALLING STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Message Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.

>MODE MESG

To Add a Message (or change a previously stored message)
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case (caps lock off) and
enter m 9 7.

m 97

NOTE:
Enter “m” at anytime it is desired to start over in this procedure.
3

Enter X X X (XXX = station number for which the message will
be set and stored).

m97 XXX

Enter: p
(p = page command and
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).

m97 XXX p

NOTE:
To store system message change permanently, DKT or EKT XXX
must be station assigned to port 00.
5

To Add a Message
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message
(alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message displays as
it is entered.

m97 XXX p

[M]

To Set the Message on the DKT/EKT LCD
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0.

m97 XXX p
m 0 Zero

[M] p

To Exit the Message Mode
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).

m 0
q
>MODE

NOTES:
1. To cancel a message set via Mode 95, use Mode 97 with any message number in step 4 and skip
step 5.
2. [M] represents the message entered.
3. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.

-63-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BQ
MODE 94
REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/REVIEW/CHANGE)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Message Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.

>MODE MESG

To Add Or Review a Called Station Message
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and
enter m 9 4.

m 94

Enter X X X (XXX = Destination station number or destination
group number [30 = all stations, 31-34 per system, Program 31]).

m94 XXX

Enter p Y Y Y (p = page command [lower case] and
Y Y Y = originating station number).

m94 XXX p YYY

Enter p
(p = page command [lower case] and
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).
After p
is entered, the previously stored message (M) is
displayed. (If there is no stored message, nothing is displayed.)

m94 XXX p YYY p

[M]

To Change the Message (M+)
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message
as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max. for total message).

m94 XXX p YYY p

[M+]

To Set Message
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0.
Destination station: Msg LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is
displayed.
Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed.

m94 XXX p YYY p
m 0

[M+] p

To Exit the Message Mode
At any time, enter m 0 q (lower case).

m 0
q
>MODE

NOTES:
1. Press m at any time to start over.
2. [M] represents the message entered.

-64-

Zero

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BR
MODE 96
REMOTE CALLED STATION MESSAGING (ADD/CHANGE)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Message Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter M E S G CR.

>MODE MESG

To Change or Add a New Called Station Message
Set the terminal keyboard to the lower case (cap lock off) and
enter m 9 6.

m 96

NOTE:
Enter “m” (lower case) anytime it is desired to start over
in this procedure.
3

Enter X X X (XXX = destination station number or destination
station group number – 30 = all DKTs/EKTs, 31 ~ 34 per system,
Program 31).

m96 XXX

Enter p Y Y Y (p = page command and YYY = originating
station number).

m96 XXX p YYY

Enter p
(p = page command and
= 2-digit message memory location: 10 ~ 19 personal
messages and 60 ~ 99 = system messages).

m96 XXX p YYY p

To Add the New Message [M]
Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and enter message
as required (alphanumeric, 32 characters max.). New message
displays as it is entered.

m96 XXX p YYY p

[M]

To Set the Message
Set the terminal keyboard to lower case and enter p m 0.
Destination station: Msg LED flashes, “CALL YYYM” is
displayed on LCD.
Origination station: “SENT XXXM” is displayed on LCD.

m96 XXX p YYY p
m 0

[M] p

To Exit the Message Mode
At any time, enter m 0 p (lower case).

m 0
q
>MODE

NOTES:
1. [M] represents the message entered.
2. DKT = digital telephone; EKT = electronic telephone.

-65-

Zero

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BS
STATION/CO LINE STATUS CHECK
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Test Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.

>MODE TEST

To Check Station Line Status
Enter S E K T X X (X X = port number).
Possible status: Idle on-hook, idle off-hook, busy on-hook,
busy off-hook.

T SEKT XX IDLE ON-HOOK
T

IMPORTANT!
To prevent service interference, station line status must be
idle on-hook before initiating a test from that station.
3

To Check CO Line Status
Enter S C O Y Y (Y Y = CO line number).
Possible status: Idle, busy.

T SCOYY – BUSY
T

To Exit the Test Mode
At the T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.

T QUIT
> MODE

TABLE RM-BT
GENERAL STATION ACCESS AND BUTTON ACTIVATION
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Test Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.

>MODE TEST
T

To Activate A Button
Enter T K X X K Y Y CR.
XX = Port number and YY = button number.
NOTE: Button numbers begin at 01.

T TKXX KYY
T

To Activate A Function Button
Enter T K X X F CR F = function button designator
SPKR
S
HOLD
H
F = S, H, C, M
CONF
C
MIC
M

TTKXX F
T

To Access A CO Line (via CO Access Code) and Dial Out
Enter T K X X K 0 1 A A A
CR.
AAA = 1, 2, or 3-digit CO line access code and
= telephone number.

TTKXX K01 AAA
T

To Access A CO Line (via CO Line Button) and Dial Out
Enter T K X X K Y Y
CR.
YY = CO line number.

TTKXX KYY
T

Telephone Number

To Exit the Test Mode
At T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.

-66-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BU
CO LINE TEST
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Test Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.

>MODE TEST

To Verify Station/CO Line Status
Station line status, enter S E K T X X (X X = station port).
CO line status, enter S C O Y Y (Y Y = CO line number).

T SEKT XX IDLE ON-HOOK
T
T SCO YY IDLE

Call Remote Station B (from SEKT XX and CO line YY)
Enter T K X X K Y Y
CR.
( = station B’s telephone number)
Answer station B.

T TK XX KYY
T

NOTE:
If the system is equipped with Music-on-hold, go to step 4. If the
line must be tested via a CO-to-CO connection, go to step 6.
4

A) Press the Hold button on TK XX (station B on hold).
Enter T K X X H CR.
B) Listen at station B and check that the transmission from the
music source is acceptable.
C) Press the Spkr button on TKXX (to release the call).
Enter T K X X S CR.

Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested.

To Set Up A CO-to-CO Connection
Press the Cnf/Trn button on T K X X.
Enter T K X X C CR.

T TKXX H
T

T TKXX S
T

T TKXX C
T

NOTES:
1. Station B is connected via step 3.
2. Verify that Program 15-5 allows CO-to-CO connections.
3. The next step must be completed immediately to avoid
dial tone timeout.
7

Call station C (or local time/weather) via CO line C.
Enter: T K X X K Y Y
CR.
X X = CO line C’s button number and = telephone number of
station C.
Answer station C (or verify time/weather connection) and go to
next step.

T TKXX KYY
T

Press the Cnf/Trn button on STXX to establish a conference
between all parties.

T TKXX C
T

If you wish to tie the two CO lines together and hang up:
Enter T K X X C CR.
Enter T K X X S CR.

T TKXX C
TTKXX S
T

Continue returning to step 2 until all CO lines are tested.

To Exit the Test Mode,
At the T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.

-67-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BV
SYSTEM DATE/DAY/TIME SETTING PROCEDURE
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Test Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter T E S T CR.

>MODE TEST
T

To Set Date
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 1 Y Y M M D D # CR.

T TK00 K01 651YYMMDD#
T

To Set Time Of Day
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 2 H H M M S S # CR.

TTK00 K01 652HHMMSS#

To Set Day Of The Week
Enter T K 0 0 K 0 1 6 5 3 D # CR.
(D = day of week with Sunday = 1 ~ Saturday = 7)

TTK00 K01 653D#
T

To Exit the Test Mode
At T prompt, enter Q U I T CR.

-68-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

TABLE RM-BW
SPEED DIAL MODE (CHANGE/REVIEW)
STEP

ACTION

DISPLAY/PRINTOUT

Enter the Speed Dial Mode
At the >MODE prompt, enter R E P T CR.

>MODE REPT

Enter the station port number for which the speed
dial number will be programmed
Press
(00 ~ 19)

R
Station Port Number

NOTE: If programming system speed dial, enter
port number 0 0.
3

Enter Speed Dial Memory Location to be Programmed
R
N
(current memory will display)
A) Press
10 ~ 49 Station
Memory Nothing in
60 ~ 99 System
location memory
B) Press SPACE to review each memory location or go to Step 4.

1) To enter speed dial number (20 digits max)

Press

..........
New speed dial number

2) To enter chain dial number
17-digit number

Press A

............
System speed dial location (90 ~ 99)

(Refer to Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for
information regarding chain dialing.)
Special Entries: F=Flash; P=1.5 or 3-sec Pause (Prog. 12);
L=10-sec Pause; N=Clear Memory.
Special code entry: I = Intercom
H = Hold
C = Conference
5

To store data, press CR

NOTE: If program entry is not correct, CR will not
respond. To try again, press DELETE CR at the same time.
6

N
..........

20-digit number

To Exit the Speed Dial Mode
Press Q U I T CR.

>MODE

-69-

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

REMOTE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES INDEX
PROGRAM
46-10 ~ 40
47
48
50-1
50-2
50-31 ~ 35
50-4
50-5
50-6
51
52
53
54
55-0
55-1
55-2
56
60
69
70
77 (-1, -2)
78
79
80
81 ~ 89
93

INITITAILIZATION PROGRAMS PAGE NUMBER
System Programs (90)
15
Station Speed Dial, VM I.D. Codes (92)
16
System Speed Dial (92)
17
LCD Messages (92)
18
Timed Reminders (92)
19
Digital Telephone Volume Level (92)
20
Call Forward Backup (92)
21
PCB Slot Assignments (03)
22
PROGRAM
PROGRAM TYPE
TYPE 1
1
TYPE 2
2
00
3
01
3
02
3
03
3
04
3
05
3
10 (-1, -2, -3)
1
12
3
13
3
15
1
16
1
19
3
20
2
21
3
22
3
28
3
29
3
30
2
31
2
32
3
33
3
34
3
35
2
36
3
37
3
38
3
39
3
40
2
41
2
42-0
1
42-1 ~ 8
3
44 (A, B)
3
45-1
3
45-2
3
45-3 ~ 6
3
45-8 ~ 9
3
46-2 ~ 4
3
46-6 ~ 8
3

PAGE NUMBER
26
27
23
24
24
22
25
25
26
28
28
26
26
29
27
29
30
30
31
27
27
32
32
33
27
33
34
35
36
27
27
26
37
44
44
45
45
46
46
47

-70-

PROGRAM TYPE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
2
3
2
3

PAGE NUMBER
48
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
43
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
38
39
40
26
41
27
42
27
43

DATA DUMP PROCEDURES
System Programs
Speed Dial Numbers
LCD Messages

60
61
61

REMOTE LCD
MESSAGING PROCEDURES
Remote Calling Station (Edit) (Mode 95)
Remote Calling Station (New) (Mode 97)
Remote Called Station (Edit) (Mode 94)
Remote Called Station (New) (Mode 96)

62
63
64
65

REMOTE TEST PROCEDURES
Station/Line Status Check
Station Button Activation
CO Line Test
Set: Date/Day/Time

66
66
67
68

REMOTE
Speed Dial (Change/Review)

REMOTE ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SECTION 100-816-600
MARCH 1993

MESSAGE RECORD SHEET—Use several sheets if necessary
MESG.#______

MESG.#______

-71-

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 1998:10:23 17:13:32
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.01 for Windows
Author                          : tsd
Creator                         : PageMaker 5.0
Title                           : DK8 & 16 Installation and Maintenance Manual
Modify Date                     : 1999:10:11 11:25:05
Page Count                      : 321
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toshiba Strata Dk8 Installation And Maintenance Manual & 16

Strata DK 8-16 Instalation Strata DK_8-16_Instalation www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation